Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows 5.9.13

User Manual

by Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.

Copyright 1996-2009 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.

Qedit is a trademark of Robelle Solutions Technology Inc. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft

Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

Updated Saturday, April 07, 2012

Robelle Solutions Technology Inc.

7360 – 137 Street, Suite 372

Surrey, BC, Canada V3W 1A3

Toll-free: 1.888.robelle

Tel: 604.501.2001

Fax: 604.501.2003

[email protected]

www.robelle.com

Contents

Welcome to Qedit for Windows 1

Overview of Qedit for Windows ...............................................................................................1

Hardware and Software Requirements........................................................................1

Network Requirements................................................................................................2

The Ultimate Editing Tool.........................................................................................................2

Multi-File Access—Simultaneously............................................................................2

Speed, Speed, and More Speed ...................................................................................2

Highly Scaleable..........................................................................................................2

Fully Integrated with Windows...................................................................................3

Multiple Independent Views .......................................................................................3

Consistent Interface on All Platforms .........................................................................3

Internet Friendly..........................................................................................................3

Host-Based Qedit vs. Qedit for Windows .................................................................................3

Getting Help ..............................................................................................................................4

What’s New in This Version .....................................................................................................4

Highlights in Version 5.9.13 .......................................................................................4

Highlights in Version 5.9.12 .......................................................................................4

Highlights in Version 5.9.11 .......................................................................................4

Highlights in Version 5.9.10 .......................................................................................4

Compatibility .............................................................................................................................4

Known Problems .......................................................................................................................5

Document Window Displayed Incorrectly..................................................................5

Getting Started 7

Installing Qedit for Windows ....................................................................................................7

Downloading Qedit for Windows ...............................................................................7

Installing Qedit on Stand-Alone PCs ..........................................................................7

Installing Qedit on Networked PCs.............................................................................8

Installing the Qedit for Windows Server.....................................................................9

Running the HP-UX Server.......................................................................................10

Support Files............................................................................................................................11

Manuals .....................................................................................................................11

Language Templates..................................................................................................11

Upgrading Qedit for Windows ................................................................................................12

Uninstalling Qedit for Windows..............................................................................................12

Customizing the Client ............................................................................................................12

The Preferences Dialog Box......................................................................................13

Customizing the Server............................................................................................................19

How To Specify To the Server Program ...................................................................19

Configuration Files on the Host ................................................................................20

Connection Template File .........................................................................................21

Running Qedit..........................................................................................................................21

Expiring Version .......................................................................................................21

Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents

• i

ii

• Contents

Tip of the Day............................................................................................................22

Startup Process ..........................................................................................................22

The Application Window ........................................................................................................23

Application Icon and Control Menu..........................................................................23

Application Title Bar.................................................................................................24

Application Menu Bar ...............................................................................................24

Application Toolbar...................................................................................................25

Toolbar Buttons.........................................................................................................27

Application Workspace .............................................................................................30

Application Status Bar...............................................................................................30

The Document Window...........................................................................................................31

Document Title Bar ...................................................................................................32

Document Workspace ...............................................................................................33

Document Status Bar.................................................................................................33

Splitting a Document into Independent Views..........................................................35

Collapsing Multiple Views into One .........................................................................36

A Windows Primer 37

Windows Standard Functions ..................................................................................................37

Switching Between Applications.............................................................................................37

Controlling the Size and Position of Windows........................................................................37

Moving a Window Around on the Screen.................................................................37

Resizing a Window....................................................................................................37

Minimizing a Window...............................................................................................38

Maximizing a Window ..............................................................................................38

Arranging Windows into Tiles ..................................................................................38

Closing a Window .....................................................................................................38

Mouse Operations....................................................................................................................38

Using Mouse Buttons ................................................................................................39

Selecting Text with a Mouse .....................................................................................40

Selecting More Text ..................................................................................................41

Extending a Selection ................................................................................................41

Rectangular Selections ..............................................................................................42

Selecting a Menu Command......................................................................................43

Selecting Toolbar Buttons .........................................................................................43

Selecting from a List..................................................................................................43

Shortcut Menus in Windows 95 ..............................................................................................43

Shortcut Menu on Text Boxes...................................................................................43

Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons..........................................................................44

Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace..................................................................45

Send To Function in Windows 95 ...........................................................................................46

Adding Qedit as a Send To Target ............................................................................46

Registering File Types in Windows 95....................................................................................47

Registering Text Files................................................................................................47

Registering Qedit Scripting Language Files..............................................................48

Drag-and-drop File Open.........................................................................................................48

Drop on Desktop Icon ...............................................................................................48

Drop on Qedit Application Window .........................................................................49

Drop on Taskbar Button ............................................................................................49

Special and International Characters .......................................................................................49

Long File Names......................................................................................................................49

Connecting to a Host or Network 51

Qedit for Windows User Manual

What do you need to create a connection? ..............................................................................51

Connecting Through a Network ................................................................................51

Accessing a File Server .............................................................................................52

Creating a Connection .............................................................................................................52

Creating a Temporary Connection ............................................................................52

Creating a Saved Connection ....................................................................................52

Copying a Saved Connection ....................................................................................56

Opening a Connection .............................................................................................................56

Opening a Temporary Connection ............................................................................56

Opening a Saved Connection ....................................................................................57

Editing a Saved Connection.....................................................................................................58

Modifying a Saved Connection.................................................................................58

Renaming a Saved Connection..................................................................................58

Deleting a Saved Connection ....................................................................................58

Closing a Connection...............................................................................................................59

Customizing a Connection.......................................................................................................59

Automatically Logging In at Startup.........................................................................59

Closing Connections without Open Files ..................................................................59

Creating & Opening Files 61

Creating Files...........................................................................................................................61

Creating a New Host File ..........................................................................................61

Creating a New Local File.........................................................................................62

Defining File Options ..............................................................................................................63

Setting the Line Termination Character ....................................................................66

Notation in Host Operating Systems .......................................................................................67

UNIX Notation..........................................................................................................67

MPE Notation............................................................................................................68

POSIX Notation on MPE ..........................................................................................68

Host Directories.......................................................................................................................68

Accessing Host Directories .......................................................................................69

The Directory Listing ................................................................................................69

Sorting the Directory Listing.....................................................................................70

Searching for a File ...................................................................................................70

Using Wildcards........................................................................................................70

Changing Directories.................................................................................................71

Selecting Files ...........................................................................................................71

Opening Selected Files..............................................................................................72

Printing a Directory Listing.......................................................................................72

Saving Host Files ......................................................................................................72

Opening a File .........................................................................................................................72

Document Attributes Saved by Qedit........................................................................72

Opening a File from a Command Line......................................................................73

Opening Embedded Files ..........................................................................................74

Opening MRU (Most Recently Used) Files ..............................................................74

Opening a Local File .................................................................................................75

Opening an HTML File.............................................................................................77

Opening a Host File...................................................................................................77

Opening Files with Binary Data ................................................................................80

Server Warnings........................................................................................................80

Maintaining and Using a List of Favorites ................................................................81

Viewing the List of Open Files................................................................................................85

Customizing Opening a File ....................................................................................................85

Setting Default Options for New Files ......................................................................85

Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents

• iii

iv

• Contents

Loading Local Files into Memory .............................................................................86

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text 87

Overview..................................................................................................................................87

Determining Your Position in a File........................................................................................87

Cursor Position and Appearance ...............................................................................87

Controlling the Insertion Point Movements ..............................................................88

Insert Mode vs. Overwrite Mode.............................................................................................88

Typing Text and Inserting Special Characters.........................................................................89

Typing Text ...............................................................................................................89

Inserting Control Characters......................................................................................89

Inserting Nonprinting Characters ..............................................................................90

Nonprinting Characters for Reflection Users ............................................................91

Inserting Special and International Characters ..........................................................92

Selecting Text ..........................................................................................................................92

Cursor Position and Appearance During Selection ...................................................93

Multiple Ways to Select Text ....................................................................................93

Copying, Moving and Pasting Text .........................................................................................94

The Clipboard............................................................................................................94

Copying Text.............................................................................................................96

Pasting Text...............................................................................................................96

Moving Text ..............................................................................................................96

Deleting Text ...........................................................................................................................98

Merging Two Lines ...................................................................................................98

Working with Columns and Tabs ............................................................................................98

Deleting Text in Columns..........................................................................................99

Inserting Text in Columns .........................................................................................99

Shifting Text in Columns ........................................................................................100

Shifting to the Next Tab Stop..................................................................................101

Removing or Inserting Tab Characters....................................................................101

Expanding Tabs in Clipboard..................................................................................102

Working with Rectangular Selections ...................................................................................102

Copying and Cutting a Rectangular Selection.........................................................102

Pasting a Rectangular Selection in Replacement.....................................................102

Inserting a Rectangular Selection ............................................................................103

Deleting or Clearing a Rectangular Selection .........................................................103

Extending a Rectangular Selection..........................................................................103

Undoing and Redoing ............................................................................................................103

What Delimits an Undo and Redo Transaction? .....................................................104

Undo Command.......................................................................................................105

Redo Command .......................................................................................................105

Text-Formatting Features 107

Overview................................................................................................................................107

Fonts ......................................................................................................................................107

Changing the Document Font..................................................................................107

Changing the Directory Font ...................................................................................108

Bold, Italics and Underline ....................................................................................................108

Ruler Bar................................................................................................................................109

Displaying and Hiding the Ruler Bar ......................................................................110

Tab Stops ...............................................................................................................................110

Tab Stops on the Server...........................................................................................110

Tab Stops on the Client ...........................................................................................111

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Auto-Indent............................................................................................................................114

Guide Lines............................................................................................................................114

Setting Guide Lines on the Ruler ............................................................................114

Moving or Clearing Guide Lines on the Ruler........................................................115

Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box ..................................................115

Moving Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box .................................................117

Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box ................................................117

Invisible Formatting Characters.............................................................................................117

Matching Opening and Closing Characters ...........................................................................118

Working With Syntax Coloring.............................................................................................119

Ambiguous Language Identification .......................................................................119

SQL Language Templates .......................................................................................119

Order of Precedence ................................................................................................120

Customizing Text-Formatting Features .................................................................................120

Displaying the Ruler Bar When Opening Files.......................................................120

Setting the Default Font for Document Windows...................................................121

Setting the Default Value for Auto-indent ..............................................................121

Displaying Invisible Formatting Characters When Opening Files..........................121

Setting the Default Color Scheme ...........................................................................121

Line Features 127

Overview ...............................................................................................................................127

Record Numbers ....................................................................................................................127

Host Line Numbers .................................................................................................127

Record Numbers......................................................................................................127

Trailing Blanks ......................................................................................................................128

Preserve Trailing Blanks .........................................................................................128

COBOL Tags.........................................................................................................................129

COBOL Tags in Server Configuration Files ...........................................................129

COBOL Tags in the Client......................................................................................131

Line Length............................................................................................................................133

Maximum Line Length............................................................................................133

Line Termination ...................................................................................................................133

Searching & Replacing Features 135

Overview ...............................................................................................................................135

Scrolling Through a File........................................................................................................135

Using the Scroll Bars...............................................................................................136

Using the Intelligent Mouse ....................................................................................136

Using Cursor Movement Keys ................................................................................137

Setting Markers in a File........................................................................................................137

Marking a Position ..................................................................................................137

Returning to a Marked Position...............................................................................137

Exchanging Current Position with Last Marker......................................................137

Using the Last Marker to Select Text......................................................................138

Defining the Terms of a Search .............................................................................................138

Common Search Operations ..................................................................................................139

Finding Consecutive Occurrences of a String .........................................................139

Finding the First and Last Occurrence of a String ..................................................140

Finding a Highlighted Word ...................................................................................140

Limiting a Search to Part of a File...........................................................................140

Searching in Columns .............................................................................................141

Finding a Line Number in a Host File.....................................................................141

Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents

• v

vi

• Contents

Finding a Record Number .......................................................................................142

Common Replace Operations ................................................................................................142

Replacing Occurrences of a String ..........................................................................142

Replacing All Occurrences of a String ....................................................................143

Replacing a String Based on Pattern Matching .......................................................143

Replacing a String Using Regular Expressions.......................................................143

Customizing Your Search Options ........................................................................................143

Allowing the Caret in Undefined Areas ..................................................................143

Automatically Marking Successful Searches ..........................................................144

Scrolling Method for Host Files ..............................................................................144

Setting Default Search Options ...............................................................................145

Copying & Printing Files 147

Overview................................................................................................................................147

Copying a File........................................................................................................................147

Copying Local Files ................................................................................................147

Copying Host Files ..................................................................................................148

Converting a File to Qedit Format .........................................................................................150

Convert Qedit Workfile to Text Format ..................................................................151

Printing on a Local Printer.....................................................................................................151

Print Options on a Local Printer..............................................................................151

Printing on a Local Printer ......................................................................................153

Printing on a Host Printer ......................................................................................................154

Print Options on a Host Printer ...............................................................................154

Changing the Default Printer in MPE......................................................................155

Printing on a Host Printer ........................................................................................156

Saving & Closing Files 157

Overview................................................................................................................................157

Saving a File ..........................................................................................................................157

Which files do you need to save? ............................................................................157

Auto-Saving Local Files..........................................................................................157

Saving a Qedit Workfile..........................................................................................157

Saving an Existing File (Local and Host)................................................................158

Saving a New Host File...........................................................................................158

Saving a New Local File .........................................................................................159

Saving All Opened Files..........................................................................................160

Closing a File.........................................................................................................................160

Explicit vs. Implicit Close .......................................................................................160

Closing a File...........................................................................................................160

Forcing a Close on a Host File ................................................................................161

Customizing Saving and Closing Files ..................................................................................161

Automatically Posting Qedit Workfiles on the Server ............................................161

Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host Files .........................................162

Saving Changes at Regular Intervals.......................................................................162

Interacting with Hosts 163

Overview................................................................................................................................163

Executing Host Commands....................................................................................................163

Single-Line Execution .............................................................................................163

Multi-Line Execution ..............................................................................................166

Disabling Host Command Execution ......................................................................167

MPE Commands Execution...................................................................................................167

Qedit for Windows User Manual

User Defined Commands (UDC) ............................................................................167

Session Environment...............................................................................................167

Process-dependent Settings .....................................................................................168

Session Initiation and Termination..........................................................................168

Duplicate Output Lines ...........................................................................................168

UNIX Commands Execution.................................................................................................169

Script-Based Features 171

Overview ...............................................................................................................................171

Script Libraries ......................................................................................................................172

Managing Scripts...................................................................................................................173

Monitoring and Controlling Scripts.......................................................................................173

Robelle Script Library ...........................................................................................................174

Sorting Lines ...........................................................................................................175

Listing Lines............................................................................................................176

Compiling MPE Source Files..................................................................................178

Power Tips for Developers 181

Overview ...............................................................................................................................181

Spanning Hosts and Operating Systems ................................................................................181

Switching and Tiling Files.....................................................................................................181

Switching Between Files .........................................................................................181

Tiling Document Windows .....................................................................................182

Working Smarter with a Terminal Window ..........................................................................184

Advantages of Qedit Workfiles .............................................................................................184

Automatic Save .......................................................................................................184

Sole Access to Files.................................................................................................184

Preventing Accidental Overwrite of Files .............................................................................184

Instant Access to Embedded Files .........................................................................................185

Getting the Fully Qualified Name of a File ...........................................................................185

Handling Nonprinting Characters..........................................................................................185

Minimizing Keystrokes .........................................................................................................185

Menu Shortcuts .......................................................................................................185

Letter Matching .......................................................................................................185

Expanding the Workspace .....................................................................................................186

Quick Access to Directories ..................................................................................................186

Working with MPE Hosts......................................................................................................186

Working with Copylibs ...........................................................................................186

User Labels on Files ................................................................................................186

Network Issues 189

TCP/IP ...................................................................................................................................189

Firewalls ................................................................................................................................189

Client to Server Handshaking................................................................................................189

Looking at Server Connections .............................................................................................191

MPE Connection List ..............................................................................................191

UNIX Connection List ............................................................................................192

Reference 193

Menu Commands...................................................................................................................193

File Menu ................................................................................................................193

Edit Menu................................................................................................................195

Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents

• vii

viii

• Contents

Text Menu ...............................................................................................................196

Mark Menu ..............................................................................................................197

View Menu ..............................................................................................................197

Script Menu .............................................................................................................197

Options Menu ..........................................................................................................198

Window Menu.........................................................................................................199

Help Menu...............................................................................................................199

Key Combinations and Functions..........................................................................................200

Control Combination Keys......................................................................................200

Searching Shortcuts .................................................................................................200

Editing Shortcuts .....................................................................................................201

Other Shortcuts........................................................................................................201

Function Keys..........................................................................................................202

Troubleshooting 203

Overview................................................................................................................................203

What to do in case of problems?............................................................................................203

Getting a Trace ......................................................................................................................204

Server Trace Files....................................................................................................206

Changing Debug Settings ........................................................................................206

File Information Dialog Box..................................................................................................206

Document Information ............................................................................................207

Connection Information...........................................................................................208

Transmission Information........................................................................................209

Server Settings.........................................................................................................209

Cache Statistics........................................................................................................210

Connection Problems.............................................................................................................211

MPE Host Connections ...........................................................................................211

Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections ..................................................................213

HP-UX Host Connections .......................................................................................216

Connection Progress Messages ...............................................................................218

Recovering a File...................................................................................................................219

Recovering Temporary Host Files...........................................................................219

Local Files Operation ..............................................................................................221

Time Zones ............................................................................................................................221

Document Database Recovery...............................................................................................225

Error Messages ......................................................................................................................226

Appendix A - Earlier Highlights 229

Overview................................................................................................................................229

Appendix B - File Types 231

File Codes and Mnemonics....................................................................................................231

Appendix C – Regular Expressions 243

What Are Regular Expressions? ............................................................................................243

Metacharacters .......................................................................................................................243

Anchor Characters ...................................................................................................244

Match Any Character ..............................................................................................244

Optional Character...................................................................................................245

Repeating Characters...............................................................................................245

Character Class ......................................................................................................................245

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Negated Character Class .........................................................................................246

Repeating Character Class.......................................................................................246

Escape Character ...................................................................................................................246

Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions ..........................................................................247

Backreferences in Regular Expressions.................................................................................247

Appendix D - Language Templates 251

Overview ...............................................................................................................................251

Template Location .................................................................................................................251

Which Language? ..................................................................................................................252

Language Template Format ...................................................................................................252

Language Block.......................................................................................................253

File Extensions ........................................................................................................254

String Delimiters .....................................................................................................254

Continuation Schemes.............................................................................................255

Comment Schemes ..................................................................................................255

Token Character Set ................................................................................................256

Keywords ................................................................................................................257

Glossary of Terms 259

Index 265

Qedit for Windows User Manual Contents

• ix

Welcome to Qedit for Windows

Overview of Qedit for Windows

Welcome to Qedit for Windows, the Microsoft Windows editor that edits local and server files, both large and small. Use Qedit for Windows to edit files on your local

PC, network computers that are available from Microsoft Windows, and files on your HP-UX or MPE servers. Throughout this manual, the terms HP e3000 and

MPE will be used interchangeably to identify an MPE host. Likewise, the terms

UNIX, HP 9000 and HP-UX will be used to identify a UNIX host.

Hardware and Software Requirements

Qedit for Windows up to version 4.7.01 is available in a 16-bit edition for Windows

3.1 and 3.11. As a pure 16-bit version, it does not require any of the files from the

Win32s subsystem. Versions 4.7.02 and later are only available in the 32-bit

edition.

Qedit is also available in a 32-bit edition for Windows 95 and Windows NT. Qedit for Windows requires a minimum of 4 MB of memory and approximately 3 MB of disk space.

If you want to use Qedit to access corporate servers from home or remote offices, you might have to reconfigure your firewall software or router. The connection to the HP-UX server occurs on port 7395. On HP e3000 servers, port 1542 is the default Remote Process Management (RPM) listener. You can also configure individual MPE connections to use Qedit’s firewall protocol. If you use this option on MPE, the MPE server will work like an HP-UX server and Qedit will use port

7395 as the default.

If you use an Internet Service Provider (ISP), you might be assigned a random IP address when you connect from home. You have to make sure you can connect using all possible IP addresses.

The Qedit server software has to be installed on your HP-UX or MPE servers. This software communicates with Qedit for Windows running on your local PC to provide fast service for all your editing needs.

To get accurate time information in the Directory dialog box, you have to make

sure the time zones on all your computers are set correctly. See “Time Zones” on page 221.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows

• 1

Network Requirements

To edit HP-UX or MPE server files, you must have a TCP/IP connection configured in Microsoft Windows. Qedit requires a Winsock 1.1 compliant TCP/IP stack. If you use a Web browser (e.g., Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer), you already have TCP/IP installed and configured.

Qedit works best on a true TCP/IP connection. Qedit should work with proxy servers. This is often used in corporate intranets to give people access to the Internet without exposing their actual IP address. When using proxy servers, you will likely have to use Qedit's Firewall protocol on MPE connections.

The Ultimate Editing Tool

Qedit for Windows is your ultimate editing tool. Now you can get the editing functions you need in one easy-to-use package. Qedit’s efficient use of resources lets you edit both local and host files with lightning speed, even over a network or the

Internet. You can seamlessly span multiple platforms concurrently, and use keystroke shortcuts and toolbar buttons to quickly maneuver through your files. In the familiar environment of Microsoft Windows, Qedit’s ultimate advantage is that by using it to its full potential it helps you reach yours.

Multi-File Access—Simultaneously

Qedit for Windows allows you to have multiple MPE, HP-UX, and local files open at the same time. You can work on all these platforms, seamlessly cutting and pasting information between any number of files.

Qedit for Windows can access several files at once. In fact, the maximum number is only limited by the amount of Windows resources you have available. These can be a mix of local files and remote files, new files and existing files, text files, data files and Qedit workfiles. Each host connection is also capable of opening several files on that host.

Speed, Speed, and More Speed

Do you work over a slow modem? Is your local area network clogged with Web traffic? Don’t worry about Qedit for Windows—it makes minimal demands on your network. When editing a host file, searches are actually done on the server, not the client. You can quickly search through enormous files because Qedit does not download the entire file to your PC, only the portions in which a match is found.

Speed is one of Qedit’s main advantages. Faster access and faster processing means that you can accomplish more every day.

Highly Scaleable

No matter what grows—your file size, the number of users, the traffic on a network, or the geographical area of users—Qedit’s performance does not deteriorate. It has the flexibility to adjust to any situation. With Qedit, the tasks you do today do not limit your future capabilities. Whether your procedures are simple or complex, you can count on Qedit’s ability to adapt to your needs.

2

• Welcome to Qedit for Windows

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Fully Integrated with Windows

Qedit for Windows is a true Windows product that lets you copy and paste information to and from other Windows applications. Open a host file, select a portion of it, and paste it into Microsoft Word. Start Word, select some text, and paste it into a Qedit for Windows host file. All of this is possible with Qedit for

Windows.

Multiple Independent Views

How many times have you wished you could look at your variable declarations while working on some new code in the middle of the program? How about working on a file with very wide lines where you can never see the left and right margins together on the screen? Qedit’s split view feature can give you the whole picture by splitting a document window vertically or horizontally. All the panes are created with their own set of scroll bars and work independently from each other.

Consistent Interface on All Platforms

Qedit is capable of editing both local PC files and files on your host computers such as the HP e3000 and the HP 9000. If you are used to the full-screen interface of

Qedit for HP-UX and Qedit for HP e3000, you might expect the same interface in

Qedit for Windows. That is not what we decided to do. We chose to make the user interface of Qedit for Windows look as much as possible like the standard Windows editors such as Microsoft Notepad, Microsoft Wordpad and Microsoft Word. This makes the interface the same for all files you edit and reduces training costs.

(Perhaps with the exception of those whose fingers have the Qedit for HP e3000 or

HP-UX keystrokes burned into them.)

As much as possible, a local file looks and acts like an MPE file, which looks and acts like a UNIX file. There are, however, a couple of areas where the flavor of the host-based Qedit slips into Qedit for Windows.

Internet Friendly

The client/server design works equally well on Internet connections. People working at home can connect their PCs to the Internet through a public Internet Service

Provider and from the Internet to the company LANs. However, it might be necessary to reprogram a firewall to allow the Qedit for Windows connections from the external Internet to the internal LAN. The design of the Qedit for Windows protocol makes fast response editing possible, even over very slow network connections.

Host-Based Qedit vs. Qedit for Windows

There are features of regular (host-based) Qedit which are not yet available in Qedit for Windows. Although we are implementing the most popular features as fast as possible, the dedicated Qedit host user will still occasionally need to switch to a terminal window and run regular Qedit.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows

• 3

Getting Help

What’s New in This Version

The current version of Qedit for Windows is 5.9.13. Here are a few of the changes and enhancements made since version 5.9.

Highlights in Version 5.9.13

• Under certain circumstances, an Undo or Redo action could cause an abort.

Highlights in Version 5.9.12

• The newconnectiontemplate QSL method created incorrect MPE connection.

The session password was incorrectly used as the user password.

Highlights in Version 5.9.11

• It is now possible to specify the number of files appearing in the various filelists: Recent Files, in the Favorites list and individual Favorites subfolders. This is done in the General tab of the Preferences dialog.

Highlights in Version 5.9.10

• Qedit for Windows does not abort anymore when editing a Cobx file on a Unix server. The abort occurred when a number of conditions were present.

For a history of development highlights, see "Appendix A - Earlier Highlights" on page 229. For Qedit Scripting Language (QSL) highlights, refer to the QSL User

Manual.

Compatibility

This user manual is also available in Windows Help format. You can display Help information by using the Contents command of the Help menu or by pressing

F1

.

All dialog boxes include a Help button, which can display context-sensitive information (i.e., it takes you directly to the section that discusses the current dialog box).

The Help menu also provides access to Robelle resources available over the

Internet. Use one of the commands in the Robelle Web submenu to connect your browser to Robelle’s Web site (http://www.robelle.com) or see the latest features in

Qedit for Windows. You can also use the E-mail Technical Support command to send a question or comment to our Technical Support staff.

In most cases, when you have selected some text, typing a character replaces the selection. With the introduction of column operations, there is now one exception to this rule. If you have a selection and you hit the

TAB

key, the selected lines are shifted right. The text is not replaced. If you want to replace the selection, you have to use the

DELETE

key (or any other key except

TAB

) first to get rid of the selection then enter the tab character.

4

• Welcome to Qedit for Windows

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Known Problems

Here is a list of problems that were known at the time the version was released.

These problems will be fixed in future versions.

Document Window Displayed Incorrectly

You might run into a display problem when minimizing document windows to an icon. If you work on other documents and restore the icon to its previous size, the window might appear without borders, taking only part of the application workspace. This is a minor problem but does not affect editing operations. To correct this problem, simply maximize the window.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Welcome to Qedit for Windows

• 5

Getting Started

Installing Qedit for Windows

The installation process for Qedit for Windows is the same as in any other Windows application. Qedit is available as a download from Robelle's website. There are two basic types of installations: Typical for stand-alone PCs and

Network/Workstation for network file servers.

If you have virus-checking software, it might prevent the installation process from copying Qedit program files to your PC or file server. If this is the case, you might have to temporarily disable the virus-checking software.

Downloading Qedit for Windows

Versions of Qedit for Windows can be downloaded from Robelle's website. The website also provides installation instructions.

There are 2 types of files: production and pre-release versions. There is a production version every year. Pre-releases are intermediate versions created between production versions. In all cases, the download file is called qinstall.exe which is a self-extracting executable.

Installing Qedit on Stand-Alone PCs

For each stand-alone PC, you need to install Qedit as a Typical installation. With stand-alone PCs, you have to re-install new versions of Qedit on each PC that has a licensed copy. If you have a large number of PCs on a network and all of them are connected to a file server, the Network installation method is much easier to upgrade.

To perform a Typical installation on a stand-alone PC,

1. Start the installation program, qinstall.exe.

2. Follow the instructions on the screen.

3. When you are asked for the type of installation, select Typical.

4. When asked, specify the destination drive and directory on which you want to install Qedit. You can use the default location provided by the installation program.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 7

8

• Getting Started

5. Next, you are prompted for the name of the Program Folder where the Qedit shortcuts should be created. You can use the default location or enter your own.

6. To validate your copy of Qedit, enter the Serial Number Verification codes received from Robelle.

7. To start Qedit right after it has been installed, simply select I would like to

launch Qedit for Windows in the last step of the installation.

Installing Qedit on Networked PCs

On PCs connected to a file server, you need to perform a two-part installation process. First you have to perform a Network installation on the file server. Then on each PC connected to the network, you have to perform a Workstation installation.

To upgrade to a new version of Qedit, however, you only need to repeat the

Network installation. PCs connected to the network will automatically run the new version. Although this two-part process is a little more time-consuming when Qedit is first installed, it saves much more time with subsequent upgrades.

Network Installation

To perform a Network installation on the file server,

1. Log on to the file server either directly or through a PC with proper access.

2. Copy the self-extracting executable to the file server.

3. Start the installation program, qinstall.exe.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen.

5. When you are asked for the type of installation, select Network.

6. Next, specify the destination drive and directory on which you want to install

Qedit on the Network server. Make sure this directory is on a path accessible to other Qedit users.

7. The installation program asks for the name of a Program Folder where the Qedit shortcuts should be created. You can use the default location or enter your own.

8. When the setup program asks you to validate your copy of Qedit, enter the

Serial Number Verification codes received from Robelle.

Workstation Installation

Make sure you are connected to the file server on which you performed the

Network installation. To perform a Workstation installation on each PC,

1. If you have copied the installation files on the Network server,

• Click the Start button on the taskbar and select Run.

• Type in the full program path. For example,

<drive>:\robelle\qedit\qinstall.exe

2. Follow the instructions on the screen.

3. When the procedure asks for the type of installation, select Workstation. A

Workstation installation does not copy any files to the local PC. It simply adds the necessary program group and icons for the Qedit program on the server.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

4. When asked, specify the directory in which the Network version of Qedit has been installed on the server. You do not have to enter the Serial Number

Verification codes.

5. To start Qedit right after it has been installed, simply select I would like to

launch Qedit for Windows in the last step of the installation.

Installing the Qedit for Windows Server

The Qedit for Windows server is also available for download from Robelle's website.

If you are planning to install the HP-UX server, you have to make sure the Qedit daemon is not running. To determine if it is or not, you can do the following:

1. Log in as root on the system console or on a terminal

2. Enter ps -ef | grep qedit

This command looks at all the processes currently running on your system and selects only the ones that contain the string “qedit.” You should get a listing similar to this: root 165 240 2 12:05:29 ttyp4 0:00 grep qedit joe 140 122 0 09:16:57 ?

0:10 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t root 122 1 0 Oct 15 ?

cybil 544 122 0 06:44:22 ?

ricky 159 122 0 Oct 10 ?

0:00

0:01

0:01

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

The last column on the right shows the name of the programs selected. The line that reads “grep qedit” is the command you used to get this listing. Ignore it. All the other ones (running /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t) are Qedit server instances.

3. The line that shows a one (1) in the third column is the Qedit daemon process.

All the other processes are Qedit for Windows user connections. In this example, these connections are logged in as joe, cybil and ricky. If you know who these users are, you should contact them and ask that they disconnect until the installation is complete.

4. Repeat the command in step 2 until the Qedit daemon is the only process left running. This is the process you want to ultimately remove. To do so, you have to use the HP-UX kill command. In this example, you would enter: kill 122

If you are planning to install the MPE server, you have to make sure the server program is not used by anyone either as a host-based editor or as a server with

Firewall protocol. To determine if the program is accessed, on newer versions of

MPE, you can do:

1. listf qedit.pub.robelle,8

********************

FILE: QEDIT.PUB.ROBELLE

6 Accessors(O:6,P:6,L:0,W:0,R:6),Share

#S2506 RICKY,CLERK.ACCTG

P:1,L:0,W:1,R:1 LDEV: 15

P:1,L:0,W:1,R:1 REM : #S2504 GL,CYBIL.DEV

24.201.21.203

#S2503 AR,JOE.DEV

207.42.133.226

#S2501 BOB,OPERATOR.OPER

P:1,L:0,W:1,R:1 REM :

P:1,L:0,W:1,R:1 LDEV: 20

Getting Started

• 9

10

• Getting Started

#J8351 QSERVER,MGR.ROBELLE

P:1,L:0,W:1,R:1 SPID:

#O2552

2. The lines with "LDEV" are typically sessions running host-based Qedit. If you know who these users are, you should contact them and ask they exit from Qedit until the installation is complete.

3. The lines with "REM :" are typically remote users connected over the network.

They are likely to be Qedit for Windows users. You should contact them and ask they disconnect until the installation is complete.

4. The line starting with "#J" is a job running on the host. It could be a job using

Qedit to perform some file edits or a Qedit server running with Firewall protocol. There is not easy way to tell which one it is. If it's a not a Qedit listener, simply wait for the job to complete. If it is a Qedit listener, simply abort the job. In this example, you would use: abortjob #j8351

Running the HP-UX Server

1. If you are installing the server on a HP-UX host, refer to the Qedit for HP-UX

User Manual for a complete set of installation instructions or perform the following steps.

2. Once the HP-UX server files have been copied to the HP-UX host, you need to sign on to the host as root using a terminal or emulator (e.g. WRQ's

Reflection).

3. Set the ROBELLE environment variable required by the Qedit server.

ROBELLE=/opt/robelle export ROBELLE

4. Start the Qedit for Windows daemon

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

The server process keeps running until it is stopped explicitly with the kill command or until the system is shut down. You have to do steps 2 to 3 every time you want to start the server. If you want to start the daemon as part of the system startup process, you can get detailed instructions in the Qedit for HP-UX

User Manual or you can contact Robelle technical support.

The -t option enables the server trace facility. If the Qedit daemon is started with this option, all user connections will produce trace messages also. If the trace facility is not enabled on the daemon, the trace facility for individual users can be enabled by checking the Enable trace option of the Server Trace

Options on the Debug Controls dialog box.

5. If you need to install the server programs on multiple hosts, simply repeat these steps for each one.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Support Files

Up to version 5.8.10, support files were created in the system root directory (usually

\Windows on Windows 95 and XP or \Winnt on

Windows NT)

If you install Qedit in its default location, files required by Qedit are copied to a directory called \Robelle\Qedit on the drive you specified during the installation. These files include the tips file, the system script library and language templates. Other support files are created in the Windows user's application data directory. Typically, this is \Documents and

Settings\loginUsername\Application data\Qedit. The support files are:

• Qwin.ini

This file contains all global configuration settings, such as options in the

Preferences dialog box, the debug options, the UNIX port number, the MPE server name and the default fonts.

• Qedconn.dat

This file contains information about all your connections. For security reasons, confidential information such as passwords is encrypted. This is the default name. The connection template file location can be changed in the Configure

Server Settings dialog box.

• Qederr.log

This file contains the last error message for any internal consistency failure.

This can sometimes help track down the cause of a problem when tracing is not enabled.

• Qwinddb.dat

This is the document database. It contains a number of document-specific attributes. For recovery purposes, Qedit for Windows makes a copy of the document database in QWINDDB.bkp.

• Qwintips.txt

The Qedit tips file provides helpful suggestions on how to make the best use of

Qedit. This file is created in the same directory as the main program file.

Manuals

The Qedit for Windows User Manual, Qedit Scripting Language User Manual and the Quick Start Guide are available in Adobe PDF files. They are called qwin.pdf,

qsldoc.pdf and qstart.pdf respectively. These files are in the Manuals subdirectory under the directory where Qedit has been installed. During installation, a shortcut to the Manuals subdirectory is created in the Robelle program group of the Windows Start menu.

You can view these files with Adobe Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader is available for free and can be downloaded from numerous Web sites such as http://www.adobe.com. You can use Acrobat Reader to print your own copies of the manuals.

Language Templates

The syntax coloring feature requires language template files. Template files are formatted according to XML specifications. They must have a ".XML" extension.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 11

These files are stored in Language subdirectories in different locations. Robelle provides language templates in \robelle\qedit\system\language. These templates should not be modified as they might be overwritten when a new version is installed. If you wish to create your own templates or customize one of the

Robelle templates, you should create them in \robelle\qedit\user.

Typically, the user subdirectory contains files that have been customized and should be shared by all Qedit users. The system and user directories are always scanned.

If you have templates that are only useful to you, you can store them in the directory of your choice. Enter the location in the User Language Directory field on the

General tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Upgrading Qedit for Windows

If you already have Qedit for Windows and are upgrading to a more recent version, all your support files are preserved. This means you do not have to create all your connections again; all your preferences and default settings are still active and document attributes are still applied.

Up to version 5.8.10, Qedit support files were installed in the Windows sytem root directory (\windows or \winnt). Starting with version 5.8.11, the support files are stored in a subdirectory called Qedit under the Windows user's application data directory . This is usually \Documents and

Settings\loginUsername\application data\Qedit.

The directory name is based on the APPDATA system variable. If the variable does not exist, the support files remain in the system root directory

For a new install, the subdirectory is created the first time Qedit is launched. For an upgrade, the install script copies the current support files to the new location, if they do not exist already. The original files are not removed but they are not used anymore. The install script copies default support files only.

• The application profile: QWIN.ini

• The document database and its backup: QWINDDB.dat, QWINDDB.bkp

• The connection template file: QEDCONN.dat. If the connection template file was changed in the Customize Server Settings dialog box, that file is not copied.

• The error log file: QEDERR.log.

Uninstalling Qedit for Windows

If you want to remove Qedit from your PC, you can use the Add/Remove

Programs function in the Control Panel of Windows 95. Select Qedit for

Windows from the application list.

Customizing the Client

Whether you have one user or one hundred users, Qedit for Windows can create a comfortable environment for everyone. You can customize various features in the

Qedit client to make your daily tasks as efficient as possible. Each user’s settings are

12

• Getting Started

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: ALT+O,P

saved in the Qedit Preferences dialog box. Choose preferred search defaults, navigation tools, font settings and file options. These default settings are saved until you decide to change them.

The Preferences Dialog Box

To bring up the global Qedit Preferences dialog box, choose the Preferences command in the Options menu. This dialog box contains six tabs: General,

Searching, Defaults, UNIX, MPE and Local. Use the

TAB

key to move between options on the same tab. To move from one tab to another, simply click the tab name.

The General Tab

Qedit for Windows User Manual

General settings in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

Getting Started

• 13

14

• Getting Started

For a description of the options on the General tab, go to the following sections:

• Automatically post Qedit workfiles, Compare timestamps before

overwriting on server and Save automatically, see "Customizing Saving and Closing Files" on page 161.

• Balance puntuation (parentheses, brackets) while typing and Alert

sound on unmatched punctuation, see "Matching " on page 118.

• Caret allowed in undefined areas, see “Allowing the Caret in Undefined

Areas” on page 143.

• Close connections with no open files, see “Customizing a Connection” on page 59.

• Color schemes, see “Customizing Text-Formatting Features” on page 120.

• To change the Directory font, see “Changing the Directory Font” on page

108.

• Length of Recent Files or Favorites lists, see "Opening MRU (Most

Recently Used) Files" on page 74 and "Maintaining and Using a List of

Favorites" on page 81.

• Load local files smaller than ... K into memory, see “Customizing

Opening a File” on page 85.

• Mousewheel Acceleration slider, see “Using the Intelligent Mouse” on page

136.

• Move caret when navigating, see "Controlling the Insertion Point

Movements" on page 88.

• Use live scrolling for server files, see “Scrolling Method for Host Files” on page 144.

• User Script Directory, see "Script Libraries" on page 172.

• User Language Directory, see "Language Templates" on page 11.

• Word selection includes trailing spaces on double-click, see

"Selecting Text with a Mouse" on page 40.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The Searching Tab

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Search settings in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

For a description of the options on the Searching tab, go to the following sections:

• To set Searching preferences Search entire file, Ignore case and Smart

search, see "Customizing Your Search Options" on page 143.

• To set Automatically save position on search, see "Customizing Your

Search Options" on page 143.

Getting Started

• 15

The Defaults Tab

16

• Getting Started

Defaults settings in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

For a description of the options on the Defaults tab, go to the following sections:

• Open files with invisibles shown, see “Customizing Text-Formatting

Features” on page 120.

• Open files with a ruler bar, see “Customizing Text-Formatting Features” on page 120.

• Enable auto indentation, see "Customizing Text-Formatting Features" on page 120.

• To set the Display font, see “Customizing Text-Formatting Features” on page

120.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The UNIX Tab

Default UNIX file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

• For a description of the options on the UNIX tab, go to "Setting Default Options for New Files" on page 85.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 17

The MPE Tab

Default MPE file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

• For a description of the options on the MPE tab, go to "Setting Default Options for New Files" on page 85.

18

• Getting Started

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The Local Tab

Default local file characteristics in the Qedit Preferences dialog box

• For a description of the options on the Local tab, go to "Setting Default Options for New Files" on page 85.

Customizing the Server

When working with files located on host computers, Qedit for Windows uses a client-server architecture. This means that the client program running under

Windows interacts with a server program running on the host computers. Qedit has to know how to contact the server and the server's behavior can be customized directly on the host.

How To Specify To the Server Program

Qedit needs to know how to connect to the various servers. For normal connections to MPE hosts, you have to specify the actual name of the server. By default, Qedit tries to execute Qedit.Pub.Robelle. This is default value for MPE Server

Name text box.

For MPE connections using the Firewall protocol and UNIX hosts, you have to specify the port number on which the server is listening to. The default value for

HP-UX Port Number is 7395.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 19

20

• Getting Started

Configure Server Settings dialog box

Configuration Files on the Host

You can also customize the behavior of the server by putting appropriate commands in a configuration file on the host.

The Qedit server always executes the commands in system configuration files such as Qeditmgr.Pub.Robelle on HP e3000 and /opt/robelle/qeditmgr on HP-UX. Commands in these configuration files are executed for anyone using

Qedit on the host machine either as the host-based editor or as the server. Refer to the appropriate host-based Qedit User Manual for details.

On MPE hosts, other Qeditmgr configuration files can be installed in the Pub group of the logon account and in the logon group for a particular connection. Execution of these files is optional and can be enabled in the Configure Server Settings dialog box.

You can enable one or both options to use the corresponding configuration file. If they are both enabled, the server executes the files in the sequence shown (Pub first then the logon group) immediately after the system configuration files. The Pub and group Qeditmgr files are typically used to further customize a user’s environment.

On UNIX hosts, users can also have personal configuration files called

.qeditmgr. The server looks for this file in the user’s home directory. Unlike

MPE, these personal configuration files are always executed; there is no option to enable.

Using the Qedservmode Variable

The

QEDSERVMODE variable on the hosts allows you to have different settings for the server version and for the host-based version of Qedit.

QEDSERVMODE

is always set to zero if you are in the regular mode and to non-zero if you are in server mode. If you are using the Qedit server as well as regular Qedit on the same host, you should modify the Qeditmgr file so that commands written for a particular mode are only executed in that mode. This is particularly true on MPE hosts because logon

User Defined Commands (UDCs) and command files are not executed in sessions initiated by Qedit for Windows. This might cause some commands in Qeditmgr to fail (e.g., non-existent variables). Ultimately, the server environment might not be set correctly.

For example, on the HP e3000 you could perform

Qedit for Windows User Manual

if Qedservmode = 0 then

set extprog mpex.pub.vesoft

endif

On UNIX, you would check the value of

QEDSERVMODE

in a script executed from the Qeditmgr file, because Qedit/UX does not support the If/Then command.

Connection Template File

All the host connections that you create are stored in a file on your local hard-disk.

The default is to store them in a file called Qedconn.dat in the Windows directory. You can change the connection template file name in the Connection

Template text box.

Running Qedit

Once Qedit for Windows has been installed, you can start it by clicking the appropriate icon in the Robelle program group.

Expiring Version

If you have an evaluation copy of Qedit and the version is about to expire, you might see the following Expiry Message dialog box.

Expiry Message dialog box

You can see the details about the version you are running:

• 32-bit edition (Windows 95 and NT)

• the version number and build timestamp

• the number of days before it expires

At the end of the trial period, you will not be able to use Qedit at all. You will get the following message indicating that the program has expired. You can call our office if you think your version should not be expiring.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 21

Expiry Message dialog box

Tip of the Day

Qedit offers a number of useful tips. These tips are stored in a file called

Qwintips.txt. By default, Qedit displays a new tip every time you start the program.

22

• Getting Started

Tip of the Day dialog box

Select Close to return to Qedit and proceed with editing files. If you want to continue to browse through the tips, select Next Tip. If you do not want to see a new tip every time you start Qedit, disable the Show Tips on StartUp option.

You can also browse through the tips by using the Tip of the Day command in the

Help menu. This command displays the same dialog box.

Startup Process

Upon startup, Qedit searches for QSL scripts to load automatically. It also loads language templates used for syntax coloring. During this operation, progress messages are displayed in the Qedit Startup dialog box. If there are no errors, the dialog box is discarded. If errors are detected, an error message is displayed along with the name of the problem file. You have to click Continue to acknowledge the error and have Qedit continue with the startup process.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit Startup dialog box

An error does not prevent Qedit from running. However, some features might not be functional. You should correct the problem and restart Qedit.

The Application Window

When you start Qedit, you will see the following application window:

Application

Control icon

Application

Title bar

Application

Menu bar

Application

Toolbar

Application

Workspace

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Application

Status bar

Qedit application window

Application Icon and Control Menu

By clicking the horse icon, which identifies Qedit, you can access the application control menu. This menu contains commands that modify characteristics in the application window, such as its size and location. These standard Windows

commands are described in “Controlling the Size and Position of Windows” on page

37.

Getting Started

• 23

24

• Getting Started

Application Title Bar

The title bar displays information about Qedit as well as the document you are working on. If files are open, the name of the active document appears on the title bar. Otherwise, only the application name (Qedit) appears on the title bar.

Title bar for a local file

If the active file is on a host, the connection name appears as a prefix of the file name. In the example below, the connection name is Vancouver - MPE and the file is called Cobol4.Pub.Demo.

Title bar for a host file

Application Menu Bar

The menu bar displays the names of menu headings, which provide access to a variable number of commands. The number of headings on the menu bar depends on whether a file is open. The default menu bar, when you have no files opened, has the following five (5) menus.

Short menu bar

As soon as you open one file, the menu bar expands to the following nine (9) menus.

Complete menu bar

To display the commands on a menu, click the menu name. To choose a command, select it from the list. Available commands appear in a solid color. Commands that appear dimmed are not available, often because a prerequisite action is necessary.

For example, Qedit does not allow you save a file unless there are unsaved changes.

There are times where commands are available on local files but are dimmed when editing host files. This means the command is not supported in the server you currently use. If this happens, you should make sure you have installed the latest version of the server.

Some commands also have a submenu with more choices. These commands can be identified by the small dark arrow on the right.

You can also use keystrokes to access menus and their commands. You can press the

ALT

key once to select the File menu. To go to a different menu, use the cursor keys to move left or right. To see the commands in the current menu, simply press

ENTER

. You can then use the

UP ARROW

or

DOWN ARROW

keys to select a command.

All menus and some commands have an underlined letter, which is called an access

key. You can combine the

ALT

key with the access key to quickly display a menu. If a menu name is already selected, just press an access key to move to and display

Qedit for Windows User Manual

another menu. If commands that have a defined access key are already displayed on a menu, you can also use the access key to select them.

Submenu indicator Submenu

Available command

Unavailable command

Menu, commands and submenu

Some menus have checked commands, which use a check mark to show that they are enabled. In the View menu below, the check mark indicates whether the command is enabled or disabled. To change the status of a checked command, simply select it.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Checked commands

Application Toolbar

A number of Qedit functions are also available with a single click of the mouse.

These functions appear on the toolbar as a series of buttons. If you prefer not to see the toolbar, you can hide it by selecting the Toolbar command in the View menu.

This setting is saved across invocations, which means that if you hide the toolbar, it

Getting Started

• 25

For a vertical toolbar, move it completely over to the left or right side of the window.

will remain hidden even if you exit and restart Qedit. To display the toolbar again, you have to enable it in the View menu.

Changing the Shape and Position of the Toolbar

The default location for the toolbar is underneath the menu bar at the top of the application window. Under Windows 95, it is possible to move the toolbar to other locations on the document window.

To move the toolbar, click and hold the mouse on the area between buttons. Then drag the toolbar to the position you want and release it. You can move it left, right or to the bottom of the window, or even display it vertically on either side of the window.

26

• Getting Started

Vertical toolbar on the right side of the window

Turning the Toolbar into a Vertical Column

To shape the toolbar into a vertical column,

1. Place your pointer as far as possible to the left (if you want to move the toolbar to the right) or to the right (if you want to move the toolbar to the left).

2. Drag the toolbar as far as possible to the side that you want until its outline changes to a vertical column.

3. Release the mouse button.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Turning the Toolbar into a Floating Toolbox

You can also resize the toolbar and make it into a rectangle that can be moved around the window. Move the mouse pointer toward one edge of the toolbar. When the pointer changes to a double-sided arrow, click and hold the mouse button and move the cursor in the direction of one of the arrows.

Rectangular toolbar

Note that the position of the toolbar is not saved when you close Qedit. That means every time you run Qedit, the toolbar returns to the top of the application window.

Retrieving a Hidden Toolbar

If your toolbar disappears on Windows 95, there are two ways to retrieve it:

• Move the taskbar somewhere else on the screen and move the toolbar back up.

This works only if you have configured the Windows 95 taskbar to Always be

on top, which lets you move Qedit’s toolbar all the way to the bottom of the window and hide it behind the taskbar.

• Shut Qedit and start it again.

Toolbar Buttons

The application toolbar contains the following groups of buttons:

Local files Print Cut and paste

Search

New and Open local files tools

Save

Toolbar buttons and groups

Host files

Undo / Redo

Local Files Tools

The Local files group includes two buttons: the New button creates a new file and the Open button opens an existing file.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 27

Save tool

Save All tool

New and Open local files tools

Save Tools

The Save tool, which appears by itself, can be used for both local and host files.

The Save button appears dimmed if you have not made any changes to the current file. The button becomes available as soon as you edit the file. If you are editing a

Qedit workfile on a host, the Save button is never available because changes to these files are posted immediately.

The Save All tool works basically the same way as the Save tool. The only difference is that Save All allows you to save the changes made on all currently opened files. This way, you don’t have to save each window. Of course, the downside is it saves all your changes without asking for confirmation. If you want to save only some of the files, you still have to do them one by one.

Print tool

Print Tool

The Print tool can be used for both local and host files. You can also control where you want to print the file. A local file can be printed only on a local printer that is attached to your PC. A host file can be printed on a local printer or on a printer connected to the host.

Manage connections, Create and Open host file tools

Host Files Tools

The Host files group includes three buttons: the Manage Connections button handles your connections, the Create host file button opens a new host file, and the Open host file button accesses an existing host file. To invoke one of these operations, simply click the button once. If you click and hold any of these buttons,

Qedit displays the primary command followed by a list of available connections. In the list, connections that are currently opened are identified by a bullet.

For example, if you select a connection name under the Manage connections button, Qedit automatically displays the Directory window for that connection.

28

• Getting Started

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Cut, Copy and Paste tools

You can erase the contents of the Clipboard with the

Clipboard Viewer program in the Windows Accessories.

Click and hold on the Open host file tool

If you select a connection name under the Create host file or Open host file buttons, the appropriate dialog box is displayed with the name you selected in the

Connection text box.

Cut-and-Paste Tools

The cut-and-paste group includes three buttons allowing easy access to the Cut,

Copy and Paste functions. If you have not selected any text and have not sent anything to the Clipboard, all three buttons are unavailable and appear dimmed. If you select a block of text, the Cut and Copy buttons become available.

Once you cut or copy your selection to the Clipboard, the Paste button becomes available. It remains available until you cut or copy a new selection, even if you paste the contents. This allows you to copy the same selection to different locations.

Undo and Redo tools

Undo and Redo Tools

The undo/redo group includes two buttons allowing you to reverse your edit operations or re-apply an operation that has been reversed. When you click Undo,

Qedit removes the changes you have made one at a time, starting from the most recent change. Of course, if you have not made any changes yet, the Undo tool is unavailable and appears dimmed.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 29

The Redo button is available only if you have used the Undo button at least once.

It is used to re-apply the operations that have been reversed by an undo operation, starting with the last one.

Find Previous, Find and Find

Next tools

Search Tools

The search group includes three buttons allowing you to find strings within the file:

Find previous locates the previous occurrence of the string, Find locates a new string or changes the search options, and Find Next locates the next occurrence of the string.

To define the search criteria, select the Find button so that you can specify the string and any search options you want to use in the Find String dialog box. Once you have used the Find button, the Find previous and Find next buttons become available.

Application Workspace

Qedit uses the application workspace to display all its document windows. The workspace can display multiple documents at the same time or only one document can occupy the whole area. Document windows cannot be moved completely outside the application workspace.

Application Status Bar

The status bar at the bottom of the application displays various indicators. If you prefer not to see the status bar, you can hide it by selecting the Status Bar command of the View menu. This setting is saved across invocations, which means that if you hide the status bar, it will remain hidden even if you exit and restart

Qedit. To display the status bar again, you have to enable it in the View menu.

Informative message

Toggle keys status

Status bar of the application window

On the left side of the status bar, Qedit displays informative messages as you use certain functions. For example, if you use the Create local file button on the toolbar, a short message appears on the status bar explaining what you are about to do.

Status bar while using a tool button

30

• Getting Started

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Toggle Keys

There are four functions that you can switch on or off:

CAPS LOCK

,

NUM LOCK

,

SCROLL LOCK

and

INSERT

. Each function has an indicator box in the Qedit status bar. When a function is disabled, its corresponding indicator box appears blank.

Status bar with all toggle keys turned off

The toggle keys perform the following functions

:

• The

CAPS LOCK

key puts new text in uppercase.

• The numeric keypad on the right side of your keyboard can be used to either enter numbers or move the cursor. The

NUM LOCK

key makes the numeric keypad enter only numbers.

• In some applications, the

SCROLL LOCK

key controls the behavior of the insertion point while working on a document. Qedit simply indicates the status of the key. It does not have any effect on Qedit's operations.

• The

INSERT

key puts Qedit into insert mode, which controls the way you enter new text.

The Document Window

Document windows are sometimes called child windows.

The Qedit application window does not directly access files. Instead, when you open or create a file, Qedit creates another window called a document window. Although each document window has the same layout, they work independently.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Getting Started

• 31

Document

Title bar

Document workspace

32

• Getting Started

Document

Status bar

Document window

Document Title Bar

The document title bar appears at the top of a document window. It holds three distinct elements:

Window control menu Window control tools

File name

Document title bar

• Windows control menu

In the example above, the icon on the left side of the title bar gives you access to the document window control menu. This menu allows you to move, re-size, close the current window or switch to another window.

• File name

The middle section of the title bar displays the fully qualified file name. For local files, this is simply the name itself including any extensions (e.g.,

Readme.txt). For host files, the file name is prefixed by the connection name. In the example above, the connection name was Vancouver - MPE followed by a colon and the file name.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Text file

Qedit workfile

Write access

Read-only icon

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• Windows control tools

The tools on the right hand side of the title bar are the standard control buttons provided in Windows 95.

Document Workspace

The document workspace is the area in which a file appears within the document window. As you move through the file, Qedit displays only the part of the file you need to see and records any changes you make.

Document Status Bar

The status bar is a dynamic area with a number of indicators and values. It changes with almost every action you perform on the document workspace. Typically, the status bar displays the document type, the access mode, a Cancel button and the current cursor position.

Access mode Cancel button

Document type

Cursor position

Document window status bar

Document Type

The document type indicates whether you are working with a normal text file or a

Qedit workfile.

Regular text files can be found on both local and host files. If the document type icon has black and red lines, it means the file has been modified but has not been saved yet. If the icon has only black lines, it means the file has not been modified since the last save.

Qedit workfiles exist only on a host; currently there is no equivalent format for PC files. When you edit a workfile, the document type icon always appears the same.

This is because changes in these files are posted directly to the host server. As a result, the Save command on the File menu is available and the Save button is not available when you work on a Qedit workfile.

Access Mode

Qedit displays the type of access you have to a file, write or read-only, by using a pencil icon.

The pencil icon indicates that you have write access to the file (i.e., you can make changes and save them). This indicator remains on the status bar for the duration of the edit session. If you do not have permission to modify the file, you will see the read-only icon.

Getting Started

• 33

34

• Getting Started

Cancel Button

The Cancel button is available when Qedit performs operations that are lengthy.

When available, you can click the Cancel button to stop the operation before it is complete. For example, if you ask Qedit to print the current file, you might see the following status bar:

Cancel button available during print operation

Qedit shows a printing operation under way, and the Cancel button is available.

Cursor Position

The cursor position is normally a relative record and column coordinate. In the example above, the cursor is currently in the first column of line number 42.

If you select some characters on a single line, the coordinates appear as the starting line, the column numbers and the number of characters selected.

Cursor position with selected text on a single line

If you select a block of text that spans multiple lines, the coordinates appear as the starting line and column, and the ending line and column.

Starting position

Ending position

Cursor position with selected text on multiple lines

In this example, the selection starts in column 24 of line 33 and ends in column 57 of line 36. If the selection appears on a single line, the status bar shows the number of characters selected besides the coordinates.

Operation in Progress Indicators

Depending on the operation in progress, Qedit displays progress indicators (e.g., the transmission icon and spinning arrows) when appropriate.

Transmission

Spinning arrows

Other optional indicators

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The split box appears as a red tab at the top of vertical scroll bars and on the left of horizontal scroll bars.

For example, the transmission icon indicates the client is waiting for an answer from the server. The icon disappears as soon as the information is received. Normally, you can continue to work while the arrows are yellow. Red arrows indicate there are too many messages in the server queue, in which case Qedit doesn’t allow further editing. You will be able to resume your work when the icon becomes yellow again or disappears from the status bar.

The spinning arrows (they are animated and really appear to be spinning), which indicate an operation in progress, appear whenever Qedit thinks the operation might take some time to complete. Arrows can appear during these operations:

• Opening

• Closing

• Searching

• Working

• Printing

• Pasting

• Replacing

Splitting a Document into Independent Views

You can look at two different sections of the same file by using the split view feature of Qedit. If you put your mouse on the split box, the pointer changes to a dark bar with an arrow. When you drag the split bar in the direction indicated by the arrow, you will see two dotted lines dividing your document into two parts. It should look like this:

Split box

Split bar

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Split box

Splitting a window using the split bar

If Qedit cannot split a window at the location you select, you will see a single dotted line. You can split the screen only when the split bar becomes solid. Be careful when you move a split bar. If the split bar changes to a dotted line while you are moving it, the split bar will be removed (i.e., you will no longer have a split view).

Getting Started

• 35

Split bars are displayed as yellow lines between two panes.

When you release the mouse button, if your window is big enough to split, Qedit will split it into two windows that scroll independently. A split bar will delimit the two panes, each with its own set of scroll bars. If you have enough room, you can split panes into more panes. You can adjust the size of each pane by moving the split bar.

Pane

Split bar and adjustment indicator

Alt+W,S then H for

Horizontal or V for Vertical

Shortcut: double-click the split box.

Shortcut: double-click the split bar.

Pane

Adjusting the pane size using the split bar

You can also use the Split window command in the Window menu. This command has two (2) subcommands (Horizontal and Vertical), which split the active window (or pane) in half in the appropriate direction. If you want to quickly split a window or a pane in half, double-click the split box.

Collapsing Multiple Views into One

To collapse two views of a file into one, drag the yellow split bar to the edge of the window and release it.

36

• Getting Started

Qedit for Windows User Manual

A Windows Primer

Windows Standard Functions

Qedit for Windows conforms to many of the standard functions in Microsoft

Windows. If you haven’t had much experience with Windows, this chapter covers many of the Windows features that Qedit for Windows uses. These features include using the mouse to select text, minimizing and maximizing document windows, using toolbar buttons, and generally enjoying the many time-saving shortcuts a

Windows interface provides.

For a complete description of Microsoft Windows, consult your Windows manual.

Switching Between Applications

Without a mouse, you can still switch to another Windows application. Hold down the

ALT

key and press

TAB

. This brings up an icon list of all your running applications. If you let go of the

ALT

key, you will switch back to the last application you were in. While keeping the

ALT

key down, you can continue to press

TAB

until you reach the application you want, or go back to Qedit. Release the

ALT

key once you have selected the application you want. Use the same procedure to go back to Qedit.

Controlling the Size and Position of Windows

Moving a Window Around on the Screen

To move a window, first point to the title bar at the top of your Qedit window, then click and hold the mouse button. You can now drag your window anywhere on the screen.

Resizing a Window

To resize a window, put your mouse on any of the edges or corners of your Qedit window. When your cursor changes into a double-ended arrow, drag it to make the window larger or smaller.

Qedit for Windows User Manual A Windows Primer

• 37

Minimize, Maximize and

Close buttons on Windows

95.

Unless the text font you are using is really large, the minimum window size is set by the status bar. Qedit for Windows does not allow the status bar to be narrower than the widest message or indicator.

Minimizing a Window

In the upper right corner of most windows are some control buttons that allow you to minimize the window. The Minimize button reduces the program to an item on the taskbar in Windows 95.

To restore the window, click the minimized icon and select Restore from the menu, or double-click the icon. To restore a program from the Windows 95 taskbar, just click it once.

Minimize, Restore and Close buttons on Windows 95.

Maximizing a Window

In the upper right corner of most windows is a Maximize button that enlarges a window so that it occupies the whole screen. If you want a large Qedit window, you need to maximize both Qedit itself as well as the document window within it. When a window is maximized, the Maximize button changes to a Restore button, which returns the window to its previous size.

If you want to easily maximize or restore a window, double-click the title bar.

Shortcut: To easily maximize or restore a window, doubleclick the title bar.

Shortcut: ALT+W,H

Shortcut:

ALT

+

W

,

V

Arranging Windows into Tiles

To tile documents horizontally, use

ALT

+

W followed by

H

. Currently opened windows will be arranged to use the width of the application workspace. The windows will then appear one on top of the other.

To tile documents vertically, use

ALT

+

W

followed by

V

. Currently opened windows will be arranged to use the height of the application workspace. The windows will then appear side by side.

You can quickly switch between files by moving your mouse to another document.

See also “Tiling Document Windows” on page 182.

Closing a Window

This is a standard Windows 95 function. In the upper right corner of most windows, there is an X button which closes the window. With earlier versions of Windows, you click the window control button with the straight line bar in the upper left corner, then select Close from the resulting menu.

Mouse Operations

Almost all computers have a graphical pointing device, which can be a pen, a mouse, a trackball or a stylus. Pointing devices normally have buttons on or close to them. If a device has multiple buttons, usually one is identified as the primary button.

38

• A Windows Primer

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The pointing device for Qedit for Windows is a mouse, which mostly behaves the same as mouse devices in other Windows applications. Qedit does, however, have two special mouse operations: dragging the split box on the scroll bar to split a

window (see “Splitting a Document into Independent Views” on page 35) and

clicking and holding the toolbar host buttons to get a list of connections (see

“Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons” on page 44).

Some models of mouse devices, such as the Microsoft Intellimouse, have a wheel between the buttons. This wheel lets you maneuver through a file easily. Qedit gives you the ability to control the scrolling speed of an intelligent mouse. Simply adjust the Mousewheel Acceleration slider in the Preferences dialog box. See

“Using the Intelligent Mouse” on page 136 for more details.

Using Mouse Buttons

Qedit for Windows recognizes a number of standard ways to use the mouse:

• Click

This means a single click of the left mouse button, which is usually the primary button.

• Double- or Triple-Click

This means two or three left mouse clicks in very rapid succession on the specified object or location on the screen. The speed at which you have to click,

(i.e., the time between the clicks) is configurable with the Mouse tool under the

Windows Control Panel.

• Click and Hold

This means a single click of the left mouse button and holding it down.

• Drag

Dragging is used to select text. Click and hold the mouse across the text you want to select. When you reach the last character, release the mouse. The text you selected appears highlighted.

• Drag and Drop

This is used to move objects on the screen. Click and hold the left mouse button on an object and move it to a new position on the screen. For example, you can move document windows on your screen.

Although the mouse is very handy in Qedit for Windows, you can use the keyboard for most tasks in Qedit. For example, you open a file and want to edit a word near the bottom of the page. Press the

DOWN ARROW

key until it starts to repeat, then let up just in time. If you miss, go up or down a line. Press the

RIGHT ARROW

key until you reach the desired column. If you overshoot, you are in column one of the next line. If you pick the wrong line and it is shorter than your target line you have to go right, then down, then right again. This is an error-prone task. It can be more efficient to use the mouse to move the insertion point to the word you want.

TIP: If your mouse seems sticky, it is probably dirty. Mouse devices pick up lint and need regular cleaning. The cleaning process is relatively simple: twist off the cover on the ball, let the ball fall out, and scrape the lint off the three rollers with a finger nail or sharp object. Then replace the cover.

A Windows Primer

• 39

Selecting Text with a Mouse

Selecting (or highlighting) text is a basic operation of Qedit. Without it, your editing is very limited. When text is highlighted, it appears in inverse video and is available for further processing. There are several ways to select text with a mouse.

Dragging the mouse over the text is one way to highlight. To select spell-stat-ok in the example below,

1. Put your mouse just in front of the letter s of the word spell and hold the left mouse button down.

40

• A Windows Primer

Selected text

2. Carefully move the mouse to the right, swiping over the rest of the phrase. As you move, the intervening characters will be highlighted.

3. When the k in ok is highlighted, release your mouse button. The selection you highlighted should look like the example above.

If you lift the left mouse button before you have finished dragging it, you will not select the whole phrase. If you move the mouse too far to the right, simply move it back.

You can also select text by clicking the mouse:

• Double-click anywhere on a word and Qedit selects the whole word automatically. If you start dragging the mouse after a double-click, Qedit continues to select whole words. You can configure Qedit to select spaces following the word using the option on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.

If the Word selection includes trailing spaces on double-click option is enabled, Qedit selects the current word along with all spaces, if any, that immediately follows. If the option is disabled (default), Qedit selects the word only.

• Click three times to easily select a whole line. If you start dragging the mouse after a triple-click, Qedit continues to select whole lines.

You can quickly select complete lines by moving the mouse pointer to the left margin, where it changes to a right-pointing arrow. Click once and Qedit automatically selects the whole line. Click and drag to select more lines.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Right-pointing arrow for easy line selection

Complete lines are usually highlighted all the way to the right margin and include end-of-line characters, which are invisible by default. If you paste the complete lines somewhere in the file, they will also be on a separate line. If the end-of-line character has not been selected, the pasted text will appear on the same line as the existing text.

There is only one exception to this rule. The last line of the file does not have an end-of-line character. If you highlight the complete last line, it appears just like any other complete line (i.e., the highlight goes all the way to the right margin).

However, if you paste it somewhere else, it will not be put on a separate line.

If you press

DELETE

, the highlighted text is removed and the lines on either side are

joined. For more details, see “Selecting Text” on page 92. To cancel a selection,

click anywhere else in the document window.

Selecting More Text

If you click and drag the mouse up or down to a different line, Qedit selects the rest of the current line and part of the next line up to the mouse pointer.

Extending a Selection

If you want to select a lot of text, you can extend your selection using the

SHIFT

key.

1. Place your cursor at the beginning (or at the end) of the text you want to select.

If you want to make sure the cursor remains in place, select part of the text immediately.

2. Move the cursor to the other end.

3. Press and hold the

SHIFT

key.

4. Click at the location where you want the selection to end. Qedit automatically selects anything in between.

A Windows Primer

• 41

This technique can be used in other circumstances. For example, you can use it to open more than one local file in a single operation.

If you want to select one or more files that appear next to each other,

1. Click the first file.

2. Hold the

SHIFT

key.

3. Click the last file you want opened. All files between your first and last selection will be highlighted.

4. Click Open.

You can also select files that are not next to each other using the

CTRL

key.

1. Select the first file.

2. Hold the

CTRL

key.

3. Select another file that is not directly adjacent to the first one.

4. Both files are highlighted. Files appearing between these two are not selected.

You can also combine the

CTRL

and

SHIFT

keys to select even more files in the listing. By releasing the

SHIFT

key and pressing the

CTRL

key, you can skip the files you do not want to open.

Rectangular Selections

If you want to work on text in specific columns on multiple lines, you create something called rectangular selection. Simply hold the

CTRL

key while clicking and dragging the mouse. The selection is then limited to the leftmost and rightmost columns in the selection as shown here:

42

• A Windows Primer

Rectangular selection

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Rectangular selections can be defined with the mouse only. There is no keyboard equivalent.

Selecting a Menu Command

The line of words across the top of the Qedit window (File, Edit, View, etc.) is called the menu bar. Each word is the name of a menu, which you can click to access a list of commands. Commands that are dimmed are not available at the time, usually because a prior operation is necessary.

To open a file, for example, first click the File menu. When a list of commands appears, you can select the Open command, which presents you with more options

(Host, Local, Selection).

Selecting Toolbar Buttons

Below the menu bar is a toolbar with various small square buttons.

Qedit toolbar

If you are using the 32-bit edition of Qedit, you can find out what a button does by putting your cursor over it and waiting. Do not click. A toolbar tip will shortly appear to describe its function. To activate the function, click it once. If the button appears dimmed, it means that you cannot do that function at this time, usually because you have not selected anything to do the operation on.

Selecting from a List

You can make a selection from a file list by clicking the arrow at the end of the list.

This expands the file list box and displays all the files currently saved in the list. Use the mouse to point to the file you want and click to select it. You can also use the

DOWN ARROW

and

UP ARROW

keys to display the previous or next file name in the list.

Shortcut Menus in Windows 95

Shortcut menus were introduced in Windows 95. They are context-sensitive menus whose contents vary according to where the mouse points. You access shortcut menus by right-clicking the mouse.

Shortcut Menu on Text Boxes

Typically, these menus give you easy access to Clipboard functions such as Cut and

Paste. In Qedit, shortcut menus are available on some text boxes. For example, if you have copied a file name to the Clipboard and you want to use it to open the file, display the Open dialog box and right-click in the File name text box. Once the shortcut menu is displayed, simply select Paste.

Qedit for Windows User Manual A Windows Primer

• 43

Right-click a text box to display a shortcut menu

Shortcut Menus on Toolbar Buttons

Qedit’s toolbar has one special shortcut function. If you press one of the three host buttons and keep it down for a few seconds, a menu of host options will appear. Just select the host name on which you want to open a file, open a new file, or search the directory. To cancel the menu, click somewhere else on the screen.

44

• A Windows Primer

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Click and hold the Open host file button

Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace

A shortcut menu is also available if you right-click in the document workspace area.

The list of commands in the menu varies with the current conditions.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut menu for text manipulation and to access file properties

A Windows Primer

• 45

These options are not available if the selected text spans more than one line.

In the example above, the commands in the top part of the shortcut menu (Cut,

Copy, Paste and Delete) are available if you have selected some text. They provide easy access to common editing and Clipboard functions. The Paste command is only available if there is something in the Clipboard.

If there is something in the Clipboard but you have not selected anything, you might also get a Paste command.

The commands in the middle part of the menu (Find previous, Find next and

Open) are available if the insertion point is immediately in front of or anywhere on a word or if you have selected some text. You do not have to select a word. Qedit will automatically insert the selection in these commands for easy searches or file opens. If you have selected some text, the selection is inserted in the commands.

If you select one of the Find commands, Qedit uses the search options used on the last Find operation.

The Save position of insertion point command saves the current cursor position on the caret stack. If you have selected some text, the command reads Save

position of selected text. The Go to previous saved position command jumps to the location last saved on the caret stack.

The next command in the menu, Properties, gives you direct access to the File

properties dialog box so that you can change document attributes. This dialog box can also be accessed using the Properties command in the File menu.

The last command, Copy pathname to clipboard, puts the fully-qualified name of the active document in the Clipboard. For an MPE host file, this would be in the form of

<file>.<group>.<account>

If the file is in the POSIX namespace of an MPE host or the file is on a UNIX host, the format is:

<absolute pathname>/<file>

If the file is local, the format is

<drive:><absolute pathname>\<file>

If you are working on a host file, there is a command to execute the file as host commands. If there is no active selection, the command is Run file as host

commands. If there is a selection, the command is Run selection as host

commands.

Send To Function in Windows 95

In Windows 95, when you right-click a file name in Windows Explorer or in a file list, such as an Open dialog box, you will see a list of context-sensitive options available for that file. One of the options is Send To, which permits you to send the file to a diskette, a folder, a program, etc. You can add more destinations to the list of Send To targets, including Qedit for Windows. When you send a file to Qedit in this way, Qedit automatically starts and opens the file.

Adding Qedit as a Send To Target

This procedure is usually included when Windows 95 is installed. On your PC, however, the drive letter and the SendTo directory location can be different.

46

• A Windows Primer

Qedit for Windows User Manual

1. In Windows Explorer, go to the C:\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Robelle directory.

2. Select the Qedit for Windows shortcut icon.

Qedit for Windows

shortcut icon

3. Copy the shortcut to the Clipboard by using

CTRL

+

R

or the Edit menu.

4. Go to the C:\Windows\SendTo directory and paste the shortcut into it by using

CTRL

+

V

or the Edit menu.

Note that Qedit has difficulty handling long file names passed via the SendTo feature. If you do pass a long file name, it is converted to a short DOS name (8 characters, a period and a 3-character extension). For example,

Diary19980811.html

would be passed as

Diary1~1.htm

If you edit this file and save it, Qedit deletes the file with the long file name and replaces it with the new short file name.

Registering File Types in Windows 95

In Windows 95, you can register file types and associate them with an application.

This allows you to specify one application to open a file, another application to print it and so on.

You can register Qedit as the default application for certain file types. For optimal use, make sure these files are text only. You should also make sure you are not interfering with the proper operation of other applications. In other words, make sure you are familiar with a file type and understand the implications of registering it with another application before you proceed.

Registering Text Files

For example, to register Qedit with Text documents (i.e., files with a .txt file extension),

1. Go in Windows Explorer.

2. Select the Options command from the View menu.

3. Select the File Types tab.

4. Find the Text Document file type entry. If the file type you need does not exist, you have to create it using the New Type command. In this case, you need to know more information about the files you want to register.

5. Select Edit.

6. From the Actions list, select the one you want associated with Qedit.

7. Select Edit again.

Qedit for Windows User Manual A Windows Primer

• 47

8. Enter the fully qualified program file name for Qedit in the Application used

to perform action text box. Qedit is usually installed as

\Robelle\Qedit\Qwin32.exe.

9. Select OK to close the Editing Action for type window.

10. Select Close to close the Edit file type window.

11. Select Close again to close the Options window.

Registering Qedit Scripting Language Files

If you are using scripts written in the Qedit Scripting Language (QSL), you should also register the .qsl extension.

1. Go in Windows Explorer.

2. Select the Options command from the View menu.

3. Select the File Types tab.

4. Select the New Type command.

5. In the Description of Type text box, enter Qedit Scripting

Language.

6. In the Associated extension text box, enter .qsl.

7. Select New to add an item to the Actions list.

8. In the New Action dialog box, enter Open in the Action field.

9. In the Application Used to Perform Action field, enter the Qedit program name e.g. c:\robelle\qedit\qwin32.exe or use the Browse button to find it.

10. Repeat steps 7 to 9 using edit as the action.

11. Select OK or Close until you're back at Windows Explorer.

Drag-and-drop File Open

Windows offers a way to quickly open a file from an application. Assuming you can see the file and the application, you can use one of the following methods.

Drop on Desktop Icon

In this situation, let's assume the Qedit shortcut icon appears on the desktop.

1. Click on the file you want to open. You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file.

2. Drag it over to the Qedit shortcut icon. The pointer should change to an arrow with a small plus sign enclosed in a square.

Dropping a file on the Qedit shortcut icon

3. As the pointer hovers above the icon, the icon is dimmed. At that point, drop the file on the icon i.e. release the mouse button

4. This operation automatically launches Qedit and opens the file.

48

• A Windows Primer

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Drop on Qedit Application Window

If Qedit is already running and the application window is visible, do:

1. Click on the file you want to open. You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file.

2. Drag it over to the Qedit application window. The pointer should change to a dimmed outlined square with a small plus sign enclosed in a square.

3. At that point, drop the file on the Qedit window i.e. release the mouse button.

4. Qedit opens the file automatically.

Drop on Taskbar Button

If Qedit is running but its application window is not immediately visible, it might have been minimized. It should appear as a button on the Windows taskbar. In that case, you should:

1. Click on the file you want to open. You would typically use Windows Explorer to locate the file.

2. Drag it over to the Qedit button on the Windows taskbar. The pointer should change to a dimmed document icon.

3. Leave the pointer over the button for a few seconds, Windows should restore the application window.

4. Move the pointer to the application window.

5. At that point, drop the file i.e. release the mouse button.

6. Qedit opens the file automatically.

Special and International Characters

If you do not have a keyboard for languages other than English and you want to insert special characters into your document, Windows 95 has a cumbersome way to do this.

1. Run the Character Map program from the Accessories group.

2. Select a font from the list. This should be the same font that you defined using the Properties command of the File menu.

3. For each character you want, either double-click the character or click Copy.

This automatically adds the character to the Characters to copy box.

4. Go back to your Qedit document and paste the copied characters.

Long File Names

Older versions of Windows only allow eight characters for a file name followed by a

3-character extension (e.g., Readme.txt). This limit has been removed in Windows

95 and NT.

The 16-bit version of Qedit, if you are still using it, can only handle files that follow the old convention. If you use this version to edit files on an NT server, for example, you might see some strange behavior. You will be able to open these files, but long

Qedit for Windows User Manual A Windows Primer

• 49

file names will appear different. For example, a file called Ourproducts.html might show up as ourpro~1.htm. Also note the difference in the case used. The original uses upper and lowercase letters whereas the new name uses only lowercase.

If you modify this file and save it, the old name will be replaced by the new file name ourpro~1.htm. If you have to work with files that have long names, you should use the 32-bit version of Qedit.

50

• A Windows Primer

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Connecting to a Host or Network

What do you need to create a connection?

Qedit for Windows requires a client and a server. The client is a program that runs on your PC. The server is a program that runs on one or more of your host computers (HP e3000 running MPE/iX or HP 9000 running HP-UX). The Qedit for

Windows server is actually the native-mode Qedit program with a version greater than 4.6, enabled for server mode and run in a special way. Qedit’s server mode is an option on host-based Qedit, so you have to talk to someone at Robelle Solutions

Technology Inc. to enable it.

On most MPE host computers, you do not have to start the server program because

Qedit for Windows takes care of everything for you. If you have special network security devices like firewalls, you might have to use Qedit's firewall protocol. Refer

to "MPE Host Connections" on page 211 or the appropriate host-based Qedit manual

for complete instructions.

On UNIX hosts, you need to start a listener process. Refer to “HP-UX Host

Connections” on page 216 or the appropriate host-based Qedit manual for complete

instructions.

A connection is created between the client and the server when you first attempt to access a file or directory on that connection, or when you first run Qedit for

Windows if you selected Login at startup selected for that connection. It remains connected even though you close all the files on that connection (default), until you either exit from Qedit for Windows or use the Disconnect command in the File menu.

Connecting Through a Network

In Qedit for Windows, a network is a group of two or more computers that can exchange packets using the TCP/IP protocol. There are other types of networks, such as a NOVELL NetWare network, or a NetBEUI network, but Qedit for Windows cannot run on these networks. The Internet is an example of a Qedit for Windows network. A LAN with TCP/IP enabled is another.

The active computers on the Qedit for Windows network can consist of MPE and

HP-UX servers from Hewlett-Packard, plus PCs running Windows 95 or Windows

NT (3.51 or 4.0). The Qedit for Windows client software runs on the PC, and the

Qedit for Windows server software runs on MPE/iX and HP-UX hosts. A Qedit for

Qedit for Windows User Manual Connecting to a Host or Network

• 51

Windows network can also consist of several LANs connected together via gateways to the Internet.

Accessing a File Server

File servers are different from TCP/IP servers running the Qedit for Windows software. A file server can allow you to access files on common disk drives as if the shared disk drive were actually plugged into your own PC. This works best when the file server and your PC are both on the same LAN.

You do not have to create a Qedit for Windows connection to edit files on PC LANs.

Any file that you can access from other Windows applications can be edited by

Qedit for Windows.

Creating a Connection

A connection is defined as a connection name, a host name, a user login name for

UNIX or a “hello” string for MPE, and the passwords needed to access that host.

You can create two types of connections: a temporary connection and a saved connection. Saved connections can be accessed quickly because they have already been defined. Temporary connections, convenient for one time use, cease to exist when you close Qedit.

Creating a Temporary Connection

Temporary connections exist as long as you stay in Qedit for Windows. This is a very useful feature for a corporate site with hundreds of systems that are accessed occasionally.

To create a temporary connection,

1. Select the File menu, and click Host in either the New or Open commands.

2. When the New Host File or the Open Host File dialog box appears, click

Create....

3. When the Connection List dialog box appears, select the Temporary option.

4. Define the characteristics of your connection.

Temporary connections are not added to the connection list.

Creating a Saved Connection

If you need to use a connection repeatedly, you can create it as a saved connection.

Once you have created a saved connection, it is accessible through your connection list until you remove it.

To create a saved connection,

1. Select the Connections command of the Options menu.

52

• Connecting to a Host or Network

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Connection List dialog box for MPE hosts

2. When the Connection List dialog box appears, enter a Connection Name.

We recommend that you choose something meaningful to you or anybody else who works on your PC. Examples are:

• the name of your system (e.g., sylvia)

• the system plus your user name (e.g., sylvia - fred)

• the function (e.g., purchase orders)

• something totally irrelevant (e.g., the sky is blue)

The Connection Name can contain any combination of letters and numbers, except these characters: the colon (:), parentheses (), and nonprinting characters.

3. Enter the Host Name or IP address. You will need the name of your host system in Internet format (e.g., Sylvia.Xyzzy.Com) or the host’s exact IP address (e.g., 128.11.200.77).

NOTE: Do not enter leading zeros in any part of an IP address. A leading zero indicates that the value is specified in octal notation. In the example above, if you had entered 128.011.200.077, the IP address would have been interpreted as

128.9.200.63.

4. Select the host type (MPE or UNIX) and define your host login and password(s). Each host type has a different set of labels for defining the login and passwords.

For details, see “Defining an MPE Host Connection” and “Defining an HP-UX

Host Connection” below.

5. Although the default character set is HP Roman 8, Qedit gives you other choices in the Character set list box. If you are using HP’s Native Language Support

Connecting to a Host or Network

• 53

subsystem, you can select one of the following: a 7-bit national character replacement set, the new Roman8-1999 (Roman9) or the ISO8859 character set.

The Roman9 character set is identical to Roman8 except for a single character: decimal code 186 now represents the European currency (Euro) symbol. The

ISO8859 character set corresponds to Windows Code Page 1252, which allows you to create host files with the Windows character set. These files can then be either transferred to a PC or used directly by PC programs without translating the character set.

6. All new connections are created with the Qedit default color scheme, as indicated by the word (Default) in the Default Colors list box. You can

select a different color scheme off the list. See "Setting the Default Color

Scheme" on page 121 to add your own schemes or change existing ones. Any

file opened or created on that connection will use the selected color scheme unless you have selected a different scheme for individual files.

The new default color scheme is only going to take effect when the connection is closed. If it's already opened, you should close it and re-open it.

7. Enter the Login or Hello string.

8. When the Add button appears, enter your password. If your system requires one or more passwords, enter them in the appropriate text boxes. Passwords are saved in the connection template file.

When the prompt option is selected, the corresponding text box becomes unavailable and Qedit will prompt you for a password every time it tries to establish this connection. If you prefer to be prompted for a password, you can choose the Prompt option.

9. Click Add to create the connection and to save it in your connection list.

Now you can use this saved connection to access your host system. You can create as many connections as you need. Remember, each connection is associated with a specific user login, so you might need several connections to a single host if you need to log in as different users.

Defining an MPE Host Connection

To select the MPE option in the Connection List dialog box, your HP e3000 host must run the MPE/iX operating system with the Qedit server software installed.

Qedit server does not support Classic HP e3000s that run MPE/V.

MPE connections must include the following information:

• Use firewall protocol

In most situations, you do not have to do anything special to connect to an HP e3000 host. However, some companies have installed network security devices such as firewalls to restrict access even further. Depending on the installation, these devices might prevent Qedit from communicating to the server using the default MPE connection protocol.

Qedit offers an alternate connection scheme that should solve this problem while satisfying the customer's security needs. For these connections, you have to enable Use firewall protocol. Remember that this protocol requires

additional installation on the host. Refer to "MPE Host Connections" on page

211 or the appropriate host-based Qedit manual for complete instructions.

• Hello

54

• Connecting to a Host or Network

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Enter your normal hello command into Hello text box, but do not include the word “hello.” Each new session on MPE has its own hello string. A “hello” string can contain up to four elements with the following syntax:

<session>,<user>.<account>,<group>

Session and group names are optional.

• Session and Group Passwords

Each element name can have a different password for login information, giving each hello string up to four passwords: Session, User, Account and Group. For example, these are valid commands: ralph.purch,entry ordentry,clerk.distrib

manager.payables

Note that the Session password is only used with third-party security packages such as VESOFT’s Security/3000.

Defining an HP-UX Host Connection

If you select the UNIX option, your HP 9000 host must run the HP-UX operating system, a flavor of UNIX.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Connection List dialog box for UNIX hosts

• Login

This is a single user name. It determines your home directory and which files you have permission to browse and edit on the host system. Remember that both

UNIX user names and passwords are case sensitive.

Connecting to a Host or Network

• 55

• Password

You can enter only one password because Qedit does not support multilevel passwords. If your UNIX system uses multilevel passwords, contact Robelle for assistance.

• Initial Directory

This text box defines the non-home directory that Qedit will open when you start the program. The directory you specify in this box will continue to be associated with your user name until you change it. If you leave this text box blank, Qedit will put you in your home directory when you start the program.

Although the user ID is used to log on, Qedit changes to the initial directory as soon as the connection is established by performing a cd command relative to the root directory, not to the user’s home directory. For example, if you want to automatically go to /users/demo/public_html, you can enter

/users/demo/public_html (explicit) or users/demo/public_html (implicit)

Even if /users/demo is the home directory for the demo user, you cannot simply enter public_html or ./public_html because you will get this error:

Login: Unable to change directory.

Copying a Saved Connection

You can use an existing connection as a template for a new connection. To copy a connection,

1. Select the Connections command in the Options menu.

2. When the Connection List dialog box appears, select the connection you want to copy from the Connection Name list.

3. Give the connection a new name. This will copy the original connection and create a new connection.

The original connection does not change; it remains in the connection list. This allows you to use an existing connection as a template for new ones.

NOTE: For the time being, we recommend that you retype the passwords on new connections.

4. If you have modified only the host login or passwords, click Update to save the new values.

If you have created a new connection, click Add.

5. Click Done to close the dialog box.

Opening a Connection

Opening a Temporary Connection

As soon as you define a temporary connection, you can open it. A temporary connection stays open until you quit Qedit for Windows.

56

• Connecting to a Host or Network

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Opening a Saved Connection

Once you have added a saved connection to your list, you can use it repeatedly and access it quickly. To open a saved connection,

1. Select the File menu, point to New, and click Host. You will see this dialog box.

New Host File dialog box

2. Select a connection from the Connection list, which is sorted alphabetically.

That means MPE and UNIX connections are interspersed.

If you want to create new connections once you start opening a file, use the

Create button.

3. Click the New button to open a new empty scratch file on the designated connection.

4. If you have configured this connection to prompt for a password, Qedit displays a dialog box with the Login or Hello string and the Host name as well as the number of text boxes required to enter all the passwords you requested.

Enter all the passwords and click OK.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Password prompting dialog box

Once you have entered the passwords, you will see a series of progress messages followed by a new document window labeled Untitled 1.

If there are problems with the connection, first check your spelling and punctuation.

It is also possible that the problem is at the host end: the wrong version of Qedit, networking not enabled, backup in progress, etc. See the section on troubleshooting

Connecting to a Host or Network

• 57

“MPE Host Connections” on page 211 or troubleshooting “HP-UX Host

Connections” on page 216.

Editing a Saved Connection

A connection is defined as a connection name, a host name, a user login name for

UNIX or a “hello” string for MPE, and the passwords needed to access that host.

(Qedit for Windows does not bypass any of your security provisions.) You can change the host name, the login information, the passwords and the options in a saved connection.

If you change the connection name, you are really creating a new connection. The old connection is not renamed and it remains in the connection list. This allows you to use an existing connection as a template for new ones. If you want to change the name of an existing connection, you need to create a new one and delete the old one.

Modifying a Saved Connection

To modify a saved connection,

1. Select the Connections command in the Options menu.

2. When the Connection List dialog box appears, select the connection you want to change from the Connection Name list.

3. You can change the host name, the login information, the passwords and its prompt options on a connection. You cannot, however, change the connection

name because that would actually create a new connection. See “Copying a

Saved Connection” on page 56.

4. Click Update to save the new values.

5. Click Done to close the dialog box.

Any subsequent use of this connection will implement your changes.

Renaming a Saved Connection

If you want to rename a connection, it is a two-part process: first you need to rename the original connection when you make a copy of it, then you need to delete the original connection.

To copy the original connection to a new connection name, see “Copying a Saved

Connection” on page 56. To delete the original connection see “Deleting a Saved

Connection” below. When you have finished these steps, the connection list should

not include the original connection.

Deleting a Saved Connection

If you no longer need a saved connection in your list, you can delete it. To delete a connection,

1. Select the Connections command in the Options menu.

2. When the Connection List dialog box appears, select the connection you want to delete from the Connection Name list.

3. Click Remove. The connection should no longer appear in the connection list.

58

• Connecting to a Host or Network

Qedit for Windows User Manual

4. Click Done to close the dialog box.

Closing a Connection

Unless you change its default, Qedit does not automatically close a connection when it has no open files. To close a connection, select the Disconnect command from the File menu. If you have more than one connection, select the connection you want to close.

To ensure that all of your connections are disconnected, select Exit from the File menu. This closes all files and disconnects all hosts.

Customizing a Connection

Automatically Logging In at Startup

By default, Qedit does not set up a connection or log in to a host at startup. If you want Qedit to automatically log in at startup, you can change your default.

1. Select the Connections command in the Options menu.

2. Select the connection to which you want Qedit to log in at startup.

3. Select Login at startup. The next time you start Qedit for Windows, it will create this connection for you automatically, but it does not open any files. You can enable this option when you first create a connection.

Closing Connections without Open Files

By default, Qedit keeps connections open until you disconnect them implicitly or until you exit from Qedit. Sometimes you might not want to keep a host connection open if is not being used. For example, if the likelihood of ever reusing the connection is slim, you might not want to maintain the resources.

You could use this option if you are worried about people accessing the host through your PC and you are willing to close all files when you walk away. A screen saver with password protection, however, might be a better solution for this problem.

To change Qedit’s default so that it automatically closes connections without open files,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, select the Close connections with no open files option.

3. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

This option forces Qedit to close not only connections, but also open directory dialog boxes on connections that are forced to close.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Connecting to a Host or Network

• 59

Creating & Opening Files

Creating Files

Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+N

Toolbar:

You can create a new file on an MPE or HP-UX host or on your PC. In Windows terminology, creating a file from scratch is called the New operation, while Open usually refers to an existing file.

Creating a New Host File

To create a new file on a host system,

1. Select the File menu, point to Host, and click New.

2. When the following dialog box appears, define the file’s characteristics:

Qedit for Windows User Manual

New Host File dialog box

• First select a Connection, which is a host system and specific login name and security. If you need to use a connection repeatedly, you can create a

new saved connection. (See “Creating a Saved Connection” on page 52).

Once you have created a saved connection, it is accessible through your connection list until you remove it from the list.

• Next, select a Language for your file. This is not a spoken language such as French, German, or English, but a computer language like COBOL,

C++, PowerHouse, or Data (the default). The Language is important because it determines how the Smart string option will work (i.e., hyphen

Creating & Opening Files

• 61

Shortcut: CTRL+N

Toolbar:

is valid in a word in COBOL, but not in Pascal), and it defines the maximum Record length for your file.

Qedit for HP e3000 is able to recognize the Language setting and select the appropriate compiler based on that. At the moment, you need to run host-based Qedit from a terminal or terminal emulator to take advantage of this feature.

Many PC editors set the maximum line length to 32,000 or 64,000 characters, so the concept of Record length doesn’t really apply. Qedit is designed for editing host files, which often have a maximum length for each line. For example, COBOL has a fixed format in which the first 6 columns contain a sequence number, the next 66 contain the program code, and the last eight are comments. By default, Qedit opens a Data type file with a Record length of 256 characters, but you can increase or decrease that value. Qedit’s maximum record length is currently 8,172 characters for a host file.

3. Click the New button. Qedit will create a connection to that host (if you do not have one already) and attempt to create a new file in your login directory. Until this file is given a permanent name, you will see the connection name followed by Untitled1 in the window title bar.

Once you have entered some information into your new file, use the Save command of the File menu to save the file. This automatically gives you the Host Save As dialog box in which you can assign a new name to the file. Otherwise, the file will be lost if the connection terminates for any reason.

Creating a New Local File

Creating a new local file on your PC is very similar to creating a new host file. Just select the Local submenu on the New command in the File menu. Qedit for

Windows creates a new document window on your PC with these defaults: Data as the Language and a maximum Record length of 8,172 characters.

Creating Local Directories

The method for creating a directory on your PC depends on your version of

Windows. For Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0, follow these steps to create a new directory for a newly created file:

1. On the File menu, point to New, and then click Local.

2. Type the information in the file.

3. On the File menu, select the Save command.

4. When the Save As dialog box appears, click Create New Folder (its icon looks like a folder with a star). A new folder will be created within the current folder, which is the directory in the Save in text box. The folder is assigned a default name such as New Folder and is highlighted so that you can rename it to something meaningful.

This option is also available on other Windows dialog boxes.

62

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Creating a new folder using Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0

Defining File Options

Shortcut: ALT+F,I

Each file has its own set of file characteristics. These characteristics are saved in the document database. New files, files that are not in the document database i.e. files that have never been opened and files in the document database that do not have customized file properties, acquire the default settings defined in the Preferences dialog box. Once the file is in the document database, Qedit uses the saved characteristics on subsequent access. To check or change the characteristics of a file,

1. Select the File menu and point to Properties.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, you will see the following options:

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 63

64

• Creating & Opening Files

File Properties dialog box

• Record length

The Record length text box indicates the number of columns available on each line. The value shown in the example above is the default for a

COBOL file from an HP e3000 host. It has a maximum of 66 columns per line, because columns 1 to 6 are used for a sequence number and columns

73 to 80 are reserved for comments. If you want to include comments in

COBOL, select COBX in the Language list.

Local files can have a length between one and 8,172 characters per line.

• Language

The Language list allows you to choose from a number of different programming languages and their file types. Each language has different characteristics with the Record length being the most evident.

The Language setting also affects the way Qedit searches with the Smart

Search option and what gets selected when you double-click a word.

Qedit supports the host-defined rules for searching.

• Set Font

To access the font settings, click Set Font. When the Font dialog box appears, select the Font, the Font style, and the Size from the list boxes.

If you want a font size that is not available in the list, you can type a custom size in the text box.

• Set Color

To change the color settings, click Set Color. When the Color

customization dialog box appears, select the color scheme and, if you

like, change individual color elements. For detailed instruction, see "Setting the Default Color Scheme" on page 121.

• Use spaces for tabs

Qedit for Windows User Manual

When enabled, Qedit for Windows replaces horizontal tab characters in the file with the appropriate number of spaces. For HP e3000 host files, the

Use spaces for tabs option is enabled as the default. For HP-UX hosts and local PC files, this option is disabled as the default.

• Display detabbed column

The status bar at the bottom of a document window displays the cursor position relative to the beginning of the file. The status bar shows the relative line number and the column number within the line. If the file contains tabs and you press the

TAB

key, Qedit moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop and adjusts the column number accordingly. If there is text to the right of the cursor when you press

TAB

, the text will also be moved.

With Display detabbed column enabled, the column number on the status bar includes the number of spaces the

TAB

occupies, as if the

TAB character had been replaced with spaces (see Use spaces for tabs above).

Document window with Display detabbed column option enabled

If Display detabbed column is disabled, the column number on the status bar counts the

TAB

as one character, regardless of the number of spaces it occupies. In the example below, the text following the

TAB

is displayed in column 35, but the column number only shows a value of 29.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Document window with Display detabbed column option disabled

• Preserve trailing blanks

Creating & Opening Files

• 65

By default, Qedit preserves trailing spaces that have been entered. If you try to insert new text on these lines, the trailing spaces will eventually reach the right margin and you won’t be able to insert any more characters. When this happens, you have to go to the end of the line and remove some spaces to make room for the extra character(s). Although this process is awkward,

Qedit uses it as a default because it presumes that anything you enter is valuable and should be kept intact.

Unfortunately, you cannot tell whether or not a line has trailing spaces. If trailing spaces are really not important, you can disable this feature. Once disabled, Qedit removes the necessary trailing spaces as you enter new text.

Note that if you delete characters from a line, Qedit does not return the trailing spaces that were removed.

This setting only affects editing while the file is opened. As you modify the file and add trailing blanks, Qedit recognizes them. However, trailing blanks are not written to the file when you save it. Next time you open the file, trailing blanks are gone. That's because the server never transmits them to the Qedit client.

• Auto-indent

Auto-indent is a great feature because it allows you to follow the indent of the last line when you press the

RETURN

or

ENTER

key. Instead of moving the cursor to the first position in the line, it goes to the column that matches the indentation of the previous line. You can use spaces or tabs to increase the indentation. If you use tabs, you can use

SHIFT indentation.

+

TAB

to decrease the

Setting the Line Termination Character

These file properties discussed above are common to all types of files. Local files have an additional option that controls which line termination character is used when a file is saved to disk. Qedit automatically detects which line termination was used originally and, by default, uses the same one when the file is saved. You need to change the Line termination character only when you want to explicitly change the file type.

66

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Local file Properties dialog box

The Line termination list box offers the following selections:

• DOS (CR/LF)

• Macintosh (CR)

• UNIX (LF)

CR stands for carriage return and LF for line feed. This option only affects the way files are created on save operations. It is a useful feature when you know the file is going to be used on a different platform and want to ensure the file is created appropriately for the target application.

Notation in Host Operating Systems

Qedit for Windows can work on hosts with MPE, POSIX and HP-UX. To move through directories in each of these operating systems, you must be familiar with their file structures and notation conventions.

UNIX Notation

The directory structure in UNIX is hierarchical. The slash (/) at the beginning of a path name represents the root directory. There are two ways to specify a path name: absolute or relative. An absolute path name is the path relative to the root directory.

A relative path name is a path relative to your current working directory.

Each file name or directory name follows its parent directory and is separated from it by a slash (/). UNIX names, which can be in either case, are case-sensitive. These are some examples of valid path names: test/scrpt1

/users/bev/chk.txt

../src/abc.c.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 67

MPE Notation

Names in the MPE namespace are always shown as uppercase. MPE file names are not case-sensitive (e.g., p@ is the same as P@). An MPE file called Cobol4 can be entered in either case. These are examples of MPE files: file file.group

file.group.account

To access a file by its hierarchical name on MPE, you must precede the name by a dot-dot (..) to go to the parent directory or one level up in the hierarchy, use dotslash (./) to go to the current directory, or use slash (/) to start at the root directory.

../group/file

./file

/Account/Group/File

POSIX Notation on MPE

With MPE/iX 4.5, HP introduced POSIX support. POSIX is an acronym for Portable

Operating System Interface. Because the POSIX standard is based on BSD UNIX and AT&T’s System V Interface, MPE has been extended to support an Hierarchical

File System (HFS) similar to the one found on UNIX hosts. As a result, UNIX file name syntax (with some restrictions) can be used to navigate the POSIX namespace.

Important Note: Some restrictions apply if your MPE host is running version 4.0 of the operating system. You can use the Directory dialog box to view and select files only in the logon group. Qedit uses a POSIX feature of MPE to move between groups and directories. Because POSIX is only available with MPE/iX 4.5 or later, you will not be able to switch to a different group dynamically. If you need to use the directory listing of another group, you have to create a separate connection that logs on immediately to the appropriate group.

MPE files are also accessible using this notation. Whenever possible, Qedit displays names using MPE notation. However, if you move to the POSIX namespace, Qedit adjusts the current working directory to POSIX notation. MPE names shown in absolute POSIX notation have the account name first followed by the group name and finally the file name. For example, the Cobol4 file is accessed via POSIX as

/Green/Pub/Cobol4.

Names in the POSIX namespace can be in either case, but they are case-sensitive.

POSIX directories end with a slash character (/).

POSIX names are identified by a leading

SLASH

character (absolute) or a leading dot-slash or dot-dot-slash (relative). If you don’t specify one of these prefixes, Qedit assumes you are trying to access a file in the MPE namespace. If you want to open a file using POSIX notation, you could enter /GREEN/PUB/COBOL4 or ./COBOL4.

You have to use MPE wildcards when you access the POSIX namespace. If you want to select all the files that start with a capital p on an MPE host using the POSIX notation, you would use the at sign (@) as the wildcard. So, you could enter ./P@.

Host Directories

When you want to open a single file and you know its name as well as the directory

in which it resides, you can use the Open command. See "Opening a Host File" on page 77.

68

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Going into the file structure of a host, however, is useful in the following situations:

• you don’t know the exact name of a file

• you don’t know the directory in which a file resides

• to open multiple files at once

• to browse the contents of a directory

Accessing Host Directories

To access a host directory,

1. On the File menu, point to Open, and then click Host.

2. When the Open Host File dialog box appears, click Directory.

3. When the Directory dialog box appears, it will list the files and subdirectories in the current working directory or group. This dialog box also includes text boxes (File name and Wildcard) for searching a file and buttons to perform further operations.

NOTE: Currently, only MPE displays File Type information.

The Directory dialog box

The Directory Listing

The first entry in a directory listing is always two dots (..), which is the parent directory of your current working directory. Directories (parent or subdirectories) within the listing appear in color. The listing includes all files, even those starting with a dot; these files are usually hidden in UNIX.

The directory listing appears in alphabetical order. The listing includes the following information: the file Name, the File Type, the date and time Last Modified, and the Size of the file. Although the File Type column appears on both MPE and

UNIX systems, only MPE currently includes this information.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 69

Order Selection button:

70

• Creating & Opening Files

The Last Modified date and time is based on the local time on your PC. Qedit assumes the clocks on all your computers are correct and takes care of adjusting the

time across different time zones. See “Time Zones” on page 221.

The Size column represents the number of records for MPE files and the number of bytes for UNIX files.

If you want to make sure you have the latest information in the directory listing, click the Refresh button. This forces the server to discard the current list and bring in the latest set of files. Note that the wildcard selection is ignored on a Refresh operation (i.e., Qedit displays a complete list of files in the current working directory or group).

Sorting the Directory Listing

By default, Qedit sorts files in ascending order. You can reverse the sort order by clicking the Order Selection button located on the right side of the heading line.

When the arrow on this button points up, the sort order is ascending; when the arrow points down, the order is descending. To change the default sort order, select the

Sort order command in the View menu.

You can sort the list on any of the headings (Name, File Type, Last Modified and Size) by clicking the column heading. The heading for the currently selected sort item appears on a darker background, as if the button was pressed down.

Searching for a File

These are some of the ways you can search for files on host directories:

• Scroll through the current directory. You can use your mouse or cursor movement keys to move through the list of files and subdirectories. The highlighted file indicates your current position within the list.

• You can go to other directories. See "Changing Directories" on page 71.

• If you know part of the file name, use the Wildcard text box to search through

the current directory. See "Using Wildcards" on page 70.

• For a more precise search, you can combine the File name and Wildcard text boxes. If you want to search another directory for example, enter its path name in the File name and use the Wildcard text box to narrow your search.

Using Wildcards

Wildcards are symbols that represent unknown characters. If you know part of the file name, use the Wildcard text box to find all files that match. Unless the File

name text box contains a different directory, Qedit will search in the current working directory.

Make sure you use the host-appropriate rules for wildcard characters because these rules are different for MPE and UNIX. Qedit does not do any validation on the string.

On UNIX for example, an asterisk (*) means one or more characters, and file names are case-sensitive. So if you want to see all files that start with a capital p, you would enter P*. Please refer to the appropriate host user manuals for details on using wildcards.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The Listfile command with

Seleq parameter is not available on all versions of

MPE.

Qedit passes whatever is in the Wildcards text box to MPE’s Listfile command. If you specify a wildcard that does not start with an HFS prefix (slash [/], dot-slash [./] or dot-dot-slash [../]), Listfile assumes the information is for an object (file, group or account) in the MPE namespace. If you use one of the HFS prefixes, Listfile searches the POSIX namespace. Currently, there is no way to get a complete file list by searching both namespaces with a single wildcard string.

Under MPE/iX 5.5 (and perhaps other versions), you can use the Seleq parameter to further refine the requested file set.

For example, you could use the Code= option of the Seleq parameter to only select files of a certain type. You would then be able to select only Qedit files (code 111),

CM program files (code PROG), NM program files (code NMPRG) or COBOL source files (code EDTCT) using wildcards such as:

@;seleq=[code=111]

@;seleq=[code=prog]

@;seleq=[code=nmprg]

@;seleq=[code=edtct]

For a list of file types, refer to “Appendix B - File Types” on page 231. The Seleq

parameter has a lot of different options. Please refer to your host user manuals for details.

Changing Directories

Qedit displays directories (parent or subdirectory) in color. If you select a directory within the current working directory, it becomes the new current working directory.

You can look for a file by continuing to move to other directories in which you have read access.

It is important to remember that there is only one current working directory per connection. Even though you can go to the Directory dialog box from the Open

Host File and the Host Save As dialog boxes, you are really dealing with the same Directory dialog box. This means a change in the current working directory reflects on both host Open and Save As operations.

If you know the exact location of a directory, you don’t have to go through other directories to get to it. Just use the absolute (e.g., /users/demo) or relative (e.g.,

../demo) syntax of the path name in the File name text box and select the

Directory button.

For more host-specific information about file and directory notation conventions, see

the “Notation in Host Operating Systems” on page 67.

Selecting Files

Once you have found the files you need, they can be opened from the Directory dialog box. You can select a file by highlighting it in the listing (it then appears in reverse video) or by entering its name in the File name text box. To highlight a file, click it once; to remove the highlight, click it again.

If you want to open a number of files at once, you can highlight them in the listing.

You can select up to ten (10) files. When you select multiple files, the File name text box will display the number of files selected. You cannot use the

SHIFT

key to select additional files; you have to select them one by one.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 71

Opening Selected Files

Qedit allows you to open files from the Directory dialog box. Once you have selected a file or a number of files, simply click the appropriate button.

When opening files on a UNIX host or in the POSIX namespace on MPE, Qedit prepends the file name with dot-slash (./) to indicate the current working directory, if the file name does not start with a dot (.) or a slash (/) that already indicate a relative or absolute path.

If you have an MPE file and a POSIX file that have similar names, the server might not open the file you expect. For example, let's say the MPE file is called MYFILE and the POSIX file is called myfile. Qedit does not prefix the POSIX file with "./" because it does not distinguish lowercase from uppercase letters. Aside from the case, the names are identical. In this situation, the server always finds files in the

MPE namespace first. Thus, if the filename is not explicitly identified with "./",

MYFILE will always be opened.

Printing a Directory Listing

You can get a copy of information displayed in the Directory dialog. Simply click the Print button. The listing can only be printed to a local printer.

Saving Host Files

If you have invoked the Directory dialog from the Host Save As dialog, the

Open button becomes Save. You can navigate through the directory structure until you get to the desired location. You can enter a new name or you can select one from the list. To save the file, click Save.

Opening a File

Very often, you will be working on existing files. In order to modify these files, you first need to open them. Qedit can open files in a number of ways, including some shortcut methods. Qedit always applies a file’s saved attributes from its document database, no matter how the file is opened.

Document Attributes Saved by Qedit

Qedit maintains a document database in which it stores document-specific attributes.

Document information is added or updated whenever files are opened, saved or closed.

Local file names are fully qualified including the drive letter. Host file names are also fully qualified including the connection name on which they were opened.

For each file in the database, Qedit keeps track of the following settings:

• the cursor position or selection active at the time of closing

• the display status of the Ruler bar and Record numbers

• current Tab settings

• current Guide settings

72

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• all of the check-box settings from the Options page of the Properties dialog box

• the font settings from the Options page of the Properties dialog box

• the document-specific COBOL tag

Qedit is careful to track only these 6 settings for each document. They are stored

locally in the database called Qwinddb.dat. See “Support Files” on page 11. Nothing

is stored on the server. That means you can copy the document database from one

PC to another and get the same attributes on all client machines (e.g., your home PC and your PC at the office). To have complete consistency between machines, you also have to make sure certain information, such as the connection names and available fonts, is the same on each machine.

Qedit saves the last selection position within the file as line and column coordinates in relation to the beginning of the file. If a file is modified with something other than

Qedit, next time you open the file with Qedit, it selects the same coordinates, but the selected text might be a completely different string.

If you open a host file and view the ruler, you will see the default tab settings specified in the host Qeditmgr files. If you close the file, exit Qedit, start it up again, and open the same file, you will continue to see the default host tab settings, even if these settings changed on the host.

If you open a document, view the ruler, and then change the tab settings, these become the new tab settings for the document. They override whatever default settings were specified in the host configuration files.

Similar rules apply to the font settings. If you never change the font of a document when you open it, you will view the document in the default font. If you do change the font of a document, the new font will be saved and it will be applied from that point onward. It does not affect other documents.

There is currently no way to reset all the local and host defaults for a modified document.

Opening a File from a Command Line

The command line interface feature in Qedit can automatically open a file at startup.

You can use this feature from a DOS prompt, in a DOS shell script, or in any other application that has a command line interface. You cannot create a new file from a command line; you can open only an existing file.

The command line feature uses the following syntax:

qedit <connection>:<filename>

Qedit is the program file name. In a Typical installation (on a stand-alone PC), the program file name would be Qwin32. Depending on the interface you use, you might have to qualify it with the letter of the drive, the full path name (e.g.,

C:\Robelle\Qwin32) and the file extension (e.g., Qwin32.exe).

Connection represents the valid name of a saved connection, which must be identical to a name in Qedit’s connection list. This means you must make sure all lowercase and uppercase characters are entered correctly, as well as any spaces and special characters.

Qedit assumes everything in front of the colon is part of the connection name. If it cannot find a corresponding name in the connection list, it assumes the file is local

Creating & Opening Files

• 73

74

• Creating & Opening Files and tries to open it as such. To open a local file, you can simply use the letter of the drive as the connection name. For example, you can enter qwin32 c:\windows\readme.txt

Everything after the colon is read as the file name. You can use relative or absolute notation, just the file name, or a fully qualified file name, but you must use the notation appropriate for the operating system on which the file resides.

Qedit tries to open the application window with the "restore" size from the last edit session. If the "restore" size is not large enough, Qedit will not start properly and display an error. To avoid this problem, you can use the "-m" argument to force it to start with a maximized window.

Opening Embedded Files

The fastest way to open a file which has its name embedded in your document (e.g., an Include file), is by highlighting it and entering

CTRL

+

D. Or you can open it by right-clicking on the highlighted selection to get the shortcut menu, and choosing the

Open command. You can also open it by selecting of the File menu, pointing to

Open, and clicking the Open command with the selected file name.

If the host file you are opening is not fully qualified, Qedit will look for the file in the current working directory (UNIX) or the current group (MPE) on the same connection as the current document.

If you want to open a file on a different connection, you can specify the connection name (as defined in the connection list) as a prefix to the file name, separated by a colon. For example,

Vancouver MPE:myfile.mygrp

Vancouver UX:/users/clerk/.profile

are valid file names. If you select one of these strings and use the Open selection command, Qedit will verify that Vancouver MPE or Vancouver UX is a valid connection name. If so, it will automatically try to connect to the corresponding host and open the file Myfile.Mygrp or /users/clerk/.profile.

Opening MRU (Most Recently Used) Files

Qedit maintains a list of the most recently used files. This list is accessible via the

Recent files command in the File menu. Local file names are fully qualified including the letter of the drive. Host file names are also fully qualified including the connection name on which they were opened. For host files, Qedit also keeps track of the options used the last time you opened the file (i.e., Read-only or Force

unnumbered).

To open a file in the list, select the Recent files command in the File menu. Qedit presents the list of most recently used files as a submenu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: CTRL+O

Toolbar:

List of most recently accessed files

By defaut, Qedit for Windows displays 20 files. This number can be changed in the

General tab of the Preferences dialog. Simply enter the desired number of files in the Length of Recent Files or Favorites lists. You can enter a value between 5 and 50.

When the filelists are displayed, a shortcut character is assigned to the first 35 files.

This means you can select a file by combining the ALT key with corresponding character as in ALT+3 or ALT+B. The first are numbered from 1 to 9. The next 26 are labeled from A to Z. Files 36 through 50 do not have a shortcut character.

When you open a file, Qedit always applies the saved document-specific attributes from its document database, no matter how the file is opened. You do not have to use the Recent files command to take advantage of this feature.

Opening a Local File

Qedit can open local files, including text and HTML files. To open a local file on your PC or on a networked drive,

1. Select the File menu, point to Local, and click Open.

2. When the Open dialog box appears, it provides the following options:

• File name

• Files of type

By default, Qedit displays all files and folders available in the current directory. You can reduce the number of files by selecting one of the filters available in the Files of type list box. The default is All files (*.*). Click the list box to display available filters and select one. Note that the filters do not apply to folders in the directory. Only files are filtered.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 75

76

• Creating & Opening Files

Select a file filter on local files

• Open as read-only

If you open a local file with write access (the default), you can, of course, make changes to it. If you save these changes, you effectively erase the old version of the file. You can, however, protect yourself from modifying a file by enabling the Open as read-only option before you open the file.

Windows will mark a file opened with write access as busy. In Windows

95, some applications automatically convert any subsequent opens into read-only mode. Qedit allows you to open the file again, but it will give you an “Error deleting a local file—permission denied.” error message when you attempt to save changes to the file. Qedit does not stop you from opening the file again.

Before you open a file, the buttons and the directory listing on the Open dialog box allow you to perform the following operations:

• navigate through folders

• create a new folder (Create New Folder button)

• list the contents of a directory (List button)

• list the details of a directory (Details button)

• display all files of a specific type

3. Open a file by double-clicking it or by entering a File name and clicking the

Open button.

You can also select multiple files and open them all at once. Qedit uses Windows’ standard way to select multiple items.

There is a limit to the number of files that can be opened in a single operation. The limit is not the number of files, but rather the number of characters that make up all these file names plus the drive letter, the current working directory and name delimiters. All these cannot add up to more than 2,048 characters. If you exceed this limit, Qedit displays an error message after you press the Open button.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Internet Explorer Edit tool

Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+O

Toolbar:

Opening an HTML File

In recent versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer, you can edit the Web document that you are currently viewing. By default, when Internet Explorer opens an HTML file, it runs Notepad or Wordpad depending on the size of the document. To change the default editor for an HTML file to Qedit,

1. Start Windows Explorer (not Internet Explorer).

2. Select the Options command in the View menu.

3. Select the File Types tab.

4. Find Internet Document (HTML) or Microsoft HTML Document 4.0 in the

Registered file types list. The actual wording can be a little bit different. Just make sure the file extensions are HTM and HTML.

5. Select Edit in the Actions list. If it is not there, select New.

6. In the Application used to perform action text box, enter the fully qualified name for the Qedit program. You can select Browse to find it using

Windows Explorer.

You can edit a Web document by selecting the Page (Internet Explorer 4.0) command in the Edit menu or selecting the Edit tool. A new instance of Qedit will run automatically with the current document opened. You are then able to make changes to the document.

You can save your changes to local files without any problems. However, if the Web document is on a remote server (i.e., an MPE or UNIX host), Internet Explorer simply passes a temporary copy of the document to Qedit. In this case, the only thing you can do is to use the Save As command of the File menu and save the revised version under a new name on your local drive. You then need to transfer the file back to the server (e.g., using FTP).

Opening a Host File

Qedit can open MPE and HP-UX host files, Qedit workfiles as well as copies of these files.

WARNING: Opening binary files with Qedit can corrupt them. See “Opening Files with Binary Data” on page 80.

To open an existing file on a host server,

1. Select the File menu, point to Host, and then click Open.

2. When the Open Host File dialog box appears, it provides the following options to either search for a file or to open it:

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 77

78

• Creating & Opening Files

Open Host File dialog box

• Connection

Select a connection from the Connection list. If you need a new connection to a host or you need to use a new login name, click the Create button. You can also use the Create button to set up a temporary connection.

If a host file is the active window when you access this dialog box, Qedit opens the file on the same connection as the active file. If no document is open or if the active window is a local file, Qedit uses the connection name that was used to open the last host file.

• File name

Enter the file name or choose a file from the most recently used (MRU) list.

This list includes files that have not been opened successfully, starting with the most recent name at the top of the list. The list is preserved from one

Qedit session to the next. The file names are recorded as you originally entered them, even misspelled files. Qedit does not keep track of the connection associated with a file name in the list.

If the file you want is not in your home directory on HP-UX or logon group on MPE, you can type the path name in the File name text box.

NOTE: Files opened via the Directory dialog box, the Open selection command (

CTRL

+

D

) of the File menu, or a shortcut menu (right-click) are not added to the MRU list. The list also does not include files saved by the

Save as command. However, all typed file names are added to the MRU list, which is available through the Recent files command in the File menu.

• Wildcards

Because the File name and Wildcards text boxes are also in the

Directory dialog box, read “Host Directories” on page 68 for general

information. For more host-specific details, read “Notation in Host

Operating Systems” on page 67 for the corresponding host: UNIX, MPE

with POSIX and MPE. These sections describe how to use the text boxes

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

along with the Directory button to quickly switch to other directories and groups, and to select only the files that you want.

• Directory

If you don’t want to type or you can’t remember the spelling of the directory or file, there is another way to find a file. Just click the Directory button. This will give you a list of files in the current directory and access

to other directories on the host. For more details, see “Host Directories” on page 68.

If you find the file through the Directory dialog box, you can open it from there.

• Read only

Sometimes you know that you just want to look at a file, but you don’t want to modify it. In this case it is better to enable Read only (

ALT

+

Y

) before you open it, which will protect you from making any accidental changes.

This option is also useful if someone else is editing the file you want to view. The Read only option is available in the Open Host File and

Directory dialog boxes. If you have selected multiple files in the

Directory dialog box, the Read Only option will apply to all of them.

• Open a copy

There are times when you want to modify a file, but you don’t want to lose the last version of it. To open a copy of a host file, enable the Open a

copy (

ALT

+

E

) option before opening the file. For more ways to copy a

host file, see “Copying a Host File to Another Host” on page 149.

• Force unnumbered

The server analyzes the last 8 columns of the first 5 lines in a file. If these columns contain only numeric digits and these digits are in ascending order,

Qedit assumes these are line numbers and should not be part of the data. In certain cases, this can cause problems because these numbers might very well be valid data.

To force Qedit to read these files as unnumbered, enable the Force

unnumbered option (

ALT

+

U

) before opening the file. The numbers will be displayed along with the rest of the text. You will also be able to edit these columns.

• Length

This option is available on HP-UX connections only and with version

5.3.13 or later of the server. If the connection has not been opened yet, the option is available but might be ignored by the server. If the connection is opened and the server does not support the feature, the option is not displayed at all.

If the file does not contain Newline delimiters at the end of each line, you can enter a maximum line length to break the file into pieces. In this case, all lines will have the same length except for the last one which might shorter. This would happen if the total size of the file is not evenly divisible by the specified length.

You can specify a maximum line length on a file that contains Newline delimiters. In this case, lines that are shorter than the specified length will remain the same. Lines that are longer than the specified length will be

Creating & Opening Files

• 79

80

• Creating & Opening Files broken up in pieces. If the existing line is not evenly divisible by the specified length, the last part of the line might create a line shorter than the specified length.

The file is going to be saved with the Do not write Newline delimiters option enabled whether the original file contained Newline delimiters or not.

3. Click the Open button to open the file on the host. Qedit will use your existing connection if you have one. Otherwise, it will establish a new connection.

Opening Files with Binary Data

Qedit can edit files that contain text information. It can also edit a binary file, although Qedit will likely corrupt these files so badly that you might not be able to touch them with the application that created them.

That is the case for documents created by word processing applications such as

Microsoft Word. Qedit can open these files and display their contents as best it can.

The document window, however, will probably contain all kinds of garbage characters that will not make any sense. Do not save the file, even if you have not

changed anything.

Server Warnings

The server might detect inconsistencies when opening host files and send warning messages to the client. The file is going to be open but might be different from what is the host. The user should then check the file and fix the problems before accessing them again.

Lines Exceeded Maximum Length

Some files must have specific attributes based on the language they correspond to.

One of these attributes is the Record Length. For example, COBOL source files are supposed to have fixed-length records of 74 bytes (Cobol) or 80 bytes (Cobx). If one or more lines exceed that size, Qedit displays the following warning:

Some lines exceeded the Language maximum line length. These lines have been folded. See line 15 (Server warning 1)

The server folds the overflowing lines. This means the server puts the characters exceeding the Record Length onto a separate line. Effectively, this means the file appears to have more lines than the original. The warning message shows the number of first folded line (15 in the example above). The user should examine that line and determine if the file can be fixed and saved without losing or damaging the original file.

Server Ran Out of Line Numbers

The server requires line numbers to be able to edit host files. If the file does not already contain numbers, the server assigns them as it reads the file. It determines as precisely as possible the range and increment to use. For extremely large files, it is possible for the server to run out of line numbers.

Other files such as COBOL source files might already contain line numbers. In this case, the server uses these numbers. The server makes sure that the line numbers are valid (all numeric) and in ascending sequence throughout. If it encounters an invalid

Qedit for Windows User Manual

line number, the server tries to recover the error and starts assigning line numbers.

This could also cause the line number to exceed the absolute maximum.

In these situations, Qedit displays the following warning:

The server ran out of line numbers while texting the file. The file may be too large or contain invalid line numbers. See line 032980. (Server warning 2).

When the server runs out of line numbers, it simply stops reading the file. This means the file as seen in Qedit for Windows does not have all the original lines. The user should close the file immediately without saving it. The file should be examined closely to determine the cause.

The possibly invalid line number is displayed as part of the warning message after

"See line". In order to find the corresponding line, you should close the file without saving and open it with the Force Unnumbered option enabled.

Maintaining and Using a List of Favorites

The Favorites command on the File menu allows you create and maintain a list of files that you access most often. You can add filenames to the list. You can create groups to assemble files related to a project for example. Of course, you can remove them from the list. A file can only appear once in the list even if you use folders.

Adding to the Favorites

To add a file to the list of favorites:

1. Open the file

2. Click the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu

3. Click on (Insert here) to add the file at this level

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Adding a file to the top level Favorites

Creating & Opening Files

• 81

Adding to a Favorites Folder

You can organize the Favorites list into groups or folders. A folder could represent files needed for a larger project. You can also have multiple levels of folders. In other words, a folder can contain other folders.

To create a new folder and add a file to it:

1. Open the file

2. Click the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu

3. Click on (New folder). This should bring the New Favorites Folder dialog box.

4. Enter the name of the folder. The name can contain any character except a colon

":". It can be as long as needed.

5. Click OK. The folder is created and the filename is added to it.

Creating a new Favorites folder and adding a file to it

If the folder already exists, it's going to appear on the shortcut menu. To add a file to a folder, select the corresponding (Insert here) command.

82

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Add a file to an existing Favorites folder

Opening a File from the Favorites

The filename now appears on the Favorites list. To open it, select the Favorites command on the File menu, find the file in the list and click on it. Because filenames can be very long, the name may be shortened in the list. Qedit replaces some characters in the middle with three dots. However, when you put the mouse pointer on a name, Qedit displays the fully-qualified name on the status bar.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 83

84

• Creating & Opening Files

Opening a file from the Favorites

There's no limit to the number of files that can be added to the Favorites list and each folder. However, Qedit only displays a limited number of files. This limit can be changed in the General tab of the Preferences dialog. You can have between

5 and 50 files. The default limit is 20.

When the filelists are displayed, a shortcut character is assigned to the first 35 files.

This means you can select a file by combining the ALT key with corresponding character as in ALT+3 or ALT+B. The first are numbered from 1 to 9. The next 26 are labeled from A to Z. Files 36 through 50 do not have a shortcut character.

Removing from the Favorites

To remove a file from the favorites list:

1. Open the file

2. Click on the right mouse button to display the shortcut menu

3. Select Remove from favorites

You don't have to find it in the list. Since it can appear only once, Qedit is able to identify it unambiguously and remove it.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Removing a file from the Favorites

Viewing the List of Open Files

Shortcut: ALT+W

If you have opened more than one file, you can view your list of open files by selecting the Window menu. The opened files and newly created files will be listed at the bottom of the menu list, and they will be numbered 1, 2, 3 etc. You can go to any of the files by typing its number or by selecting the file from the menu list.

Customizing Opening a File

Setting Default Options for New Files

If you want to set the default options for a new file,

1. Select the Preferences command from the Options menu.

2. When the Preferences dialog box appears, go to the appropriate tab for the platform where the file resides. The platforms currently supported are UNIX,

MPE and local files.

3. When you see the correct tab, select the options you want to use as defaults.

4. If desired, you can set the defaults for the other platforms at this point also.

5. Click OK to save the options as the new defaults.

Default options are used for new files, files that are not in the document database i.e.

have never been opened in Qedit or files in the document database but for which you have not specified custom settings.

Changes made in the Preferences dialog box are not applied to currently opened

documents. Most of these options are described in detail in "Defining File Options" on page 63. To use a default color scheme, select the scheme name from the Default

Qedit for Windows User Manual Creating & Opening Files

• 85

This option is only available in version 4.7.04 and later.

colors list box. If you want to define a new color scheme or change an existing one, read the "Setting the Default Color Scheme" on page 121.

Loading Local Files into Memory

The Load local files smaller than ... K into memory option lets you control whether Qedit will load local files into memory. When this option is disabled

(default), Qedit brings only the necessary parts of the file into memory. As a result, you can edit local files that are much larger than your PC’s memory

If this option is disabled, Qedit keeps the original file open during the editing process and prevents other people from modifying the file at the same time. When

Qedit saves your changes, it merges the modified lines into the original file.

Reading the entire local file into memory, however, has other advantages. Editing is very fast because the text you work on is always present in memory. By releasing the file as soon as Qedit has finished loading it, the file becomes available to other people almost immediately and stays available until Qedit reopens it to save changes.

To specify which local files get loaded into memory,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, select Load local files

smaller than ... K into memory and specify a threshold file size. If a file is smaller than or equal to the specified value, Qedit will load the whole file into memory. If the file is larger, Qedit will load only the necessary parts of the file, which is how Qedit works when this option is disabled.

The minimum value (default) is 32K. The maximum value is 4,096K. For files below the configured threshold, Qedit allocates a memory block based on their size. If you open several large local files at the same time, you can quickly consume available memory. For this reason, we recommend that you use a conservative value for a threshold.

3. Click OK to save the option settings and close the dialog box.

If Qedit has difficulty loading a file because you don’t have enough memory, the result of an open operation is unpredictable.

This option also affects save operations. For more details, see “Saving & Closing

Files” on page 157.

86

• Creating & Opening Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Overview

Typing and editing features are the foundation of Qedit for Windows. These features are supplemented with various ways to select text and to handle nonprinting, control and international characters. Qedit gives you the ability to cut, copy and paste within a file or between files. And if you decide not to keep your changes, you always have the option to undo or redo your work.

Determining Your Position in a File

For typing and editing, you need to know your exact position within a document.

The status bar indicates the current position of your cursor on the page. See

“Document Status Bar” on page 33 for more details.

Cursor Position and Appearance

The current location of the cursor is called the insertion point. Qedit for Windows uses a blinking cursor to show the current insertion point. The cursor moves around when you press a cursor movement key or click the mouse button.

If a block of text has not been selected, the cursor position appears on the document status bar as a relative record and column coordinate. If a block of text has been selected, the coordinates of the cursor appear as the starting line and column, and the ending line and column.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 87

The vertical bar displayed between the greater-than and less-than characters is not part of the text. It is the insertion point indicator.

Blinking vertical bar indicates the insertion point

Controlling the Insertion Point Movements

In some applications, the

SCROLL LOCK

key is used to control the behavior of the insertion point as you move around in a document. Even though Qedit displays the current status in the toggle key box of the status bar, Qedit does not work any differently whether the key is enabled or disabled.

If a block of text has not been selected, you can change the behavior of the insertion point by changing the status of the Move caret when navigating option on the

General page of the Preferences dialog. When you start Qedit for Windows, this option is enabled. As you move through a file, the insertion point stays in the same position relative to the screen, even though its actual line number changes.

If you disable Move caret when navigating when text is not selected, the cursor stays in the same line and column position, even if you go to another part of the file.

As a result, the insertion point can scroll off the screen if you move too far away from it. To quickly return to the insertion point, just press a cursor movement key.

For more information, see “Using Cursor Movement Keys” on page 137.

If you select a block of text, the behavior of the Move caret when navigating option does not change. Enabled or disabled, the insertion point stays in the same line and column position, and can scroll off the screen if you move too far away from it.

Insert Mode vs. Overwrite Mode

Qedit has two modes of behavior when you add text: insert mode and overwrite mode. The active mode is shown on the status bar of the main window. You can change the mode by pressing the

INSERT

key.

When you start Qedit for Windows, it is in insert mode. When you add text at the insertion point, which appears as a blinking vertical bar, Qedit moves existing text to the right. For insert mode, there is no indicator in the status bar of the application window.

Insert mode

Toggle keys status while in insert mode

88

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

When you change to overwrite mode, the cursor becomes a blinking rectangle or block. In this mode, the text you type overwrites the existing text. This is equivalent to deleting the existing text and replacing it with new text. In overwrite mode, the

BACKSPACE key does not remove characters as it moves to the left; it becomes equivalent to using the

LEFT ARROW key.

For overwrite mode, OVR appears in the status bar of the application window.

Toggle keys status while in overwrite mode

Overwrite mode

Typing Text and Inserting Special Characters

Qedit for Window’s flexibility with typing text and inserting special characters gives you the ability to address an international audience, insert control characters and add regular text, all in the same file.

Check Set Decimal On,

Change, or QZMODIFY commands in host-based

Qedit.

Typing Text

If you open a new document, you can start typing at the top of the file.

If you want to insert text into an existing document, you can select the insertion point for the new text. To type text into an existing document,

1. If you do not want to overwrite the existing text, make sure you are in insert

mode. See "Insert Mode vs. Overwrite Mode" on page 88.

2. Position the insertion point where you want to begin typing.

3. Enter the text you want to add.

In a new document, use Save as to assign it a file name. Otherwise, use the Save command to save your changes.

Inserting Control Characters

The character sets for Windows, MPE and UNIX include the 32 characters in the

ASCII character set that are control functions. For example, character value 7 in the

ASCII character set means ring the bell.

The host-based method of using

CTRL

+

G

does not insert control characters into a file because this shortcut combination is used for Qedit’s Find again function. As a result, you need another way to insert a control character. Windows does not have a standard way to handle control characters, and Qedit for Windows cannot do this either. There is no keyboard shortcut for inserting special characters.

Host-based Qedit, however, can handle these characters. The workaround is to save the file on your host, edit it with host-based Qedit and use one of the methods available on the host.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 89

Inserting Nonprinting Characters

Nonprinting characters are special characters whose ASCII values (e.g., 0 to 31, 127, etc.) cannot be displayed in a recognizable form. Within most applications these characters have very specific uses, including carriage return, line feed, etc.

In Qedit, nonprinting characters appear as small square boxes within the text.

This workaround does not work with ASCII 9, the TAB character, because Qedit uses tabs for formatting purposes.

Displaying nonprinting characters

You cannot insert or modify nonprinting characters directly with Qedit for

Windows. If a file contains these characters, Qedit does not change them. You can work with these characters, however, if you use another program (host-based Qedit for example) to create a character library file, so to speak.

For example, you can call this library file Specials and keep it somewhere on your

PC or host. Each line contains a number that represents the ASCII value followed by a space and the corresponding nonprinting character. If you need to enter a special character into a file, such as the escape character (ASCII 27), just open Specials.

Then highlight the square box next to the ASCII value that you need and copy it to the Clipboard. When you return to the file you are currently editing, paste the character at the desired location.

90

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

File with nonprinting characters ready for copy

If you need to work with terminal escape sequences, you can have separate lines just for them. For example, you can define a few lines for inverse video, blinking characters, inverse video off, etc.

Nonprinting Characters for Reflection Users

If you have the Reflection terminal emulator from WRQ, Inc., you can use one of the fonts provided with the software to display nonprinting characters. You can

create the Specials library file as described in "Inserting Nonprinting Characters" on page 90. With the library file open, change the display font to r_ansi. This

displays most nonprinting characters as two tiny characters on top of each other. For example, a bell character appears as a small b over a small l, an escape character as a small e over a small c and so on. You still cannot enter these characters, but, at least, you can see what they are.

Qedit does not display line formatting characters such as carriage return, line feed and horizontal tabs; it interprets them instead.

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 91

Nonprinting characters with the r_ansi Reflection font

Inserting Special and International Characters

If the keyboard for your PC is not a standard English keyboard, you just press the special keys on your keyboard to insert the characters.

With Windows 95, you can still insert special characters into your document with a

keyboard for another language. See "Special and International Characters" on page

49.

Selecting Text

Shortcut: CTRL+C or

ALT+E,C

Shortcut: CTRL+X or

ALT+E,T

Shortcut: CTRL+D or

ALT+F,O

92

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

In the context of Qedit, the term “selecting” is synonymous with “highlighting.” If text is highlighted, it appears on your screen in inverse video.

If you don’t highlight a string of text in your file, the only edit operations that are available to you are to type, backspace or delete a single character. The key to more powerful functions is text selection.

Here is a partial list of what you can do with the selected text:

• delete it by pressing the

DELETE

or

BACKSPACE

(in insert mode) key

• replace it by typing some new characters

• copy it to the Clipboard (Toolbar: Copy button)

• cut it from the document and write it to the Clipboard (Toolbar: Cut button)

• if the selected text is an embedded file name, open the file

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: CTRL+H or

ALT+E,F

Any selected text automatically becomes the insertion point. The cursor is not displayed during selection.

• search for the selected text (Toolbar: Find button)

Cursor Position and Appearance During Selection

If you select some text, the selection replaces the cursor and becomes the current insertion point. If you start typing, the selected text is replaced with the first character you type. If you continue typing, the new text either pushes the existing text to the right or overwrites it, depending on whether you are in insert or overwrite mode.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Selected text is the insertion point

If you use the scroll bar to move to another part of the document, the selected text continues to stay selected, even though it might not be visible on your screen. The selection is lost only when you move the cursor to a new location. If you forget that you selected text and start typing in another location, you will return to the selected text because that is the current position of the cursor.

Multiple Ways to Select Text

Qedit for Windows gives you numerous ways to select text. You can use your mouse to select characters, words, paragraphs or complete sections. You can also use the

Find operation or the

SHIFT

key in combination with cursor movement keys to make your selection. Qedit’s flexibility lets you choose the method that serves you best.

Selecting with the Mouse

A common method to highlight text is to use the mouse. As in many other

applications, this method is a standard feature of Windows. See “Mouse Operations” on page 38.

Selecting with the Shift Key

Many times you are busy editing text and realize you want something highlighted. If you move your hand from the keyboard to use the mouse, you slow down your thinking and editing process (at least if you are a touch typist). What can you do?

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 93

There is a way to select text without moving your hands from the keyboard: the

SHIFT

key in combination with cursor movement keys. When you use the

SHIFT key, the text is selected as the cursor moves.

Some of the most useful combinations are

SHIFT

+

HOME

to highlight to the start of the current line,

SHIFT

+

END to highlight to the end of the current line, and

HOME

,

SHIFT

+

END

to highlight the current line.

If you want to select all the lines from the cursor to the beginning of the file, use

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

HOME

. If you want to do the opposite (i.e., select all the lines from the current location to the end of the file), use

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

END

. If the current selection is rectangular (

CTRL

+

LEFT BUTTON

) and you use the key combinations above, the selection is extended accordingly and the selection remains rectangular.

In other words, this is an easy to select columns throughout the file. For more

information, see “Using Cursor Movement Keys” on page 137.

If you use the cursor movement keys to move away from the selected text, the selection is canceled. You can also use the

ESCAPE

key to cancel the current selection. Using these keys is good practice because it prevents you from accidentally deleting the selection, especially if you are not going to use a selected string after a Find operation.

Selecting with a Find Operation

Just as in other Windows editors, Qedit also highlights text when it performs a successful Find operation. This not only makes it easy to see where the text was found, but it makes it easy to change or delete the selected text. Perhaps too easy! If you type a character, or press the

DELETE

or

BACKSPACE

key after a successful

Find operation, you can accidentally delete or modify the selected text.

Copying, Moving and Pasting Text

The Clipboard

The Clipboard is a conceptual entity that can be used for temporary storage—a place where you can save lines of text, a picture or some sound, then use it again later. Just as in other Windows program, you cannot append to Qedit’s Clipboard. That means the contents of the Clipboard are erased as soon you copy something new to it. You can use the Clipboard to copy text to a Qedit document or to another application.

The Clipboard is closed when you shut down your system.

You can cut or copy to, and paste from the Clipboard. If you have already used Cut,

Copy or Paste in Notepad or Microsoft Word, you will not have any trouble with the Qedit Clipboard. It works the same way, except for only one difference: the

Clipboard might not actually reside on your PC when you edit a file on a host system.

When you cut or copy from a host file to the Clipboard, Qedit does not transfer this data to the PC, unless you paste it into a file on another host or into a local file.

There are two reasons for this: (1) it could take a long time if the file is very large and (2) you are quite likely to paste it back into another file on the same host system!

Instead, Qedit copies the selected text to the internal Hold file on the host server.

Unique to each logon, this Hold file functions much like the Clipboard.

94

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit copies the data from the host to the PC only when you paste to a local PC file or to a file on another host. For example, when you cut or copy on one connection and paste on another one, Qedit must physically transfer the Clipboard from the first host to the PC, then to the second host. This can take a while, so a small progress indicator window is displayed during this process. The same process occurs if you cut or copy from a host file and then paste into a local Qedit file.

Paste progress indicator dialog box

Workarounds to Clipboard Cache Problem

If you cut or copy a host file, then paste it into a PC application, such as Notepad or

Microsoft Word, you could run into one problem.

If the Clipboard lines fit into the Qedit cache, the paste request will be satisfied. If the Clipboard lines do not fit into the cache, Qedit cannot get the missing lines by issuing requests to the host, which makes the Clipboard appear empty to another PC application. If you run into this problem, you have two options:

1. You can copy the text in chunks. For each chunk, copy it to the Clipboard so that it is effectively brought into cache. Then you can paste it into the target application.

2. You can also force Qedit to put all the lines that you select into the document cache. First choose Copy Special from the Edit menu. This brings the following dialog box:

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Copy Special dialog box with Copy to local clipboard option

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 95

Shortcut: CTRL+A

Shortcut: CTRL+C

Toolbar:

Source and target files on the same connection.

Source and target files on different systems.

Shortcut: CTRL+V

Toolbar:

Enable Copy to local Clipboard and select Copy. Once the copy operation is completed, the selected lines are available on the Clipboard.

There is no preset limit to the size of the local Clipboard. The amount of text that can be copied to the Clipboard can be different for each user because it is determined by the PC configuration.

If you have to deal with tab characters in files on different platforms, you can use the

Expand tabs while copying option which is explained in "Expanding Tabs in

Clipboard" on page 102.

Copying Text

If you want to copy some text, you can easily store it on the Clipboard. To copy text to the Clipboard,

1. Select a contiguous block of text by highlighting it. This could be as small as one character or as large as the entire file. For example, use the Select All command of the Edit menu to select the entire file.

2. Select the Edit menu and click Copy to copy the selected text to the Clipboard.

The previous contents of the Clipboard are replaced with your new selection.

The text in your document is still selected.

Pasting Text

If you cut/copy and paste in the same host document or another host document open on the same connection, Qedit issues a special command to the server to have the

Paste operation done on the host. The only lines transferred to Qedit on the PC are the updated lines visible on the screen.

If you are working with lines of the same length, there is no problem. If you are copying lines that might exceed the record length of the target file, Qedit then has to make some decisions. Because local files, MPE host files and UNIX host files work differently, the result of a paste might be different.

MPE host files and, to some degree, UNIX files typically have a maximum record length as defined in the File options dialog box. If you are copying lines between two (2) files on the same connection, the operation is done by the server. Because the server knows the characteristics of the source and target files, it can fold lines before inserting them in the target file. Folding means Qedit puts as many characters as it can on a line and moves the rest to a separate line.

In all other cases, Qedit truncates lines that are too long. If this happens, Qedit displays a warning message.

To paste text in a file,

1. Position the insertion point where you want to paste.

2. Select Paste from the Edit menu to insert the contents of the Clipboard to the file.

Moving Text

The process of moving text consists of two parts. First you must remove the text from its original position, then you have to paste it to a new location. To move text,

96

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: CTRL+X

Toolbar:

1. Select the block of text you want to move by highlighting it.

2. Select the Edit menu and click Cut to put the selected text on the Clipboard.

The previous contents of the Clipboard are replaced with your new selection.

The text in your document is still selected.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 97

Shortcut: CTRL+V

Toolbar:

3. Position the insertion point where you want to insert the text. This could be in the same file, another file in Qedit or even another application. Select the Edit menu and click Paste.

You can also perform operations to and from the Clipboard using shortcut menus.

See “Shortcut Menu on Document Workspace” on page 45.

Deleting Text

The

BACKSPACE

key does not have any effect in overwrite mode. The cursor just moves to the left.

There are several ways to delete text in Qedit for Windows. If you select text before

deleting it, see “Selecting Text” on page 92 for more information.

1. The first and most obvious way to delete text is by pressing the

DELETE

key.

This deletes the single character that is immediately to right of the cursor, which might be a space character or a

TAB

character. An interesting case is when you go to the end of a line and press

DELETE

. You remove the

NEWLINE

character between this line and the next, effectively appending the next line to the current line.

2. If you are in insert mode , you can press the

BACKSPACE key. This key deletes the character before the cursor position, effectively moving you back one character and removing it at the same time. If you use the

HOME

and

BACKSPACE

keys, you remove the

NEWLINE

character and append the current line to the previous line.

3. You can highlight some text (any sequence of contiguous characters including

NEWLINE

characters) and then press the

DELETE

or

BACKSPACE

key. The highlighted characters are deleted and the remaining line fragments to the left and right are combined.

4. You can also highlight some text and then press the Cut command of the Edit menu. This deletes the highlighted text and writes it to the Clipboard. You can get the deleted text back with the Paste command in the Edit menu.

Merging Two Lines

Remember that if you delete the end of a line and remove the

NEWLINE

character, you will merge two lines into one. If the new line exceeds the file’s maximum line length, which is determined by the Language option, you will get an error message that says, “The resulting line would be too long.” If you need to remove the

NEWLINE

character, you will have to break one or both lines into shorter lines before you will be allowed to merge the pieces together.

Working with Columns and Tabs

Server version 4.8 or higher is required.

Qedit provides a number of commands to easily deal with text in specific columns.

Some of the commands are in the Column submenu of the Edit menu and others are in the Text menu. The Find and Replace dialog boxes also have features that help you deal with columnar data.

Throughout these menus, column numbers are relative to the Language of the file.

For most files, the first column is one. For some languages, such as COBOL, the

98

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: ALT+E, O, D

first column is seven. Values in text boxes must be entered accordingly. For example, if you want to delete the first two columns of a COBX file, you have to enter seven and eight as column values.

Deleting Text in Columns

If you want to remove or replace text between two columns, use the Delete command of the Edit menu.

Shortcut: ALT+E, O, I

Delete Columns dialog box

Enter the starting column number in the From text box. If you do not specify a column number in the To text box, Qedit assumes you only want to work on one column. If you want to remove more than one column, simply enter the column number of the last column in the To text box. If you put the cursor in the To text box, Qedit automatically fills it with the file's Record Length. This is useful if you want to clear all the lines from one point to the end of the line.

If you do not have an active selection, the modification is applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option. If you have selected some text, the Selection

only option is enabled and the operation is applied only to the selected text.

If the Fill with spaces option is disabled, Qedit removes the text in the specified columns. Text to the right of the To column is then shifted left to fill the vacant columns. If Fill with spaces is enabled, Qedit removes the text in these columns and replaces it with spaces. This preserves the text alignment to the right of the columns.

Inserting Text in Columns

If you want to insert text at a certain column position, use the Insert command of the Column submenu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 99

Shortcut: ALT+E, O, S

Insert Column dialog box

Type the text you want to insert in the Text text box. In the At column text box, enter the column at which you want the text to appear. The specified string is inserted and text to the right of the column is shifted. If there is not enough room on the line to accommodate the new string, an error is reported and the operation is stopped.

If you do not have an active selection, the modification is applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option. If you have selected some text, the Selection

only option is enabled and the operation is applied only to the selected text..

Shifting Text in Columns

If you want to shift text left or right, use the Shift command of the Column submenu. When shifting lines to the right, assuming the Use spaces for tabs option is disabled, a tab character is inserted at the tab stop to the left of the first nonblank character on the line. This is to preserve the tab stop relative alignment of lines that do not start on a tab boundary. If Use spaces for tabs is enabled, spaces, instead of a tab character, are inserted at this location.

Shift Columns dialog box

In the Number of columns text box, specify the number of columns by which you want to shift the text. Select Left if you want to shift the text in that direction, which is similar to deleting a number of spaces at the beginning of a line. Select Right to

100

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: ALT+T, L

Shortcut: ALT+T, R

This is not allowed if there is an active rectangular selection.

Warning: this behavior is different than in previous versions.

The Detab and Entab commands work only on complete lines.

move the text in that direction, which is similar to inserting a number of spaces at the beginning of a line.

If you do not have an active selection, the modification is going to be applied to the whole file as indicated by the Entire file option. If you have selected some text, the

Selection only option is enabled.

To shift entire lines left or right, see "Shifting to the Next Tab Stop" on page 101.

Shifting to the Next Tab Stop

If you want to quickly align text to the next tab stop, you can use the Shift left or

Shift right commands on the Text menu. You have to set some tab stops in the file to use these commands. The shifting is done at the beginning of the line. If the Use

spaces for tabs file property is enabled, Qedit inserts space characters in column one. If Use spaces for tabs is disabled, Qedit inserts a tab character in column one.

If you use Shift left, the text moves to the previous tab stop on its respective line.

If you use Shift right, the text is moved to the next tab stop on its respective line.

If the text cannot be shifted further, Qedit simply stops shifting. For example, if you keep using Shift left, all the lines would eventually be left-justified in column one.

For a faster way to perform the same operation, select the lines (completely or partially) you want to shift and

• Use the

TAB

key to shift to the right

• Use

SHIFT

+

TAB

to shift to the left

This feature introduces an incompatibility with previous versions. If you intended to replace the selection with a tab character, pressing the

TAB

key now shifts the lines to the right. The text is not replaced. If you want to replace the selection, you have to use the

DELETE

key (or any other key except

TAB

) to get rid of the selection, then enter the tab character.

Removing or Inserting Tab Characters

You can visually align text in files by using spaces or tab characters. Spaces viewed on the screen are stored in as many characters in the file. If you type five spaces, the file stores five bytes. Tab characters however, take up only one byte in the file no matter how it appears on the screen. Using a mix of spaces and tab characters can be deceiving. The size of a file changes depending on which one you use. Since these are different characters, programs that read the file must be able to handle both.

If you need to use either formats, you might have to replace one with the other. This can be very tedious. Qedit has the ability to do the replacement with a single command from the Text menu.

If you have a file containing tab characters and you want to use spaces instead, use the Detab command. Qedit preserves the visual alignment, but it physically removes all the tab characters and replaces them with the appropriate number of spaces.

The opposite is also true. You can use the Entab command to convert spaces into tab characters. Qedit looks at the text and the current tab stops. When it detects the possibility of replacing one or more spaces by a single tab, it does so. In addition,

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 101

Qedit tries to preserve the visual alignment. If need be, it will combine tab characters and spaces.

Expanding Tabs in Clipboard

When working with files on different platforms, it is sometimes annoying to deal with tab characters. If you are working with a local file and you want to make sure the text sent to the Clipboard does not contain tab characters, simply enable the

Expand tabs while copying option in the Copy Special dialog box.

Copy Special dialog box with Expand tabs while copying option

This dialog box can also be useful when copying large amount of data from a host

file to a local file. See "Workarounds to Clipboard Cache Problem" on page 95.

Working with Rectangular Selections

Server version 4.8 or higher is required.

You can select text in specific columns instead of complete lines or a selection spanning multiple lines with different start and end columns. All these selections basically work the same. However, there are differences specific to rectangular selections.

Copying and Cutting a Rectangular Selection

To copy or cut text from certain columns, all you have to do is select the area. You can create rectangular selections only with the mouse. There is currently no equivalent keyboard function. To create a rectangular selection, simply hold the

CTRL

key and click the mouse button as you would for a regular selection. Once the text is selected, use the Copy or Cut command on the Edit menu to send the selection to the Clipboard. You can also use the

CTRL

-

C

and

CTRL

-

X

shortcut keys.

Pasting a Rectangular Selection in Replacement

To paste the contents of a rectangular selection, you have to select the area into which you want to paste. This area does not have to be exactly the same size as the area copied to the Clipboard. Qedit does its best to fit it in the destination.

If the destination area is narrower than the source selection, wider lines from the

Clipboard are truncated.

102

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

If the destination area is wider than the source selection, text from each source line is pasted on a separate line and Qedit pads the rest of the area with spaces.

If the destination area is shorter (i.e., has fewer lines than the source selection), the extra lines in the Clipboard are dropped. For example, if the source selection had 10 lines and the destination has only six, the last four lines in the Clipboard are not pasted.

If the destination area is longer (i.e., has more lines than the source selection), text from the Clipboard is repeated. For example, if the source selection had five lines and the destination area has 10 lines, the source data appears twice. If you want to get rid of the redundant data, you can select it and use the Clear command on the

Edit menu. This replaces the contents of the selection with spaces. If you want to remove the text and shift the remaining text, use the

DELETE

key.

Inserting a Rectangular Selection

There is currently no direct way of inserting a rectangular selection. If you want to do this,

1. Select the lines on which you want to insert the Clipboard.

2. Use the Insert command of the Column submenu on the Edit menu to create an empty area. Make sure you make it wide enough to accommodate the text you copied to the Clipboard.

3. Select the newly created area, if it's not already selected.

4. Paste the Clipboard.

Deleting or Clearing a Rectangular Selection

To remove the contents of a rectangular selection, use the

DELETE

key. This removes the selection and shifts the rest the lines to the left. To clear the contents of the selection (i.e., replace it with spaces), use the Clear command on the Edit menu.

Extending a Rectangular Selection

To select columns from the current location to the beginning or end of the file, use

CTRL

+

SHIFT

along with

HOME

or

END respectively. For these combinations to work, the current selection must be rectangular already i.e. selected with

CTRL

+

LEFT BUTTON

. The

CTRL

+

SHIFT

combination actually extends the selection in the requested direction.

Undoing and Redoing

Undo and Redo tools

The Redo and Undo commands, which are available on the Edit menu, repeat or cancel the last modification. You cannot undo or redo changes out of order. If you have performed a number of operations, the Redo and Undo commands apply only to the last one.

When you have multiple files open, Qedit maintains a separate undo transaction log for each file. If you cut and paste from one edit window to another, these are treated as independent transactions. That is, canceling the paste command into window A

does not ensure that the corresponding cut command from window B is undone. As a result, the cut text could be lost.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 103

The descriptions in the Undo and Redo commands on the Edit menu change according to the last transaction. At the start of a session, the Undo and Redo commands are not available (menu shows Can’t undo and Can’t redo) because there have been no previous transactions. As you change the file, the description of the last operation is posted to the menu. For example, if you enter text in a couple of different places, then undo the last operation, the Edit menu will look like this:

Edit menu after a Redo command

The description shows “typing” as the last edit operation processed by both Undo and Redo. If the last edit operation had been Paste, the Undo command description would have shown Undo paste.

Most times you would use Undo and Redo to back out or re-apply text editing operations. It is important to know that you can also use these features when changing tab stop settings and guides. Thus you can remove a tab stop you just created or move one back to where it was.

What Delimits an Undo and Redo Transaction?

The Undo command follows certain rules to define a transaction. It has to determine where a transaction starts and where it ends.

Most operations have a clearly defined scope. For example, if you select text and press the

DELETE

key, the whole selection is removed from the file. If you undo the operation, Qedit simply returns the deleted text. Some operations do not have as well defined limits. These are some of the rules that Qedit for Windows applies to undo and redo operations:

104

• Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: CTRL+Z

Toolbar:

• A “typing” transaction starts with a printable character, a

TAB

, a

SPACE

, or a

NEWLINE

character. If there is no current selection, the

BACKSPACE

and

DELETE

keys also begin a typing session.

• Single-character deletions (using either the

BACKSPACE

or

DELETE

keys) that take place within a “typing” session are treated as if they were part of an original selection that was deleted.

• Exception to the above rules: any “typing” transaction that goes on for more than 24 lines gets made into its own transaction, and a new transaction is started.

Undo Command

To undo the last modification, select the Undo command in the Edit menu. If you perform multiple undo actions, you cancel the next preceding update. You cannot undo changes out of order.

Undo All Modifications

The Undo function allows you to cancel modifications one at a time, starting with the most recent. Using the Undo command can be very tedious if you want to cancel all the modifications you have made. The Revert command in the File menu can do this much faster. This command cancels all the modifications made since you have either opened the file or last saved it, which ever came last.

NOTE: There is a major difference between the Undo and Revert commands. If you use Undo and you have gone too far back, you can always use the Redo command to re-apply changes. The Revert command cannot be reversed. For this reason, Qedit asks for confirmation before executing the Revert command.

Shortcut: CTRL+Y

Toolbar:

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Confirm Revert dialog box

Redo Command

If you want to re-apply a modification that you have just canceled, you can use the

Redo command in the Edit menu. The Redo command is very handy if you are canceling consecutive modifications and go one step too far.

In standard Windows applications, such as Microsoft Word, “redo” means to reverse the last undo operation. It also has the same meaning in Qedit for Windows.

Unfortunately, in Qedit for HP e3000 and Qedit for HP-UX, “redo” means to repeat a previous command. This confusion, however, is unavoidable in English.

Typing, Selecting & Editing Text

• 105

Text-Formatting Features

Overview

Qedit for Windows has a number of practical text-formatting features that are useful in a programming environment. These features include various tools and methods for aligning text, as well as selecting fonts for documents and directories.

Fonts

NOTE: Qedit prints the font defined in the document (or the print driver uses the closest approximation available).

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Word processing applications, such as Wordpad and Windows Write, can highlight a heading and apply more than one font to a file. Qedit for Windows, however, does not offer multiple attributes in one file because host systems do not usually support them in their text files. To enable the transfer of programming and system files among disparate systems, we have sacrificed fancy typefaces.

Qedit is designed to deal with program source and data files. In these type of files, positioning text on specific columns is important. For this reason, Qedit allows you to chose only among fixed-pitch fonts installed on your PC.

Qedit for Windows allows you to select fonts that can be applied to both files and directory listings. It also lets you adjust the size and style of the fonts. These font attributes can be customized by each user. You can change the font of individual files or set the default font for all new files.

Changing the Document Font

Qedit uses the font you have set as a default for document windows. Because it mostly works with data and program source files in which field position within a record is important, Qedit only displays fixed-pitch (monospaced) fonts. This way you know the column position on the screen is really the physical position in the record.

To change the font in a document,

1. Select the Properties command from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, click Set font.

3. When the Font dialog box appears, select the Font, the Font style, and the

Size. If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list, you can type a custom size in the text box.

Text-Formatting Features

• 107

Font selection dialog box

For information on setting the default font for files, see “Setting the Default Font for

Document Windows” on page 121.

Changing the Directory Font

Qedit allows you to change the font in which the host directory list is displayed. To change the directory font,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, click Directory Font.

3. When the Font dialog box appears, select the Font, the Font style, and the

Size. If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list, you can type a custom size in the text box.

Bold, Italics and Underline

Qedit for Windows cannot apply bold, italic, or underline to a document because it is a programmer’s editor, not a word processor. Programming tools do not understand enhanced text with bold and fonts. They work only with plain ASCII files.

The directory listings in Qedit, however, can be set to bold, italic, and underline.

These attributes can be changed in the Font dialog box. See “Changing the

Directory Font” above.

108

• Text-Formatting Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Ruler Bar

Tab stop tool

Guide line tool

The ruler bar is a line at the top of a document window that is used to set tab stops and guide lines. Qedit for Windows can either show or hide the ruler bar. When it is enabled, the ruler bar as well as the tab stop and guide line markers appear at the top of the window.

The ruler bar has marks that indicate column positions. It shows numbers at regular intervals to make it easier to determine the cursor position. It also shows all the active tab stops and guide lines. For most files, the ruler starts in column one (1).

The start column depends on the Language option selected.

Ruler with a text file

The ruler adjusts its column numbers according to the type of file you are editing. In the following example, when Qedit opens a COBOL source file, which starts in column seven (7), the first column on the ruler bar is number 7.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Text-Formatting Features

• 109

Ruler with a COBOL source file

Displaying and Hiding the Ruler Bar

Before you can set tab stops or guide lines, you have to show the ruler bar. To display the ruler bar in the file you are viewing, select Ruler from the View menu.

To hide the ruler bar, simply repeat this step.

Tab Stops

For complete syntax, refer to the user manual for hostbased Qedit.

Qedit allows you to set any number of tab stops in a document to help align the text in specific positions. If you press the

TAB

key, the cursor moves to the next tab stop relative to the cursor position. If there are no tab stops, a tab character only takes up one column, just any other character. You can set the tab stops either on the Qedit server or client.

Tab Stops on the Server

For host files, you can define tab stops right on the server. To do this, you need to add a Set Tabs command in one of the configuration files. When you open a new connection, the server passes the tab information to Qedit. The new tab stops are then used for all files opened on that connection. For example, to set tab stops on columns 8, 12, 16 and 24, you would have the following lines in one of the

Qeditmgr files: if Qedservmode <> 0 then

/set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif

You have to be careful where you place the Set Tabs command in the configuration file. The tab values are relative to the first column of the file, which is defined by the

Language option. Because different language settings have a different starting column, the result might not be what you expect. For example, if you have the following in your configuration file: if Qedservmode <> 0 then

/set Language SPL

110

• Text-Formatting Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Tab stop marker

/set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif the tab stops will be set at columns 8, 12, 16 and 24 because the first text column in an SPL file is one (1). However, if you have if Qedservmode <> 0 then

/set Language Cobol

/set tabs 8 12 16 24 endif the tab stops would be set at columns 14, 18, 22 and 30 because the first text column in a COBOL file is 7.

Tab Stops on the Client

When you change tab stops on the client, the new settings are recorded in the document database and are used whenever you access the file. Tabs modified on the client are only applied to the active file.

There are two ways you can set document-specific tab stops on the client: on the ruler of the document window or in the Properties dialog box.

Setting Tab Stops on the Ruler

Qedit shows tab stops on the ruler bar as small arrowheads pointing downward. If you have never modified the tab stops (e.g., new file or file never modified), Qedit’s default is every four columns. New tabs can be set with a tab stop marker, which appears in a button above the ruler.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Default tab stops

Before you can set a tab stop, the ruler bar must be visible. To add new tab stops, drag the marker to a position on the ruler. Click and hold the marker until the mouse pointer becomes an arrowhead. Then drag the tab marker to a position on the ruler bar. Tab stops apply to the whole file.

Text-Formatting Features

• 111

Moving or Clearing Tab Stops on the Ruler

Before you can move or clear a tab stop, the ruler bar must be visible. To move a tab stop, drag the marker to the new position on the ruler bar. To remove a tab stop, drag it off the ruler bar.

NOTE: If the Use spaces for tabs document option is enabled, changing tab stops does not affect existing lines. Because the text does not contain

TAB

characters anymore, the alignment remains the same. However, if the document option is disabled and there are

TAB

characters in the text, the text will shift as you modify the tab stops.

Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box

The other method for setting tab stops is through the Properties dialog box on the

Tabs tab. You can easily set an individual tab stop or a series of tab stops.

112

• Text-Formatting Features

Setting tab stops in the Properties dialog box

To set individual tab stops,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Tabs.

3. Enter a column number in the At column text box. You can type a number or you can use the scroll arrows to select the column you want.

4. If the new tab stop does not overlap with any current tab stops, the button next to the At column text box will be called Set. Click it to acknowledge the new tab.

If the new tab overlaps with any current tab stops, the button next to the At

column text box will be called Clear. To remove the tab that overlaps, click

Clear. To allow overlapping tabs, click the Clear button to change it to Set, then click the button again.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

5. For each new tab stop, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6. To save the new tab(s) and close the dialog box, click OK. To set the new tab(s) without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

To set tab stops at regular intervals,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Tabs.

3. Enter the number of columns between each stop in the Every text box.

Remember that these intervals start at column 1. For example, if you specify a stop every 8 columns, tab stops will be set at columns 9, 17, 25, etc.

4. If the new tab stops do not overlap with any current tab stops, the button next to the Every text box will be called Set. Click it to acknowledge the new tab stops.

If the new tab stops overlap with any current tab stops, the button next to the

Every text box will be called Clear. To avoid setting tabs in overlapping positions, click Clear. To allow overlapping tabs, click the Clear button to change it to Set, then click the button again.

5. To save the new tabs and close the dialog box, click OK. To set the new tabs without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

If you have the ruler bar enabled, the markers for these new tab stops are automatically displayed in the document window.

Moving Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box

To move a tab stop in the Properties dialog box, you need to add a tab at each new

location (see “Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box” above) and clear each

old tab stop (see “Clearing Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box” below).

Clearing Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box

You can clear overlapping tab stops when you set new ones (see “Setting Tab Stops in the Properties Dialog Box” above). After tabs have been set, however, you can

also clear one tab, a series of tabs at regular intervals, or all the tab stops in the file.

To clear some of the tab stops,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Tabs.

3. Enter the position of the tab(s) that you want to remove in either the At

column (individual tab) or Every (series of tabs) text box. If you have entered the position of an existing tab, click the Clear button next to the text box. If you have entered a position that does not correspond to an existing tab, the button will be called Set.

Repeat this step for each tab or set of tabs that you want to remove.

4. To clear the selected tabs and close the dialog box, click OK. To clear the selected tabs without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

Text-Formatting Features

• 113

If you want to remove all the tab stops from a file, simply select Properties from the File menu. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Tabs and click

Clear All.

Auto-Indent

Guide Lines

Guide marker

Guide pointer

Auto-indent is a great feature because it allows you to follow the indent of the last line when you press the

RETURN

or

ENTER

key. Instead of the cursor going back to the first position of the line, it goes to the column that matches the indentation of the previous line. You can use spaces or tabs to increase the indentation. If you use tabs, you can use

SHIFT

+

TAB

to decrease the indentation.

You can change the auto-indent setting for a specific document with:

1. Select the Properties command from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, go to the Options tab.

3. Select the Auto-indent check box.

Guide lines are vertical lines that provide a visual aid for aligning text. They do not modify your text, but provide you with a constant reference point throughout a file.

Once you set a guide line in a document, it remains on your screen as long as you view the file.

There are two ways you can set document-specific guides: on the ruler of the document window or in the Properties dialog box.

Setting Guide Lines on the Ruler

Before you can set a guide line, the ruler bar must be visible. To set a new guide line, click and hold the Guide marker above the ruler bar until the mouse pointer changes to a Guide pointer (a square pinhead). Then drag this new pointer to a position on the ruler bar and release it. The new guide line appears as a thin blue vertical line from the ruler bar all the way down to the document status bar. You can set as many guide lines as you need.

114

• Text-Formatting Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Guide lines in document window

Moving or Clearing Guide Lines on the Ruler

If you want to move an existing guide line, simply drag it to a new position on the ruler bar. If you want to remove a guide line, drag it off the ruler bar.

Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box

The other method for setting guide lines is through Properties dialog box on the

Guides tab. You can easily set an individual guide line or a series of guides.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Text-Formatting Features

• 115

116

• Text-Formatting Features

Setting guide lines in the Properties dialog box

To set individual guides,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Guides.

3. Enter a column number in the At column text box. You can type a number or you can use the scroll arrows to select the column you want.

4. If the new guide line does not overlap with any current guide lines, the button next to the At column text box will be called Set. Click it to acknowledge the new setting.

If the new guide line overlaps with any current guide lines, the button next to the At column text box will be called Clear. To remove the overlapping line, click Clear. To allow an overlapping line, click the Clear button to change it to

Set, then click the button again.

5. For each new guide line, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6. To save the new guide line(s) and close the dialog box, click OK. To save the new guide line(s) without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

To set guides at regular intervals,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Guides.

3. Enter the number of columns between each stop in the Every text box.

Remember that these intervals start at column 1. For example, if you specify a stop every 8 columns, guide lines will be set at columns 9, 17, 25, etc.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

4. If the new guide lines do not overlap with any current guide lines, the button next to the Every text box will be called Set. Click it to acknowledge the new setting.

If the new guide lines overlap with any current guide lines, the button next to the Every text box will be called Clear. To remove only the guide lines that overlap, click Clear. To allow overlapping guide lines, click the Clear button to change it to Set, then click the button again.

5. To save the new guide lines and close the dialog box, click OK. To set the new guide lines without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

If you have the ruler bar enabled, the new guide lines are automatically displayed in the document window.

Moving Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box

To move guide lines in the Properties dialog box, you need to add a guide line at

each new location (see “Setting Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box” above)

and clear each old guide lines (see “Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog

Box” below).

Clearing Guide Lines in the Properties Dialog Box

You can clear overlapping guide lines when you set new ones (see “Setting Guide

Lines in the Properties Dialog Box” above). After guide lines have been set,

however, you can also clear one line, a series of lines at regular intervals, or all the guide lines in the file.

To clear some of the guide lines,

1. Select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Guides.

3. Enter the position of the guide line(s) that you want to remove in either the At

column (individual guide line) or Every (series of guide lines) text box. Once you have entered the position of an existing guide line, click the Clear button next to the text box. If you have entered a position that does not correspond to an existing guide line, the button will be called Set.

Repeat this step for each guide line or set of guide lines that you want to remove.

4. To clear the selected guide line(s) and close the dialog box, click OK. To clear the selected guide lines without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

If you want to remove all the guide lines from a file, simply select Properties from the File menu. When the Properties dialog box appears, select Guides and click

Clear All.

Invisible Formatting Characters

Some characters, such as spaces and tabs, are used to format text in a file. By default, they do not appear on the screen when you edit a file; they appear as empty

Qedit for Windows User Manual Text-Formatting Features

• 117

Shortcut: Alt+V, I

space between characters. Even though they are mostly used for lining up columns in a file, they can also have special meanings. For example, files on UNIX can contain

TAB

characters to separate data fields.

Qedit also displays end-of-line markers whenever appropriate.

If you want to see where

SPACE

and

TAB

characters are used, you can enable the

Show invisibles command on the View menu. Once enabled, spaces between words are shown as small dots. Each dot represents one character.

TAB

characters are represented by arrowheads pointing to the right. End-of-line markers are represented by a left-pointing arrow. This icon is similar to the one usually appearing on the keyboard

ENTER

key.

Invisible formatting characters displayed

In the example, you can see the lines in the “Set up the terminal” section are aligned.

The first three use

TAB

characters and the last three use

SPACE

characters.

The color in which these invisible formatting characters appear is defined in the color scheme applicable to the document.

Matching Opening and Closing Characters

In most programming languages, syntax requires the use of opening and closing characters to delimit operations or expressions. Most common character pair is probably parentheses. Another example is the left and right square brackets "[" and

"]" in Qedit Scripting Language. To complicate things further, often times, the character pairs can be nested making it hard to find matching sets. Qedit offers a simple feature in which the opening character is momentarily highlighted as you type a matching closing character. This feature helps identify the text enclosed by the pairs. The opening character is briefly highlighted with a square using the

Attention highlight color defined in the color scheme for this file.

This feature can be disabled by removing the check from the Balance

Punctuation (parentheses, brackets) while typing option on the General page of the Preferences dialog box.

Also, if you type a closing character for which Qedit cannot find a matching opening character, Qedit emits a sound. You can disable this feature by removing the check from the Alert sound on unmatched punctuation option on the General page of the Preferences dialog box.

This feature recognizes parentheses, square brackets and curly braces.

118

• Text-Formatting Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Working With Syntax Coloring

Syntax coloring uses different colors to identify different parts of the text. This is useful for any text that follows syntactic rules such as programming languages. In these structured text, words are not created equals and have different usage. In Qedit for Windows, there are 4 categories:

• regular text

• comments

• delimited or quoted text

• keywords or reserved words

Regular text typically represents user-defined words such as program variables.

Comments are sections providing hints and documentation. They usually don't have any effect on the programs using the file. Most programs need to manipulate character strings. Typically, these strings are enclosed between delimiters or quotes.

Lastly, certain words have special meanings. They are usually known as reserved words or keywords.

Qedit uses language template files to describe language syntax elements. A template file describes how to recognize the language of a file, comments, quoted text and what are the keywords. Each element is assigned a color. During an edit session,

Qedit analyzes the text and highlights words with the appropriate color. This event occurs automatically as soon as Qedit is able to associate a language. For new files, syntax coloring might occur only after the first save. For existing files, this should happen as soon as the file is opened. If it can't associate a language, no coloring occurs.

Language template files are loaded when Qedit starts up. Since these files are plain text files based on the XML specifications, you can easily customize existing templates or you can create your own. To activate your changes, you need to exit out of Qedit and start it up again.

If you wish to know which language Qedit is associated with a particular file, look at the Information page of the File Properties dialog box. The language name on the page is the name specified in the language template file.

Ambiguous Language Identification

Qedit associates a language with a file based on one of 2 things:

• a Qedit Language Code for host files

• the extension of a file for Posix, Unix and local files.

This information is entered in each language template. Qedit does not prevent the same language code or extension from being used in more than one template. Qedit uses a very simple method to resolve the ambiguity: it uses the last one loaded. From the user's point of view, however, this can be disconcerting. We recommend that a language code or file extension be used in only one language template.

SQL Language Templates

The Structured Query Language (SQL) is used with most, if not all, relational database management systems (RDBMS) such as Oracle, Allbase and MySQL.

Although these systems are based on SQL, they all have differences and unique

Qedit for Windows User Manual Text-Formatting Features

• 119

language extensions. For this reason, Qedit for Windows comes with multiple SQL template files: oracle.xml, allbase.xml and mysql.xml. Most of these systems allow creation and execution of script files. Typically, the script files share the same extension: ".sql". That's what is used in the template files.

To avoid any confusion and make sure Qedit picks the appropriate template for your environment, you have to remove the ambiguity. To do this, you can do one of the following:

• You can rename the templates you do not use. Change the .xml extension to something else.

• You can move the files from \robelle\qedit\system\language to another directory.

• You can edit the templates you do not intend to use. Open them in Qedit and remove the extension blocks or change the extension identifier to something unique.

Order of Precedence

The same characters or strings can be used in different categories in a language template. This can affect coloring behavior and may appear incorrect to users. That's why this is not recommended.

When analyzing text for syntax coloring, Qedit uses the following order of precedence to identify categories:

1. Quotes

2. Comments

3. Keywords

4. Regular text

For example, if double-quote character is defined as a quote delimiter as well as a comment delimiter, it's going to be used as a quote. Similarly, if the letter "C" appears as a comment delimiter as well as in the keyword list, it's going to be used as the start of a comment.

Text within quotes is not analyzed. Similarly, text following the start of a comment is not analyzed.

Customizing Text-Formatting Features

Displaying the Ruler Bar When Opening Files

The ruler bar can be enabled in each document. If you would like every document window to open with the ruler bar, first select Preferences from the Options menu. Then enable the Open file with a ruler bar option from the Default tab.

NOTE: If this option is enabled, the ruler bar will appear in all the panes created with the split view feature.

120

• Text-Formatting Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Setting the Default Font for Document Windows

If you would like all your files to have a specific font, you set it as Qedit’s default.

To set the default font for all new documents,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, go to the Defaults tab and click Display Font.

3. When the Font dialog box appears, select the Font, the Font style, and the

Size. If you want to apply a font size that is not available in the list, you can type a custom size in the text box.

Once the default font is changed, any new document you open will automatically use the new font. Any open documents at the time of the change will be converted to the new font. However, if you change the default font of a file with the Properties command in the Files menu, the font in open documents will not change.

Setting the Default Value for Auto-indent

If you would like to use the same auto-indent setting for all files you have never opened, you can set it in the Preferences dialog box:

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. When the Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, go to the Defaults tab and set Enable auto-indentation to the desired state.

Any new document you open will automatically use the new setting.

Displaying Invisible Formatting Characters When

Opening Files

To display invisible formatting characters, enable the Show invisibles option in the View menu. If you prefer to have invisible formatting characters always appear when opening a file, enable the Open files with invisibles shown option on the

Defaults tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Setting the Default Color Scheme

Qedit allows you to define your own color schemes for document windows. It offers a number of predefined schemes, including one for Qedit defaults. You can select a color scheme as the overall default from the General page of the Preferences dialog box.

Text-Formatting Features

• 121

Selected scheme

Colors in selected scheme

122

• Text-Formatting Features

Color scheme list

Color Customization dialog box

To select a color scheme, simply click the name in the color scheme list. Its colors appear in the color boxes on the right. Each color scheme includes these elements:

• Normal text: Characters making up the actual text of the file and COBOL tags.

• Background: Workspace background. Characters in the foreground can be

Normal text, Invisible marker, Guides, Comments, Quotes and

Keywords.

• Invisible marker: Markers displayed when the Show invisibles option of the View menu is enabled.

• Guides: Once set, guidelines are always visible in the document window.

Guidelines can be set when the Ruler bar is displayed or from the Guides page of the Properties dialog box.

• Pane border: Panes appear when using the split view feature. This color is used to delimit the panes.

• Split box: Small box at top of the vertical scroll bar or on the left of the horizontal scroll bar. The box is used to create split views.

• Tag background: Area where COBOL tags are displayed. The tag values can be displayed using one of the Normal text, Comments, Quotes or

Keywords colors.

• Margin background: Area between the right margin of the text and the right margin of the document window. This area should be empty.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• Caret: Blinking insertion point (vertical or horizontal) when there is no text selected.

• Attention highlight: Brief visual signal to get the user's attention. For example, the corresponding opening parenthesis when typing a closing parenthesis.

• Comments: Various types of comments defined for the file's language (see

"Appendix D - Language Templates" on page 251).

• Quotes: Text enclosed in quote characters defined for the file's language (see

"Appendix D - Language Templates" on page 251).

• Keywords: Language reserved words (see "Appendix D - Language

Templates" on page 251).

To select a new color, click the corresponding color box. You will see another dialog box with a color palette:

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Color palette dialog box

Select the color that you want and click OK. The color palette shown above could be different on your system, because color is based on your current display settings.

Here is how a sample Cobol source program is displayed with syntax coloring.

Text-Formatting Features

• 123

124

• Text-Formatting Features

Sample Cobol source file with syntax coloring.

Changing an Existing Color Scheme

To change an existing color scheme,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. Select Color schemes on the General page.

3. Select a color scheme in the list or type its name.

4. Select the color box of the corresponding element.

5. Select the new color from the color palette.

6. Click OK.

7. Click Update on the Color customization dialog box.

8. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Adding a Color Scheme

To create a new color scheme,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. Select Color schemes on the General page.

3. If you want to use an existing scheme as the base, select it from the list.

4. Type in the new name (replace the existing name if needed). Color scheme names can only contain letters, numeric digits, spaces, underscores, asterisks, pound signs, exclamation point, dots, slashes and commas.

5. Select the color box of the element you want to change.

6. Select the new color from the color palette.

7. Click OK.

8. Change the necessary elements.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

9. If the name did not exist, the Update button on the Color customization dialog box becomes Add. Click it to finalize the new scheme.

10. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Removing a Color Scheme

To remove an existing color scheme,

1. Select Preferences from the Options menu.

2. Select Color schemes on the General page.

3. Select the color scheme from the list or type it.

4. Click Delete to remove it.

5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Default Colors Hierarchy

Default colors can be set at different levels.

1. Global default: Defined from the General page of the Preferences dialog box.

2. Host type defaults: Defined from the UNIX, MPE and Local pages of the

Preferences dialog box.

3. Connection default: Defined from the Connection List dialog box.

4. File colors: Defined from the Options page of the Properties dialog box.

Colors defined at lower levels always override colors defined at previous levels. For example, if you have defined host type defaults, these will be used even if a global default has been set. Similarly, file colors are always used, no matter what has been defined for the corresponding connection, host type or globally.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Text-Formatting Features

• 125

Line Features

Overview

Qedit’s many line features can be applied to an array of situations. Using line numbers and record numbers, you can quickly navigate through files. Display

COBOL tags when you need to see them, define the maximum line length of a file, and control spaces at the end of a line. All these options expand the Qedit toolkit.

Record Numbers

Lines can be referenced by either a number relative to the beginning to a file (record number) or a number assigned by a host (line number). Qedit for Windows can use these two types of numbers as navigational tools.

Host Line Numbers

Some Qedit for Windows host files have line numbers, which are sequential numbers assigned by the host. Although line numbers are stored within a host file, they do not appear in the document window. Line numbers can have up to 3

decimals e.g. 115.832. See “Finding a Line Number in a Host File” on page 141 for

more information.

Record Numbers

All files in Qedit for Windows have record numbers, which are ordinal numbers that represent a line position relative to the beginning of the file. Thus, record numbers can be integers only, no decimals. When this option is enabled, record numbers

appear in the document window. See “Finding a Record Number” on page 142 for

more information.

Displaying Record Numbers

If the Record number command is enabled on the View menu, Qedit shifts the text to the right and inserts the record number of each line. These numbers appear dimmed because they cannot be modified.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Line Features

• 127

Record numbers in document window

Hiding Record Numbers

If you do not want line numbers to appear in the document window, you can hide them. To hide line numbers in a file, select Record numbers in the View menu.

Trailing Blanks

Preserve Trailing Blanks

By default, Qedit always preserves trailing spaces that have been entered. If you try to insert new text on these lines, the trailing spaces will eventually reach the right margin. When this happens, Qedit will not allow you to enter anything else. You then have to go to the end of the line and remove some of these spaces to make room for the extra characters. Although this can be annoying, Qedit does this because it presumes that anything you type explicitly is valuable and should be kept intact.

Unfortunately, you cannot tell which lines have trailing spaces and which ones don’t. If trailing spaces are really not important, you can disable Preserve trailing

blanks. Once disabled, Qedit removes trailing spaces as needed to make room for new text.

This setting only affects editing while the file is opened. As you modify the file and add trailing blanks, Qedit recognizes them. However, trailing blanks are not written to the file when you save it. Next time you open the file, trailing blanks are gone.

That's because the server never transmits them to the Qedit client.

NOTE: If you delete characters from a line, Qedit does not put back trailing spaces that might have been removed.

128

• Line Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

COBOL Tags

Tags can only be used in files with Language of COBX.

COBOL source files can contain some information in columns 73 to 80 of each line.

This area is sometimes referred to as auto-comments or tags. For COBOLX files, this area appears in a different color. The color is defined in the color scheme applicable at the time. You can set COBOL tags in either the server configuration file or the client.

COBOL Tags in Server Configuration Files

Although the default value for a COBOL tag is set in the server configuration file, you can override it by using the COBX tab in the Properties dialog box.

For example, if you want to set a special default tag only for users that connect as

“CLERK” in their session name, you can either insert the following lines in

Qeditmgr.Pub.Robelle or each user can put the Set X command in their own

Qeditmgr configuration file. See “Customizing the Server” on page 19 for more

details.

if hpjobname="CLERK" then

Set X "ME" yymmdd List on endif

The Set X command has two parts. The first part, Set X <string> <date>, allows you to define the string you want inserted in the tag area. The second part, Set X List On

| Off, allows you to control the display of the tag area. In total, you have four (4) possible combinations:

• Set X "" List Off

No automatic or manual update, tags are hidden

• Set X "" List On

Manual update allowed, no automatic update, tags are displayed

• Set X <string> <date> List Off

Automatic update, no manual update allowed, tags are hidden

• Set X <string> <date> List On

Automatic update, no manual update allowed, tags are displayed

Set X List On vs. Set X List Off

The List option of the Set X command controls whether or not you see the tags in the document window. The text area only goes to column 72. Because you do not have access to columns 73 to 80, you cannot manually enter tags.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Line Features

• 129

COBOL file with tag area not displayed

If this option is enabled, the area in columns 73 to 80 appears in a different background color. All existing tags are displayed in that area. The text area and the tag area are independent of each other. If you delete characters from the text, the tag value does not move to the text area. Similarly, if you insert text, characters from the text area do not overflow into the tag area. If you split a line, the tag value remains on the original line. If you splice a line by deleting the end-of-line character, the tag value from the second line does not move with the text.

Of course, this requires Set X

List On to have the tag area displayed.

COBOL file with tag area displayed

Set X vs. Set X <string> <date>

The other parameter of the Set X command allows you to update the tags either manually or automatically. If you do not want Qedit to automatically tag modified lines and would prefer to manually enter something in the tag area, put a set x command with no parameters in the configuration file or use set x ""

(a null string can be entered as two consecutive quotes). The tag area is then under your total control. Qedit will not automatically put or change anything in these columns. With this setting, you can move the insertion point to the tag area and start typing. If the cursor is in the tag area, Qedit automatically switches to overwrite mode.

On the other hand, if you want Qedit to put a tag on all modified and new lines, use

130

• Line Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

set x <string> <date>

There are many different ways to define the tag value. You can use a character string, the host system date in various formats or combine a character string with the system date. Please refer to the Set X command in the host-based Qedit user manual for details.

If you have defined a tag value, Qedit automatically inserts it on modified lines

whether you see the tag area or not. In the example used previously, the tag would contain the letters “ME” followed by the host system date in YYMMDD format. For example, on December 31, 1977, the value would have been “ME771231.”

The tag area is then under Qedit’s total control and you will not be able to manually change anything in it. If you try to modify a tag, you will get an error message:

COBOL tag modification error

COBOL Tags in the Client

If you want to customize your COBOL file, you can also change the settings of the

COBOL tags in the client. These settings override the tag settings in the server configuration files.

Setting COBOL Tags in the Client

Changes to tag settings in the client are applied only to the current file and are saved in the document database. New tag values are also sent to the server so that modified lines are properly identified.

To set COBOL tags in the client,

1. Select Properties in the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, click COBX. Although you can always access this tab, you will not be allowed to change any of its settings unless:

• the Language of the file is COBX

• you are running version 4.7.11 and later of the server

Line Features

• 131

132

• Line Features

Changing the COBOL tag in the COBX tab

3. Enter the new COBOL tag settings in the Date, Prefix and Suffix boxes. A

COBOL tag can have a literal prefix (string), a literal suffix (string), and the system date. You can use only one of these settings or combine any of them.

Qedit has only one restriction: the total length of the tag cannot exceed 8 characters. As you enter new settings, Qedit displays the new tag beside the Tag label.

There are six different formats in the Date list box:

• DDMmmYY, where the month (Mmm) appears as a 3-letter abbreviation where the first letter is uppercase and the last 2 are lowercase.

• YYMMDD

• MMDDYY

• DDMMYY

• CCYYMMDD

• DD MMMYY, where the month (MMM) appears as a 3-letter abbreviation, all uppercase.

In the formats with the 2-character month (MM), the information is all numeric:

CC represents the century, YY represents the year, MM represents the month and DD represents the date.

4. To control whether Qedit will show or hide the new tag in your document window, simply enable or disable the Display tags option.

This option only controls the display. It does not affect the way lines are updated. Basically, if a tag value is defined in Date, Prefix or Suffix, modified lines are tagged even if you don't see the results on the screen.

5. To save the new settings and close the dialog box, click OK. To save the new settings without closing the dialog box, click Apply. The Apply button is useful when you want to continue working in the Properties dialog box.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

If the new tag exceeds the maximum length (8 characters), Qedit will display an error message when you select Apply or OK.

COBOL Tags: Automatic vs Manual

COBOL tags can be updated automatically or entered manually but these options are mutually exclusive. The rules are fairly simple. If you have defined a tag value,

Qedit assumes you want to use the automatic update feature. Whether tags are displayed or hidden does not have any effect.

If you have not defined a tag value, Qedit assumes you want to be able to manually modify lines. Of course, the Display tags option must be enabled so you can have access to the tag area.

Line Length

Maximum Line Length

The maximum line length can be as much as 8,172 characters or as small as 66 columns for COBOL, or even smaller for data files. This means that when you combine lines together by pressing

DELETE

at the end of a line or by pasting from the Clipboard, you will likely receive the message:

The resulting line would be too long

Most Windows editors have such a large maximum line length, such as 64,000 columns, that you never see this problem. But many host-based files must have fixed-size lines, both programming language files and application data files.

Line Termination

Lines in UNIX files are usually delimited with the

NEWLINE character. It is sometimes called the

LINE FEED

character. Other operating systems use a

CARRIAGE RETURN

or a combination of

CARRIAGE RETURN

and

LINE FEED characters. Qedit automatically detects these characters and splits lines at the correct location. During a Save operation, Qedit uses the same record delimiter.

You can change the line termination character on the Options page of the

Properties dialog box or the Local page of the Preferences dialog box.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Line Features

• 133

Searching & Replacing Features

Overview

Qedit gives you immediate search results, even with enormous host files. This is because Qedit actually performs host file searches on the server, not the client. When

Qedit finds a string match, it downloads only the portions of the file that contain the match. That’s why Qedit is so fast. Qedit also provides you with numerous search criteria: embedded words, highlighted words, pattern matching, as well as a partial file search. Qedit’s replace option further enhances the search capabilities.

Scrolling Through a File

You can scroll through a file either horizontally or vertically. There are several basic ways to scroll through a file: use the scroll bar, use cursor movement keys, or use the wheel of an intelligent mouse. Each document window has both a horizontal and vertical scroll bar.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching & Replacing Features

• 135

Scroll arrow

Scroll box

Vertical scroll bar

Scroll arrow Scroll box

Vertical and horizontal scroll bars

Horizontal scroll bar

Using the Scroll Bars

The vertical scroll bar is located on the right side of a document window. A scroll bar consists of scroll arrows at either end of the bar and the scroll box that moves along the bar. Just as in other applications, it allows you to scroll up and down in a file. The distance you move in a file depends on how you use the scroll bar or how far you move the scroll box.

If you click a scroll arrow, you will move one line at a time. If you drag the scroll box, you can move multiple pages. If you click the scroll bar itself between the scroll box and either of the arrows, you move up or down by one page. The status bar always indicates the line number of your current position.

If your file is wider than your document window, you can scroll left or right by using the horizontal scroll bar located at the bottom of the window. It works the same way as the vertical scroll bar, except it moves left and right.

Using the Intelligent Mouse

If your mouse has a wheel as well as the usual buttons, you have an “intelligent” mouse. The wheel provides an easy way to scroll through a file without moving your pointer to one of the scroll bars. Simply rotate the wheel to move the displayed text.

Qedit recognizes this scrolling method. You can adjust the speed of the scroll by setting the Mousewheel Acceleration slider in the Preferences dialog box. If you bring the slider all the way to the left, Qedit scrolls slowly for each turn of the wheel. If you bring the slider to the right, Qedit scrolls quickly.

136

• Searching & Replacing Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Using Cursor Movement Keys

Another way to move through a file is to use cursor movement keys. Your PC keyboard has the following eight cursor movement keys:

To move

one line up

Press this key

↑ one line down one character left one character right

↓

←

→ beginning of the line end of the line one page up less one line

Home

End

Page Up one page down less one line Page Down

Cursor movement keys can be combined with other keys to provide other shortcuts.

See “Key Combinations and Functions” on page 200.

Setting Markers in a File

Shortcut:

F11

key

Shortcut: F12 key

Shortcut: CTRL+F11

Marking a Position

For each document, Qedit can save up to the last 10 markers at a time. These markers can be an insertion point or a block of selected text. Qedit uses a Last

In/First Out (LIFO) stack to save these markers. To mark a position, select the Save

position command in the Mark menu.

For example, if you put markers on lines 2, 10 and 8, and then go to line 20, the cursor returns to line 8, 10 and 2, respectively, when you use the Go to previous

position command consecutively.

If you save more than 10 markers in the file, you will lose the oldest marker. You will also lose a marker if you delete or cut-and-paste the text in which a marker is located.

Returning to a Marked Position

Although you can save up to 10 markers in a file, you can return only to the previously saved marker in the list each time you select the Go to previous

position command in the Mark menu. If you have not saved a marker, this command is unavailable. If you want to mark the position to which the caret returned, you have to use the Save position command again.

Exchanging Current Position with Last Marker

To return to the last marker without losing your current position, you can use the

Exchange position command in the Mark menu. This switches your insertion point with the last saved marker, as if you had used Save position and Go to

previous position simultaneously.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching & Replacing Features

• 137

Shortcut: Shift+F12

Using the Last Marker to Select Text

Use the Select to Saved Position command to quickly select text between the insertion point and the position of the last marker. Find the start of the block and save the position with the Save Position (

F11

) command. Find the end of the block anyway you like (scroll, jump, search) and use Select to Saved Position.

Qedit automatically selects the text between the insertion point and the last marker.

Defining the Terms of a Search

Qedit for Windows provides you with a range of terms to search within a file: pattern matching with substitution characters, case-sensitive matching, searching whole or partial words.

The search functions are as consistent with Windows as possible, but there are some which derive from the experience of Qedit on the host (e.g., pattern matching). If you don't have access to the host-based programs, Qedit for HP e3000 or Qedit for

HP-UX, review the corresponding documentation for more details.

You can change the default settings of the search options at any time. This allows you to customize your search and give you the best results. To define the terms of a search,

1. Select Find in the Edit menu.

2. When the Find String dialog box appears, define the terms of your search:

Find String dialog box

• Search for

Qedit saves the last 15 search requests you have done. This includes the search string and all options. If you want to recall a search request, scroll through the list using the up or down arrow keys.

If you select some text before calling the dialog box, the selected text is automatically used as a search string unless the previous search used the

Match pattern or Regular Expression options.

• Ignore case

Matches the string whether it is in lowercase, uppercase, or mixed case in the file.

138

• Searching & Replacing Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• Match pattern

Matches patterns of characters instead of specific characters. For example,

@bob@green@ matches any occurrence of the string bob anywhere in a line, followed by zero or more intervening characters and then the string

green. The pattern match control characters are the same as those used in the standard host-based Qedit.

The following characters can be used for other specific pattern searches:

@ at sign matches zero or more characters of any type

# number sign matches exactly one numeric character (0-9)

?

question mark matches exactly one alphabetic character (a-z, A-Z)

~ tilde matches zero or more space characters

& ampersand matches the next character (use &@ to look for an @ sign)

^! circumflex and exclamation point are reserved use $^ and $! to match them

• Regular expression

Regular expressions use powerful syntax allowing precise definitions of your string search. Regular expressions have been around for a long time and are now available on almost any platform. For syntax details, refer to

"Appendix C – Regular Expression" on page 243. Note that server version 4.8

or higher is required.

• Smart search (whole words)

Search for whole words and ignore embedded words, such as cell in excellent. Once enabled, this option will not change until you disable it.

The Smart search also depends on the Qedit Language setting. For example, in COBOL a word can contain a hyphen character, so word does not match word-option.

• Range

You can limit the search to a specific section of the file, specify the starting point of the search, and the columns to search.

3. When you have finished selecting your options, you can proceed in the following three ways:

• Click Search Forward to search from the specified starting point towards the end of the file or Search Reverse to search from the specified starting point towards the beginning of the file.

• Click Don’t Search to save the search options, but not perform the search.

• Click Cancel to return to the previous search options and not perform the search.

Common Search Operations

Finding Consecutive Occurrences of a String

To search for a text string,

Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching & Replacing Features

• 139

Shortcut: CTRL+F

Toolbar:

Find Previous is on the left and Find Next is on the right.

1. Select the Find command in the Edit menu.

2. When the Find String dialog box appears, define the terms of your search. See

“Defining the Terms of a Search” above for a list of terms.

3. Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation.

If Qedit finds a match, it highlights the first occurrence of the string and displays the page around it.

To repeat the same search for the next occurrence of the string, use the Find Again command in the Edit menu or use the

CTRL

+

G

shortcut. To find the next occurrence, use the Find Next tool.

To find the previous occurrence, use the Find Previous command of the Edit menu, use the Find previous tool, or type the

CTRL

+

R

shortcut.

Shortcut: CTRL+F

Toolbar:

Finding the First and Last Occurrence of a String

To find the first or last occurrence of a string in a file,

1. Select the Find command in the Edit menu.

2. To find the first or last occurrence of a string in a file, enable the Entire file option instead of the From current location option.

3. Define the remaining terms of your search. See “Defining the Terms of a

Search” above for a list of terms.

4. Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation.

If Entire file is enabled and you select Select Reverse, Qedit finds the last occurrence of the string. If you select Select Forward, Qedit finds the first occurrence of the string.

Finding a Highlighted Word

To find the next occurrence of a highlighted word, use the Find "highlighted" command in the Edit menu. To find the previous occurrence of a highlighted word, use the Find previous "highlighted" command in the Edit menu. These commands use the terms defined in the last Find operation.

NOTE: The Find previous and Find next buttons always look for the last string defined in a search operation, not the currently highlighted text.

Limiting a Search to Part of a File

To limit a search operation to part of a file,

1. Highlight the section you want to search.

2. Select the Find command in the Edit menu.

3. When the Find String dialog box appears, you will see a new option in the

Range box: Selection Only replaces From current location. Enable this new option.

140

• Searching & Replacing Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shortcut: CTRL+J

The Line number and Record number options are available only for files that have both.

4. Define the remaining terms of your search. See “Defining the Terms of a

Search” above for a list of terms.

5. Click Search Reverse or Search Forward to perform the search operation.

Search Forward finds the first occurrence of the string in the selection.

Search Reverse finds the last occurrence in the selection.

Searching in Columns

To search for a string in certain columns of a file, enable the Search in columns option and enter the column numbers in the appropriate text boxes. Column numbers are relative to the Language of the file. For most languages, the first column is one.

For others, such as COBOL, the first column is seven.

The left column number is required but the right column is optional. If the right column number is not specified, Qedit assumes the search starts at the left column and continues to the end of the line. The column numbers specified are inclusive.

That is, if you enter five as the left column and seven as the right column, Qedit searches three columns: five, six and seven.

Finding a Line Number in a Host File

Lines in a file are identified by numbers. All files, local and host, have relative numbers also known as record numbers. That is, lines are numbered from one and incremented by one.

In addition to record numbers, host files often have absolute line numbers. That is, each line has explicit sequence numbers that are stored in ASCII. Absolute line numbers do not necessarily match the line position relative to the file. For example, line number 100 might actually be the 150 th

line of the file. Absolute line numbers can also have up to three decimals (e.g., 15.25, 217.147).

Although Qedit does not display line numbers in host files, it does allow you to find one. This is very useful when you are working on a server report, such as compiler errors output, which refers to lines by their absolute line number.

To find an absolute line number, select the Goto line command in the Mark menu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Go To Line dialog box with absolute line number option

When the Go To Line dialog box appears, enter the line number and click OK.

Qedit automatically selects the Line number option if the file is numbered. If the file is unnumbered, Record Number is selected.

Searching & Replacing Features

• 141

Shortcut: CTRL+J

Finding a Record Number

Lines in a file can also be referenced by a number relative to the beginning of the file. These ordinal numbers, which are called record numbers, are available in all

Qedit files. To find a record number in a file, use the Goto line command in the

Mark menu, enter the desired number and, if given a choice, enable the Record

number option. For more information, see “Record Numbers” on page 127.

You can also move around in host files using absolute line numbers.

Common Replace Operations

Qedit’s search functions are further enhanced with a replace function. Combined, search and replace can provide you with powerful editing capabilities necessary for global changes to a file.

Shortcut: ALT+E,R

Replacing Occurrences of a String

To find occurrences of a string from a certain point and replace them with another string,

1. Select the Replace command in the Edit menu.

2. When the Replace dialog box appears, enter the string you want to find in the

Search for text box and the new string in the Replace with text box.

Replace dialog box

3. Define the terms of your search operation. You get the same search options as on a Find command.

If you have not limited your search to selected text, the default start position of the search is the cursor’s current position. Qedit finds all occurrences of the string from that point to the end of the file and replaces them.

If you have limited your search to selected text, Qedit replaces the string only in the selection.

4. Click Replace to perform the operation.

142

• Searching & Replacing Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Replacing All Occurrences of a String

To replace all occurrences of a string in a file, select the Replace command in the

Edit menu. When the Replace dialog box appears, enable the Entire File option in the Range box. In this case, Qedit finds all occurrences of the Search for string defined by the terms of your search, and replace them with the new string in the

Replace with text box.

Replacing a String Based on Pattern Matching

You can use the Match Pattern option to search for generic strings. Although this can be powerful, it can also be dangerous. Let’s say there is a file with the following sentence:

Start walking and you will get home in the end.

You can enter “@Start@end@” in the Search for text box and “Wrong Way!” in the Replace with text box, enable Match Pattern and select Replace. Qedit will search for a line that has the words “Start” and “End” anywhere, with any number of characters before, in between or after. Qedit then puts the replacement string, starting on the position of the S in “Start” all the way to the d in “End.” In this example, the whole sentence gets replaced with “Wrong Way!”

Replacing a String Using Regular Expressions

Just as a pattern match can be used in a Replace operation, you can also use regular expressions. Qedit replaces the whole string matching the regular expression.

Regular expressions offer additional functionality in the replacement string. The feature is known as backreference substitution. This allows extraction of regular expression subpatterns from the original text and re-insert them in the replacement string.

Customizing Your Search Options

The caret, cursor and the insertion point are all the same thing.

Allowing the Caret in Undefined Areas

Normally, Qedit does not allow the cursor anywhere to the right of the last character on a line. If you try to enter a character in this area, Qedit automatically moves the cursor to the right-most character on the line. This is Qedit’s way of preventing an accidental extension of a line in files where spaces at the end of a line are significant.

You can change Qedit’s default so that it automatically extends spaces between the last character on the line and a newly inserted character or a

RETURN

key beyond the last character. Simply select Preferences from the Options menu. When the

Qedit Preferences dialog box appears, enable Caret allowed in undefined

areas. When this option is enabled, you will be able to put the insertion point beyond the last character of a line.

If you browse through a file while this option is enabled, the cursor remains in the same column no matter where the text ends in a line. Qedit does not adjust left or right. If the option is disabled, however, Qedit keeps the cursor in the same column only if the text extends that far. For shorter lines, the cursor is moved to the end of text, adjusting left or right as needed to always keep the text and cursor visible.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching & Replacing Features

• 143

If you start typing while the cursor is in the undefined area, Qedit automatically fills the area up to that point with blanks. If you also have enabled Preserve trailing

blanks, you might start getting error messages as you insert text.

Automatically Marking Successful Searches

To make it easier to move around in a file, you can set markers using the Save

position command of the Mark menu. When the Automatically save position

on search option on the Searching page of the Preferences dialog box is enabled, Qedit automatically marks a position after a successful Find operation, if the search string is different than the previous one.

Scrolling Method for Host Files

Depending on your network or PC, scrolling through host files using the scroll box can be slow. This is because Qedit is requesting new lines from the server as you move the scroll box. You might not actually need these lines, however, so Qedit now provides the Use live scrolling for server files option of the Preferences menu.

By default, this live scrolling option is disabled. This means Qedit will not request new lines from the server until you release the scroll box. While you move the scroll box, Qedit displays the record number corresponding approximately to that location in the file. The record number appears in a box to the left of the scroll bar. Also, the text already displayed in the window does not change or move until you release the scroll box.

The record number appears in a small box during passive scrolling.

When enabled, Qedit requests lines as you move the scroll box. If you have a fast network or if most of the file is already in the cache, you will not see any delays. The text in the document window will move up and down as you move the scroll box.

144

• Searching & Replacing Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Setting Default Search Options

You can save your favorite search options (Search entire file, Ignore case,

Smart search) as the default settings for a Find operation. To set your defaults, select Preferences in the Options menu. When the Preferences dialog box appears, enable your choice of options in Search Defaults box.

Search options have three different settings. If an option is disabled (e.g., Smart

search), the corresponding option in the Find String dialog box will also be disabled. If an option is enabled (e.g., Ignore case), the corresponding option in the dialog box will also be enabled. If an option appears dimmed (e.g., Search

entire file), the corresponding option in the dialog box will use the setting in the previous search.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Searching & Replacing Features

• 145

Copying & Printing Files

Overview

Copying and printing files is easy with Qedit for Windows. You can copy files across platforms with a simple cut-and-paste or use the standard Windows Save As command. Copy a local file to another local file, a local file to a host file, or a host file to the same or another host file or to a local file. Print a host file on any printer configured on the host connection or on a local printer. You can choose from a variety of print options to customize your printout.

Copying a File

Qedit for Windows User Manual

By using either cut-and-paste or the Save As command, Qedit for Windows can copy files across all the platforms to which it is connected.

Copying Local Files

Copying a Local File to Another Local File

You can use the standard Windows Save As command to copy a local file to another local file.

1. Open the local file you want to copy.

2. Select Save As from the File menu.

3. When the Save As dialog box appears, enter the new file name. If you want to put the new file in a different directory, you can select another directory in the file structure.

4. Click Save.

Copying a Local File to a Host File

You can make a copy of a local file and put it on a host by cutting and pasting. To copy a local file to a host,

1. Select the File menu, point to Open, and click Local.

2. Select Select all from the Edit menu to copy its contents.

3. Select the File menu, point to New, and click Host to create a new host file.

Copying & Printing Files

• 147

4. When the New Host dialog box appears, define the characteristics of the new host file and click New.

5. When the new document window appears, use the Paste command in the Edit menu to paste the local file into the new host file.

NOTE: The Clipboard has a limited capacity. See “Workarounds to Clipboard

Cache” on page 95.

Copying Host Files

Copying a Host File to the Same Host

There are times when you want to modify a file, but you don’t want to lose the last version of the file. To copy a host file to the same host is a two-part process: first open a copy of the file, then save it with a new file name. You can also use this process to rename a host file.

To copy a host file to the same host,

1. Select the File menu, point to Open, and click Host.

2. When the Open Host File dialog box appears, select the file that you want to copy.

3. Enable the Open a copy option to open a copy of the file you selected. The

Open a copy option is available in both the Open Host File and Directory dialog boxes. If you select multiple files in the Directory dialog box, the Open a copy option will apply to all of them.

4. Click Open to open a copy of the file. Qedit will open the copy and you can edit it without modifying the last version of the file.

5. Select the Save As command in the File menu.

6. When the Host Save As dialog box appears, give the file a new name. Qedit will save this file in the current directory. If you want to save the file in a different directory, enter a path to another directory including the new file name.

See “Notation in Host Operating Systems” on page 67 for more details.

If you do not remember the path name to the new location, you can use the

Directory button and go to the Directory dialog. There, you can navigate the directory structure until you get to the desired location.

148

• Copying & Printing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Host Save As dialog box

• If the new file name already exists, Qedit asks if you want to overwrite the existing file with the new one. Check whether you are really in the directory you think you are before clicking OK. The

ESCAPE

key or Cancel button is always safer!

If you already have a file with the new name, Qedit gives you an option to overwrite its contents, eliminating the confirmation message.

• Qedit also gives you an option to save the new file as a Qedit workfile.

• Enable Do not write Newline delimiters to save the file without any

Newline delimiter. This option is automatically enabled if the Length option has been specified on the Open Host File dialog box. This option is only available with the HP-UX server version 5.3.13 or later.

• Enable Fixed-length records if you wish to save the file with lines of equal length. This option is automatically enabled and can't be disabled if the CobolFixed server setting is enabled and you are editing a Cobol source file. This option is only available with the HP-UX server version

5.3.13 or later.

7. Click Save to finish saving the copied file.

If you have trained your fingers to use shortcut keys (e.g.,

CTRL

+

S

), you won’t have to worry about wiping out the existing version of a file because you work with a copy of it.

You can also use this process to rename a host file. After saving the copy, use the

Host Command dialog box and purge the old version. Of course, you could use the Host Command dialog box and enter a Rename (MPE) or mv (UNIX) command to get the same result.

You can also make a copy of a host file by using the Select All, Copy and Paste commands of the Edit menu. The Save as method is more productive because you only need a single command that uses less resources on the client and the server.

Copying a Host File to Another Host

You can also copy a host file from one host to another.

1. Open the host file you want to copy.

Copying & Printing Files

• 149

Shortcut: CTRL+A

Shortcut: CTRL+C

Shortcut: CTRL+V

2. Copy its contents with the Select All command in the Edit menu.

3. Create a new file on another host.

4. Paste the contents of the original host file into the new host file.

Copying a Host File to a Local File

There is no single command that allows you to create a local copy of a host file. You have to use the Copy and Paste commands.

1. Select the File menu, point to Open, and click Host to open the host file.

2. Select the text you want to copy. If you want to copy everything, you can use the Select all command in the Edit menu.

3. Copy the text to the Clipboard by using the Copy command in the Edit menu.

4. Create or open the local file into which you want to copy the text.

5. Paste the contents of the Clipboard by using the Paste command in the Edit menu. As Qedit pastes, it displays the Paste progress dialog box.

Paste progress dialog box

Converting a File to Qedit Format

A Qedit workfile is a host file with a special format that is valid only in a Qedit work environment. When you edit a Qedit workfile, all changes are posted to the host disc drives as soon as you enter them.

NOTE: Ordinary programs cannot read Qedit workfiles directly without modifications. While an MPE host has tools available that allow easy access to Qedit workfiles, an HP-UX host does not. For this reason, you might want to save Qedit workfiles as text files when you are finished editing them.

To convert a text file into a Qedit workfile,

1. Open the file you want to convert to the Qedit format.

2. Choose the Save As command in the File menu.

3. When the Host Save As dialog box appears, choose the Save as Qedit

Workfile option.

4. Enter the new file name. Qedit will save this file in the current directory. If you want to save the file in a different directory, enter a path to another directory

150

• Copying & Printing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

including the new file name. See “Notation in Host Operating Systems” on page

67 for more details.

5. Click Save.

Convert Qedit Workfile to Text Format

To convert a Qedit workfile into a text file,

1. Select the File menu, point to Open, and click Host.

2. When the Open Host File dialog box appears, select the file that you want to copy.

3. Enable the Open a copy option to open a copy of the file you selected. The

Open a copy option is available in both the Open Host File and Directory dialog boxes. If you select multiple files in the Directory dialog box, the Open

a copy option will apply to all of them.

4. Click Open to open a copy of the file.

5. Select the Save As command in the File menu.

6. When the Host Save As dialog box appears, give the file a new name. Qedit will save this file in the current directory. If you want to save the file in a different directory, enter a path to another directory including the new file name.

See “Notation in Host Operating Systems” on page 67 for more details.

7. Click Save.

Printing on a Local Printer

Qedit can access local and remote equipment, so you can print a hard copy of a file on the printer attached to your PC or you can send the file to a printer configured on the host (host files only).

The Page Setup command is also accessible by clicking and holding the Print button.

Print Options on a Local Printer

You can send a local or host file to the printer attached to your PC or normally available from Windows. You can specify the print options by using the Page

Setup command in the File menu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Copying & Printing Files

• 151

This function is not available at the moment.

Page Setup dialog box

When the Page Setup dialog box appears, you can specify the print options for the local printer. These settings do not control the print options for the host printer.

• Wrap long lines

This option is enabled by default. If lines are too wide to fit on the page, Qedit fits as much as possible on each line and then wraps the remaining text on the next line. For most languages Qedit wraps at word boundaries. Although Qedit does wrap host files with a Language of DATA, it does not necessarily wrap them at word boundaries. All local files are assigned a hidden Language of

SPL.

Continuation lines are indented four (4) characters from the left margin so that they are easier to identify.

If you disable this option, Qedit fills each line and truncates the text at the next character, even if it is in the middle of a word.

• Print line numbers

You can request to include line numbers on the printed page. Note that these are really records numbers, a sequential number that represents a line relative to the beginning of the file.

• Use host line numbers

If you asked to get line numbers and you are dealing with a host file, you can ask for the actual line numbers and not the sequential record numbers.

• Print page headings

By default, Qedit prints a one-line header with the PC’s current date and time, the file name, and the page number. If all this information does not fit on a single line, Qedit replaces some of the characters from the middle part of the file name with an ellipsis.

If you do not want to include the page header, simply disable this option.

• Print with syntax colors

152

• Copying & Printing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

By default, Qedit prints in black only. To print using the current syntax colors, enable this option. Qedit uses the same colors as those used on the screen. Keep in mind that certain screen colors might not show well on paper (white background) if the selected screen background is dark. For this reason, Qedit changes anything in white to black.

• Lines per page

This setting specifies the number of printed lines per page. By adjusting the number of lines per page, you can change the font size. The more lines per page you request, the smaller the font and the more characters per line. This setting can be used to remove wide lines that wrap on a page. Another way to fit more information on a page is to reduce the settings for the left and right margins.

Qedit uses your document font as your print font (or the print driver will use the closest approximation). If you want to print the file in a different font, you first have to change the font in your document. Select Properties from the File menu and click Set font.

• Margins

The four text boxes under Margins indicate the amount of space in the margins of the page. Each text box represents a side: top, bottom, left and right.

In the example above, the top, left and right margins are set to 0.5 inch. The bottom margin is set to 0.6 inch.

• Inches and Centimeters

These buttons indicate the unit of measure used with the margin settings.

Printing on a Local Printer

To print on a local printer,

1. Select the Print command in the File menu.

2. When the Print dialog box appears, specify the pages you want to print. By default, Qedit presumes you want to print the whole file. If you have selected some text, the Selection option is enabled automatically.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Copying & Printing Files

• 153

Windows Print dialog box

3. If you want to send the file to another printer, select it from the Name list.

4. Select any other options you want to use (Number of copies or Properties).

5. Click OK to print the file.

To send the output to a printer on a host, see "Printing on a Host Printer" on page

154.

Printing on a Host Printer

If you are working on a host file, you can print its content to a local printer or one connected on the host computer. You cannot print a local file directly to a host printer.

Options in the Print on Host dialog box are only available with version 4.6.54 (or later) of the server.

Print Options on a Host Printer

You can also ask Qedit to print a host file on a printer connected to the host. You can specify the print options by using the Print on host command in the File menu. The Print on host command is not available if you are editing a local file.

154

• Copying & Printing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Print on Host dialog box

When the Print on Host dialog box appears, you can specify the print options for the host printer.

• Host Device Name

Choose the destination host printer in this text box. The syntax for the device

name is specific to the host you are connected to. Look at “Changing the Default

Printer in MPE” below for other ways to print to a host printer.

• All or Selection

By default, Qedit prints the complete file. However, if you have highlighted some text, Qedit will print only the selected lines. You can override this by enabling the All option.

• Print host line numbers

You can print the host line numbers along with the text by selecting this option.

• Shift listing four columns

You can change the amount of room in the left margin by using this option to shift four columns to the right.

Changing the Default Printer in MPE

Qedit allows you to send output to a printer connected to the host computer. On

MPE, the default device class is LP. If you want to send your output to a different device, you need to enter a file equation in the server configuration file.

if Qedservmode <> 0 then

:file lp;dev=serverlp endif

Copying & Printing Files

• 155

Printing on a Host Printer

Instead of using the Print command in the File menu, you can click and hold the

Print button to display a shortcut menu from which you can select print-related commands.

Click and hold the Print button to get the print shortcut menu.

156

• Copying & Printing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Saving & Closing Files

Overview

You can quickly save and close files in Qedit, both explicitly and implicitly. The familiar Windows interface makes saving local files an easy routine to develop.

Changes to Qedit workfiles are immediately posted to the hard disc, so your work is automatically saved. Closing files is equally simple. Whether you close individual files or the program itself, you are prompted with saving options before a file is closed.

Saving a File

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Which files do you need to save?

Just because you typed some lines into a new or existing file, does not mean that your work has been saved. If there is a problem with the PC or the server, or the

TCP/IP connection between them stops, it is possible that you will lose the work you have done.

That is why Qedit for Windows has a save function accessible in many different ways. Most local and host files have to be saved explicitly, individually or all at once. Local files also have an auto-save feature. Of course, if you are using Qedit workfiles, you do not have to worry about explicitly saving all your changes.

Auto-Saving Local Files

If you want to worry about saving your work, you can automatically save changes to

local Qedit files at regular intervals. See “Saving Changes at Regular Intervals” on page 162.

Saving a Qedit Workfile

If you are working on a saved Qedit workfile, you do not need to perform an explicit save to protect your work, because workfiles are directly connected to the host so that changes are posted immediately. If you are editing a copy of a Qedit workfile, you must save the copy by performing a Save As command. If the connection is lost before you save the copy, only the changes that were made after the file was

Saving & Closing Files

• 157

Shortcut: CTRL+S

copied might be lost. Under most circumstances, it is possible to recover your changes, see "Recovering a File" on page 219.

If you are working on a Qedit workfile and you want to save it as a regular file, you need to open a copy of the workfile and then save it under a new name. If you do not open a copy of a workfile, a Save As command simply renames the workfile.

Saving an Existing File (Local and Host)

To save changes to an existing file, whether host or local, use the Save command.

Save is also one of the standard buttons on the toolbar. This menu choice is unavailable if you have not made any changes since the last save, if your file does not have a name yet (Copy or New), or if you opened the file with Read Only access.

If the file has been modified by someone else since you opened it or last saved it,

Qedit will warn you and suggest not doing the Save. This option can be disabled in the Preferences dialog box in the Options menu.

The Load local files ... K into memory option also affects how Qedit saves changes to a local file. If you enable this option, modifications to a local file that is smaller than the configured threshold are saved only when you perform a save operation. When Qedit opens these files, it reads the text into your PC’s memory and closes the original file. If, however, a file is larger than the configured threshold or this option is disabled, Qedit treats the file like a host file and continually saves your

changes to the original file. For more information, see “Loading Local Files into

Memory” on page 86.

Saving a New Host File

To save a new host file once you have created it,

1. Select the Save or Save As command of the File menu.

2. When the Host Save As dialog box appears, enter the new file name. Qedit will save this file in the current directory. If you want to save the file in a different directory, enter a path to another directory including the new file name.

See “Notation in Host Operating Systems” on page 67 for more details.

If you do not remember the path name to the new location, you can use the

Directory button and go to the Directory dialog. There, you can navigate the directory structure until you get to the desired location.

158

• Saving & Closing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Host Save As dialog box

• If the new file name already exists, Qedit asks if you want to overwrite the existing file with the new one. Check whether you are really in the directory you think you are before clicking OK. The

ESCAPE

key or Cancel button is always safer!

If you already have a file with the new name, Qedit gives you an option to overwrite its contents, eliminating the confirmation message.

• Qedit also gives you an option to save the new file as a Qedit workfile.

• Enable Do not write Newline delimiters to save the file without any

Newline delimiter. This option is automatically enabled if the Length option has been specified on the Open Host File dialog box. This option is only available with the HP-UX server version 5.3.13 or later.

• Enable Fixed-length records if you wish to save the file with lines of equal length. This option is automatically enabled and can't be disabled if the CobolFixed server setting is enabled and you are editing a Cobol source file. This option is only available with the HP-UX server version

5.3.13 or later.

3. Click Save to finish saving the file.

Saving a New Local File

To save a new local file once you have created it,

1. Select the Save or Save As command in the File menu.

2. When the Save As dialog box appears, give the file a name and select the directory in which you want to save it.

3. Click Save to finish saving the file.

If a file has not been saved yet or you use the Save As command on an unsaved file, a Save As dialog box will appear so that you can select the drive, folder and file name.

Saving & Closing Files

• 159

Saving All Opened Files

If you want to quickly save your changes to all the files currently opened, just select the Save All command in the File menu. If you have newly created files, Qedit will prompt you for new file names. If you were working with existing files, the changes are simply written to disk.

Closing a File

Close button in Windows 95 has an X.

Explicit vs. Implicit Close

When you close a file, Qedit posts all changes to it, releases any exclusive-access claims you have on it, and closes its document window. Of course, there is an explicit Close command on the File menu, but there are also implicit closes.

Implicit closes occur when you Exit from Qedit or when you Disconnect from a host.

Closing a File

In both local and host files, you can explicitly close the currently active edit window by using the Close command in the File menu. There is no corresponding toolbar button. In Windows 95, you can use the Close button in the top right corner of the window. You can also use the

CTRL

+

F4 shortcut. The edit window you closed should disappear and, if you have other files opened, another one will take its place on your screen.

What if there are unsaved changes?

If you have made changes to the file and not saved them, Qedit will ask you if you want to save your changes.

160

• Saving & Closing Files

Save confirmation dialog box

You have three ways to respond:

• Yes - Qedit saves the file. If the file has not been named yet, Qedit also prompts you for a file name as if you had selected the Save As command.

• No - Qedit closes the file and your latest changes are lost.

• Cancel - Qedit cancels the close operation and brings you back to the edit window.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

What happens to connections when you close a file?

When you close a host file, Qedit usually leaves your connection to that host active, in case you want to open another file on the same host. For more information, see

“Closing a Connection” on page 59 and “Closing Connections without Open Files” on page 59.

Forcing a Close on a Host File

Qedit always keeps track of what is going on with the server. The server always acknowledges each transaction that it receives. If a transaction is critical, Qedit will not continue until it receives a confirmation from the server.

When a file is closed, for example, the document window remains on the screen until the server confirms that the file has been closed properly. If there is a problem and Qedit does not receive an acknowledgment, a document window might remain open. If a user tries to repeat closing the file, Qedit will display a Force Close dialog box because it is waiting to finish processing the first request. Another symptom of an incomplete close operation is the continued appearance of transmission arrows. If Qedit receives another close operation while an earlier close operation is still in progress, you might see one of the following error messages in the Force Close dialog box:

Error closing connection name: filename. Close anyway?

Some information may be lost.

Unknown error closing filename. Close anyway? Some information may be lost. (Server error error number.)

Connection name has not finished operation the file.

Do you want to close anyway? Some information may be lost.

Select OK if you want Qedit to close the file without waiting for the server to respond. As mentioned in the message, you will be interrupting a transaction. If data movement is involved, you run the risk of losing data. You should only select OK when you are sure the connection with the server has been broken and the transaction cannot be completed.

If you want to give the transaction a bit more time, select Cancel.

Customizing Saving and Closing Files

Automatically Posting Qedit Workfiles on the

Server

To post the latest changes to all workfiles when you go to another Windows application, select Preferences from the Options menu, and enable the

Automatically post Qedit workfiles option. Qedit offers this option in case another application needs to use the file. If you disable this feature you can lose some changes to the file.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Saving & Closing Files

• 161

Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host

Files

By default, Qedit does not save your edited file on the server if someone else has modified the file after you got your copy of it. If you choose the Compare

Timestamps before Overwriting on Server option, Qedit allows you to write over other people’s work without receiving a warning. To change the default, simply select Preferences in the Options menu, and enable this option.

Saving Changes at Regular Intervals

Qedit can now automatically save the latest changes to a file at regular intervals. To use this feature, you have to enable the Save automatically option in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box. Then specify the number of minutes between

Save operations. If you are working with text files (as opposed to Qedit workfiles), your work is regularly saved. If you lose your connection, you only lose your work from the last automatic Save operation.

When this feature is enabled, all changes to all your currently opened files are saved

at the same time. Qedit does not allow you to set different intervals for specific documents.

162

• Saving & Closing Files

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Interacting with Hosts

Overview

Qedit has the capability to interact directly with MPE and HP-UX hosts. You can execute commands directly on the host and view the results in a dialog box.

Executing Host Commands

Qedit offers different ways to execute host commands. You can execute them one at a time and see the results immediately. You can create a document with all the commands that you need and have Qedit execute them as one. If you frequently execute the same commands, you can write a script that can be used repeatedly.

The command appears dimmed if the server does not support the feature.

Single-Line Execution

Use Host command on the Script menu to select the connection on which to execute the host command. Qedit displays only connections that are already open. If you want to execute a command on a different connection, you have to open the connection ahead of time by opening a host file, for example.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Interacting with Hosts

• 163

Host Command connection list

Selecting a connection from the Host command list displays the host command dialog box.

Stop execution

Clear log window

Copy log window

Command input field

164

• Interacting with Hosts

Expansion control

Result window

Host command dialog box with single-line result window

It is very important to note that the dialog box is not meant to be a terminal emulator.

It is simply a place to display information. And even then, output destined to format terminal screens, such as escape sequences, are inoperative here. Nonprinting characters are displayed with small empty squares, as in _&dJ. In this example, the square is a placeholder for the escape character.

The title bar shows the name of the connection on which commands are executed.

You can open multiple host command dialog boxes simultaneously.

Enter the command you want to execute in the Command field. You can enter only one command at a time. It can be any command that does not require user input and is normally available on the host via the command interpreter (CI) on MPE or the shell on UNIX. You will not be able to do anything else in Qedit for Windows until

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Clear log window

Copy log window

the command has terminated. The Command list box keeps track of the last five commands.

If you want to interrupt a command, click the Stop control button. The button is red only when a host command is currently being executed. If there is no command, the button is grey. You might want to interrupt a command if it is taking too long to execute, if it transmits too much information back or if the command is interactive

(i.e., prompts the user for information). In the latter case, Qedit's behavior is unpredictable. Typically, Qedit simply waits for more command output. If the Stop button does not seem to work, the only other option is to close the connection using the Disconnect command of the File menu.

Although an interrupt signal is sent to the host, new output lines might still be added to the result window. That's because the server has to interpret the signal and then try to stop the executing command. Although this is fairly fast, the host command still has enough time to generate more output. In addition to this, output lines might already be in transmission buffers. Qedit has to empty these buffers, even though the host command has already terminated. If you interrupt a command, you should not rely on the output because it might be incomplete.

The output log window is not cleared with each command. Instead, output from successive commands is simply appended at the end. If you wish to get rid of previous output text, click on the Clear Log Window button. Similarly, if you wish to capture the contents of the output window, click on the Copy button.

Everything in the log window is then copied to the local clipboard.

The Progress field displays information on the execution process. This is an indication on the amount of CPU resources used on the host.

The Step field displays information on the progress in a multi-step execution such as a command file or script. It shows the command that is currently being executed.

The host command output is displayed in the result window. By default, the result window only shows one line at a time. That's the last line received from the host.

If there is more than one output line, you can expand the result window by clicking on the expansion control, which is the red arrowhead to the left of the result window.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Host command dialog box with expanded result window

Interacting with Hosts

• 165

The result window turns into a workspace with scroll bars. The expansion control changes to a downward-pointing arrow. You can change the window size at any time. You don't have to do it before executing a command. To return to a single-line window, click the expansion control again.

The result window can hold approximately the last 500 lines.

Multi-Line Execution

If you are working on a file that contains host commands, you can execute them using the Run as host command command of the Script menu.

Run as host command from the Script menu

If there is no active selection, the whole file is used as a series of host commands. If there is an active selection, only the selected text is used. The host command output is automatically sent to the corresponding host command dialog box. If the dialog box is closed at the time, Qedit opens it automatically.

For faster access to this feature, you can use the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button. The last option of the shortcut menu provides the same functionality.

166

• Interacting with Hosts

Run File as host command on the shortcut menu

The file does not have to contain only CI or shell commands. You should think of the file as an MPE job stream or a UNIX shell script. It can contain a mix of operating system commands and program input. For example, on MPE it is perfectly valid to execute the following:

Qedit for Windows User Manual

run suprtool.pub.robelle

Base store

Get d-sales

List standard

Exit

Similarly, on UNIX you can use: sqlplus scott/tiger select * from emp; exit;

Disabling Host Command Execution

Although host commands are useful, there are situations where you might want to disable this feature for certain users. This can be done by inserting the following statement in one of the server configuration files:

Set Limits Sys Off

MPE Commands Execution

Host commands are not executed by the server. They are executed by a separate command interpreter (CI) process.

To execute commands on MPE hosts, the server runs an instance of the command interpreter, CI.PUB.SYS, as a child process. The CI process is created with

Stdin, Stdlist and Stderr redirected. The commands entered in the host command dialog box or in the host document are passed in as Stdin. Any output normally written out by each command to Stdlist is captured in temporary file.

Similarly, if a command writes information to Stderr, these messages are also going to be captured in a temporary file. Both Stdlist and Stderr are then transmitted to the client where they are displayed in the host dialog box.

Because the CI process is part of the session process tree, it has access to almost everything that makes up the session environment such as MPE variables. However, there are a few things you have to remember.

User Defined Commands (UDC)

User Defined Commands (UDC) are not cataloged thus are not available. Logon

UDCs are not executed when the connection is established. Command files and programs are accessible but, since logon UDCs are not executed, the

HPPATH variable might not be set, MPE might not be able to find the file you are looking for.

If some of the host commands require that the environment be set in a particular way, you have to either

• explicitly set the environment before you start executing the host commands

• change the

QEDITMGR

server configuration files so the environment is initialized properly. Server-specific settings can be executed conditionnally by checking the

QEDSERVMODE

variable first.

Session Environment

When a connection is established, a new session is started and the server program is run. This is a normal session. It runs under a user within a group and account. It has access to files in the permanent and temporary domains. Temporary files are only

Qedit for Windows User Manual Interacting with Hosts

• 167

Stop button

168

• Interacting with Hosts accessible from this connection and nowhere else. Generic files such as

$

OLDPASS are also available. You can very well compile and link a COBOL program by entering the following commands in the host command dialog box or in a host file: cob85xl cobol4.src

link $oldpass run $oldpass

Process-dependent Settings

Most changes made to the session environment are available to other processes in the process tree. There are certain commands however that only affect the current process. For example, if you use the CHDIR command, the current working directory is changed only for the application it is issued from. As soon as you exit from that application, the CWD returns to its previous value.

This has serious implications for host commands entered in Qedit. If you are using the host command dialog box, each command is executed by itself in its own CI process. If you execute commands straight from a document, a single CI process handles all the commands in the document.

In the CHDIR example, the command is executed and forgotten immediately. The next command you enter might fail if it assumes the CHDIR is still effective. Worst, it can act upon a different set of files. A Purge command might remove something totally different than what you intended.

In this situation, you have 2 options. You can put all your commands, including the

CHDIR command, in a document and use the Run as host command. The other option is to use the Directory dialog box and manually change the CWD to the location you want to work from.

Session Initiation and Termination

You will not be able to use a Hello command to start a new session. This command implies termination of the previous session which is not allowed. The CI process is started but will not be able to complete the request. The dialog box will appear as if it was waiting on something. To get the control back, simply select the

Stop button.

You will get similar results if you type Bye, .

Duplicate Output Lines

There are cases where lines in the output window of the host command dialog box will appear twice. This would be the case for most applications using a List parameter to redirect output data. Most compilers are such applications. A typical compiler command file would be like:

COB85XL.PUB.SYS

parm text="", obj="", list="", mast="", new="", info="", wksp="", xdb=""

Compilers usually write some kind of messages to indicate the number of errors, for example. Compile statistics are always written to Stdlist. Depending on the compiler directives, you can request additional output. For example, you can ask the compiler to print the source lines as they are compiled. The compile statistics are also printed with these. You can redirect the additional output to another device or

Qedit for Windows User Manual

file using the List parameter. By default, this parameter is directed to Stdlist.

The compiler is able to determine that the default output and List parameter are one and the same. It then assumes there is no need to write the compile statistics twice.

When compiling from Qedit, the CI process in charge of host command execution already has Stdlist redirected. The compiler then thinks the default output and

List parameter are different so it writes the statistics twice.

The only way to remove these duplicate lines is to specify a List parameter. You would then get only the compiler statistics. The disadvantage is that you have to manually look at the List output. For example, if List was pointing to a file, you would have to print the file or open it with Qedit.

UNIX Commands Execution

To execute UNIX host commands, the server starts a new instance of the user's default shell. The commands are then executed inside that instance. Any output is captured and returned to Qedit for display in the host command dialog box.

Since a new shell is created, all UNIX rules and limitations are applicable. For example, you can change a environment variable like PATH but, as soon as the process terminates, the changes are discarded.

For example, if you use the CD command, the current working directory is changed only for that particular process. As soon as you exit from it, the CWD returns to its previous value.

This has serious implications for host commands entered in Qedit. If you are using the host command dialog box, each command is executed by itself in its own shell process. If you execute commands straight from a document, a single shell process handles all the commands in the document.

In the CD example, the command is executed and forgotten immediately. The next command you enter might fail if it assumes the CD is still effective. Worst, it can act upon a different set of files. An rm * command might delete something completely different than what you intended.

In this situation, you have 2 options. You can put all your commands in a document and use the Run as host command. The other option is to use the Directory dialog box to manually change the CWD to the location where you want to work.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Interacting with Hosts

• 169

Script-Based Features

Overview

Starting with Qedit 4.9, Qedit comes with its own scripting language. It's simply called Qedit Scripting Language (QSL). QSL allows you to extend Qedit's feature set by writing and defining functions to address your editing needs. You can also automate file editing for hands-off operations. For technical information on QSL, please refer to the Qedit Scripting Language User Manual.

All script-related commands are on the Script menu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Script menu commands

The first set of commands, Compile, Run and Save compiled script, are mostly useful for script developers. The Run as host command command is used to execute the file as a series of host commands. The Manage scripts command is used to load and unload scripts. The Control Panel is used to display the Script

Control dialog box. Names of loaded scripts are listed at the bottom of the menu.

Script-Based Features

• 171

Script Libraries

QSL scripts can be stored in three different directories on your PC. The first two directories have fixed names and locations. They are created in the directory where

Qedit has been installed (e.g., c:\robelle\qedit) and are called System and User, respectively.

The System subdirectory contains scripts provided by Robelle. This area is rebuilt every time you install a new version of Qedit. Therefore, we recommend that you do not copy any of your own files to this directory.

If you have developed scripts of your own and want to make them available to all users at your site, you should copy them to the User directory. This area is totally under your control.

The third location is used to store private scripts. Typically, these are scripts developed or used by a single user. The directory name and location can be different on each PC. The path name can be entered in the User script directory field on the General page of the Preferences dialog box.

172

• Script-Based Features

General page of the Preferences dialog box

To specify the User script directory, select the Change button to the left of the field and browse the directory on your PC until you find the location.

The System, User and User Script directories must all have three subdirectories:

Autoload, Scripts and Startup. Each subdirectory has a specific purpose. For details, see the Qedit Scripting Language User Manual.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Managing Scripts

Some scripts are designed only for loading. This means they cannot be invoked directly, but can only add commands to the Script menu. These commands then behave like any other Qedit commands and can be used at any time.

To load a script,

1. Select the Manage Scripts command of the Script menu.

Manage Scripts dialog box

2. Select the Add button.

3. Browse your local directories until you find the script file you want.

4. Select the file and Open it.

5. The script name is automatically added to the list box on the left.

6. Select Done.

That's it. All the commands from that script are now available.

To remove a script:

1. Select the Manage Scripts command in the Script menu.

2. Select the script name from the list box on the left.

3. Select Remove. The name is removed from the list.

4. Select Done.

For more details on the Manage Scripts dialog box and the Robelle script library, refer to the Qedit Scripting Language User Manual.

Monitoring and Controlling Scripts

Most scripts can run from the Script menu. However, there are times when you need additional control over their execution. A lot of scripts apply predefined edit operations and can do so without user intervention. Other scripts are designed to

Qedit for Windows User Manual Script-Based Features

• 173

display information back to the user. You can control and monitor script execution from the Script Control dialog box.

Execution control Log window

Expansion control Source code window

Script Control dialog box

The execution control buttons allow you to run, pause, stop and step through a script. The dialog box has two smaller windows which can be expanded or collapsed using the expansion control buttons (red arrowheads on the left).

Scripts can write messages to the log window. These messages can be informative for debugging purposes or simply to return the execution results.

For more details on the Script Control dialog box, refer to the QSL User Manual.

Robelle Script Library

Robelle provides a script library with each version of Qedit. These scripts are stored in the System subdirectory of the directory where Qedit has been installed. Other scripts can be downloaded from Robelle's Web site. This section documents

Robelle-provided scripts.

Some of these scripts are automatically loaded. Others need to be loaded manually using the Manage Scripts dialog box. In both cases, script-based commands are available from the Robelle submenu of the Script menu.

The next sections describe in more detail each script found in the library. Currently, these include:

• SortLines: Sorts selected text.

• ListAll: Lists all lines in the current document containing a specific string.

• ListInclude: Lists all lines containing a specific string. This script scans the current document and all Include files.

• ListUse: Lists all lines containing a specific string. This script scans the current document and all Use files.

• ListCopy: Lists all lines containing a specific string. The script scans the current document and all COBOL Copy library files.

174

• Script-Based Features

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• MPECompile: Compiles source files on MPE hosts.

Sorting Lines

Qedit does not have a built-in function to sort text. However, the feature has been developed using a QSL script. This script is automatically loaded on the Robelle submenu of the Script menu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

SortLines script commands

Here is how you can sort text,

1. Select all the lines that you want to sort. The script sorts all the lines that are part of the selection, even if they are only partially selected.

If you use a regular selection, Sortlines assumes you want to sort on all columns. If you use a rectangular selection, Sortlines uses the text in the selected columns as the sort keys. It re-arranges complete lines in both cases though.

2. Select the Sortlines command on the Robelle submenu of the Script menu.

3. If you want to sort the lines in ascending order, select the Ascending option.

Otherwise, select the Descending option.

Qedit immediately starts executing the script and sorts the lines. Because the script uses Qedit's built-in edit functions, you can use the Undo tool to reverse the operation if you are not satisfied with the results.

Sorting on Columns

The Sortlines script sorts only the lines that are in the selection. When you try to sort on specific columns, you have to get a rectangular selection. When you have a large number of lines, it can be tedious to have to scroll through the file while holding the

CTRL

key to get to the last line. There are different to speed up the process.

If you wish to use the mouse,

1. Start a rectangular selection including only a few lines

2. Scroll through the file to display the last lines

3. Press and hold the

SHIFT

and

CTRL

keys

4. Click the mouse button on the rightmost sort column

Script-Based Features

• 175

This works relatively well but it requires a bit of practice to always get the columns that you want. If you are bit off when you click at step 4, the selection might not be what you want.

To make this easier, the Sortlines script provides the Select columns command.

All you have to do is:

1. Select the columns you want to sort on a single line or make a small rectangular selection with 2 or more lines

2. Select the command on the Script menu

The script automatically selects the same columns on all the lines in the file.

Listing Lines

The search feature in Qedit can only find one occurrence at a time. That is, you can request Qedit to jump to the previous or next occurrence. There is no built-in function to list all the lines that contain a particular string. This feature is implemented using a series of QSL scripts:

• ListAll.qsc: Scans only the active document.

• ListInclude.qsc: Scans the active document and files referenced in $include,

!include, #include and .include statements.

• ListUse.qsc: Scans the active document and files referenced in Use statements.

• ListCopy.qsc: Scans the active document and files referenced in COBOL Copy statements.

These scripts are automatically loaded as commands on the Robelle submenu of the

Script menu.

176

• Script-Based Features

ListInclude script commands

All these scripts offer a number of options. You can search for:

• a simple string (e.g., "abcproducts.html")

• a regular expression (e.g., "^[a-z0-9].html?")

• a pattern (e.g., "[email protected]?")

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

All lines containing at least one occurrence of the search string are displayed in a new local file. No matter which option you use, the scripts always perform caseless searches i.e. IgnoreCase is

TRUE

. The script also displays informative messages in the log window of the Script Control dialog box. Here is a sample output searching for a string with the List Include command:

Searching Vancouver - MPE: COBOL4.PUB.DEMO for STRING 'error'

$Include files are searched!

Actual line numbers are displayed

Started at 07/28/2000 11:15:40 AM

Vancouver - MPE:COBOL4.PUB.DEMO: 1 line(s) found **

2.915: * Common errors include file

Vancouver - MPE:ERRMSG.PUB.DEMO: 4 line(s) found **

1 : 88 database-error value 90. ME000728

1.1 : 88 input-error value 91. ME000728

1.2 : 88 output-error value 92. ME000728

1.3 : 88 unknown-error value 99. ME000728

Vancouver - MPE:COBOL4.PUB.DEMO: 10 line(s) found **

5.4 : perform 98-spell-error.

6.2 : perform 98-spell-error.

7.2 : perform 98-spell-error.

8 : perform 98-spell-error.

8.9 : perform 98-spell-error.

9.8 : perform 98-spell-error.

10.7 : perform 98-spell-error.

11.6 : perform 98-spell-error.

11.9 : 98-spell-error section.

12.5 : 98-spell-error-exit. goback.

Completed at 07/28/2000 11:15:40 AM

Searching Only the Active Document

The List All command searches only the active document.

Searching Referenced Files

With some compilers, it is possible to incorporate text from other files using special statements. The most common statement keyword is Include. Statements use a leading character and you can see variations like $Include, #Include, !Include or

.Include. From this point, we will just refer to them as Include files or use $Include.

Other languages have Use statements, but they work exactly the same as Include statements.

COBOL has the standard Copy statement to accomplish a similar operation. The syntax is a little bit different than Include and Use statements but the functionality is the same: reference lines from an external file.

You can use the other commands, List Include, List Use or List Copy, to search the active document and any referenced file it might contain. Qedit searches for appropriate reference statements based on the command you selected, opens the referenced file and then searches for the specified search string. Referenced files can be nested, which means that a referenced file can contain other reference statements.

When searching for the string, Qedit scans the files as they are encountered. The output listing then shows the exact sequence as they would be interpreted by a compiler, for example.

Because there can be numerous referenced files to search, some operations can be fairly long. If this happens, Qedit displays a progress dialog box showing the file names being searched. While the server searches for the string, the barber pole moves slowly. If the server sends matched lines to the client, the barber pole moves faster. If you want to interrupt the search, click Cancel.

Script-Based Features

• 177

178

• Script-Based Features

List Include(Find All) progress dialog box

Simple Search String

If there is no active selection, the script prompts you for one. If there is an active selection, the script uses it as a search string and starts the search immediately.

Regular Expression or Pattern Search String

If you want to search for a regular expression or a pattern, it's very unlikely that you will want to use the selection. For this reason, the script is always going to prompt you for a search string. If there is an active selection, it is going to be used as the default value, but you will be able to change it before the search operation starts.

Compiling MPE Source Files

If you are writing programs on an MPE host, you often need to compile them. You can use the host command dialog box to invoke the compiler of your choice.

However, this is sometimes tedious to move back and forth between the dialog box and the source document. In the Robelle script library, we provide a simple script that gives easy access to most compilers available on MPE. This script can be loaded from the Scripts subdirectory of the System directory using the Manage Scripts command of the Script menu. Loading this script adds commands to the Robelle submenu of the Script menu.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

MPECompile script commands

The script invokes the appropriate compiler on the active document. It supports the

Cob85XL and Cob74XL commands for COBOL programs, the Fortran command, the PasXL command for Pascal programs and the Trancomp command for

TRANSACT programs. The script simply invokes the compiler with the source file name and redirects the output to a temporary file called QSLCOMPO. For example, a COBOL compile for COBPRG1 would be:

Cob85xl COBPRG1.SRC.DEVACCT,,QSLCOMPO

The compiler output file is then opened in a new document window.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Script-Based Features

• 179

Power Tips for Developers

Overview

If you’re looking for ways to use Qedit as efficiently as possible in a programming environment, here are some tips for you.

Spanning Hosts and Operating Systems

Whether you need to access files on MPE, UNIX or Windows, Qedit lets you work on all of these operating systems from a single application. What’s even better is that you can work on any of these hosts, or any of your local files, all at the same time.

That means you can conveniently and seamlessly edit files (see “Typing, Selecting &

Editing Text” on page 87), as well as move or copy them across platforms (see

“Copying & Printing Files” on page 147).

Switching and Tiling Files

With access to multiple document windows, you can easily switch between different

Qedit files or you can switch to another application. See “Switching Between

Applications” on page 37. For example, you can have source code in one window

and its data in another. Or compare the shell script that is working properly on one host with the same script that is failing on another host. Qedit lets you work and maneuver through all your files uninterrupted.

Compare different parts of the same file by splitting a document window into

multiple views. See “Splitting a Document into Independent Views” on page 35.

And if you want to look at different files side by side, simply tile all your open files or only those you need.

Switching Between Files

To switch between files use

CTRL

+

TAB

. Every time you press

TAB

as you hold the

CTRL

key, you will switch to the next open file. Or, switch to the file you want by choosing one from the Window menu, where all open files are listed in numbered order (e.g.,

ALT

+

W

,

1 takes you to the first file).

Qedit for Windows User Manual Power Tips for Developers

• 181

Tiling Document Windows

Tile two documents horizontally by typing

ALT

+

W

,

H

. This will put currently opened windows one on top of the other. You will now see something like the picture below. Qedit uses the full width of the application workspace and fits as many windows as possible in the available height.

Horizontally tiled windows with two documents

If you prefer to see the windows side by side, use

ALT

+

W

,

V

. The application workspace will now look something like this. It uses the full height of the application workspace. Qedit tries to fit as many windows as possible in the width available.

182

• Power Tips for Developers

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Vertically tiled windows with two documents

You can switch between documents quickly by just moving your mouse to another document.

What if you have four open documents and the auto-tiling format isn’t what you want (i.e., you want to look at two at a time, but in pairs)? You can easily adjust the windows manually. Minimize the two you don’t need to look at for the moment.

Now tile the remaining two documents with

ALT

+

W

,

H

. Suppose you want the upper window to occupy more space. Drag the top border of the lower window down to make the lower window smaller. Now just drag the bottom edge of the upper window down and make it larger!

What if you want both windows to be larger, leaving a bit of the other window visible when they are active. That’s easy, because windows can overlap. Use

ALT

+

W

,

H

to tile the windows, minimize those you don’t want, then use

ALT

+

W

,

H again. Now drag the bottom edge of the lower window as far down as it will go and drag the top edge up, leaving just a portion of the other window visible. Finally, click the upper window and drag the bottom edge down, leaving just a portion of the lower window visible. Now when you switch windows, the newly active window will always expand, while still leaving part of the other window visible to scroll and click.

Now here is a test. Configure your four windows so that two of them are located at the top and cover 3/4 of the Qedit workspace, and the other two are located at the bottom and come up 3/4 of the way. Hint: adjust the location and size of each independently, then use

CTRL

+

TAB

to switch between them.

Power Tips for Developers

• 183

Working Smarter with a Terminal Window

Open up a terminal window on your host using a tool such as Hyper Terminal or

Reflection. You will need a terminal window to test an application whose source files you are modifying with Qedit for Windows. Now you can switch between the edit windows and an execution window.

Consider some typical tasks. To compile your source file, you need to ensure that your local edits are posted to the host server, then execute a compiler program on the server. If you are editing a regular file, you will want to use the Save command in the File menu before going to the terminal window and compiling the file.

Otherwise you will be compiling the old version. If you are editing a named Qedit workfile, you do not have to save your changes because when you leave Qedit for

Windows, it automatically posts changes to all open Qedit workfiles on all hosts. If you find compiling errors, just click Qedit for Windows and use the Goto command in the Mark menu to jump to the line with the syntax error.

To execute your revised program, just stay in the terminal window after a successful compile, link the program and type the command to execute it.

Advantages of Qedit Workfiles

Automatic Save

Changes to a Qedit workfile are posted to the server immediately. You do not need

to save your work explicitly. See “Saving a File” on page 157.

Sole Access to Files

If you want to make sure that only one person at a time has access to a file, you can convert a file to the Qedit workfile format. This still gives a group of people access to the file, but only the first person to open the file gets write access. Storing a file in a Qedit workfile format ensures that no one else can modify the file while you have

it open. See “Converting a File to Qedit Format” on page 150.

Preventing Accidental Overwrite of Files

Qedit server 5.1.10 or later is required.

If you are not working on Qedit workfiles, there can be simultaneous access to file.

To prevent another user from changing a file while you are working on a copy of it, you can enable a feature that warns you about a possible overwrite. This gives you the ability to decide if someone else’s changes can be overwritten when you save

your changes. See "Comparing Timestamps Before Overwriting Host Files" on page

162.

If you wish to get tighter control over host files you are working on, you can enable the Set Text Exclusive feature of the server. You need to enter the command in one of the server configuration files (Qeditmgr). For this feature to be most efficient, we recommend that you use one of the system configuration files. For complete details, refer to the appropriate Qedit User Manual.

If this feature is enabled, users will not be able to open a regular file if someone else is already working on it. If a user doesn't have the feature enabled, he will be able to open the file but will not be able to save his changes until the file is released.

184

• Power Tips for Developers

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Instant Access to Embedded Files

If you are viewing a file in Qedit and come across an embedded file name, one of the quickest ways to open the file is to highlight the name and press

CTRL

+

D

. This feature is especially useful with Include files. If the embedded file is a host file that needs a connection, Qedit has a systematic approach to select a connection. See

"Opening a File from a Command Line" on page 73 and "Opening Embedded Files" on page 74.

Getting the Fully Qualified Name of a File

ALT+F, P

If you want to include the fully qualified name of your current file in another document or an electronic mail message, simply do the following:

1. Open the source file and select Properties from the File menu.

2. When the Properties dialog box appears, click the Information tab.

3. Select Copy to put the contents of the Information tab on the Clipboard. To isolate only the file name, paste all the file information into a temporary file, delete everything except the file name, then copy the file name to the Clipboard.

4. Go to the target file or application, and paste the file name from the Clipboard.

That's the long way to do it. You can also use the Copy Pathname to Clipboard command on the shortcut menu (right-click).

Handling Nonprinting Characters

If you are working on files with nonprinting characters, Qedit preserves these characters when you edit the file. And if you need to edit the nonprinting characters, you can set up a file library of nonprinting characters and use Qedit’s convenient cut-and-paste feature to edit them. To set up a file library of nonprinting characters,

see “Inserting Nonprinting Characters” on page 90.

Minimizing Keystrokes

If you prefer to use a keyboard, Qedit’s many shortcuts minimize your keystrokes. In addition to common Windows editing functions, Qedit shortcuts include searching for and moving text as well as creating and opening files.

Menu Shortcuts

As you grow more familiar with Qedit’s features, you can incorporate keystroke shortcuts to quickly access application menus, dialog boxes, editing and searching features. It takes only a few keystrokes to put you into vital parts of the program. See

“Key Combinations and Functions” on page 200.

Letter Matching

You can select a file you previously opened by typing only the first few letters of its name in a text box. Qedit matches the letters you type with the file names in its list.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Power Tips for Developers

• 185

By carefully choosing unique and meaningful file and connection names, file selection becomes faster and more efficient.

Expanding the Workspace

If you want Qedit to display a few extra lines, you can turn the application toolbar into a floating toolbox and move it to another part of the window. This will give you

more lines per screen and a larger working area. For more information, see “Turning the Toolbar into a Floating Toolbox” on page 27.

Quick Access to Directories

If you’re not sure of a file’s name and you want to browse through a host directory to find it, here’s a quick way to get a directory listing of your current working directory or group: click and hold the Manage Connections button on the toolbar. When a shortcut menu appears, select the saved connection for which you want to get the directory listing. As soon as you choose a connection, the Directory dialog box will appear and you can browse through the listing.

Working with MPE Hosts

This section contains information that pertains strictly to MPE hosts.

Working with Copylibs

On HP e3000 computers, COBOL Copy modules are stored in KSAM files. These library files are called Copylibs. Qedit for Windows can open modules that reside in the file with the same name as your logon group. If the Copylib you use is not in your logon group, you can have a file equation in the Qeditmgr.Pub.Sys file that points to the file’s current location. Qedit/server will execute commands in the file Qeditmgr.Pub.Sys, which it does for everyone connecting to the host.

It might be a good idea to use an If command to select your personal preferences.

This example checks the session name and issues the file equate if the name contains the string “george.” Of course, you have to put your session’s name in the logon string for that connection.

If hpsession = "george" then file copylib=mylib.srcinc.acct

endif

To open a Copylib module, specify the name in parentheses. For example, you can open the “vmisc” module by specifying it as the file name in the Open Host File dialog box.

You can get a list of all the modules in the Copylib by entering an at sign in parentheses (@) as the file name. Member names are listed in a new document window.

User Labels on Files

The MPE file system stores file characteristics in a special area called file labels.

These labels are not part of the data and are maintained by the operating system. To

186

• Power Tips for Developers

Qedit for Windows User Manual

extend this feature, MPE allows the creation of user labels. An application can store additional information about the file or its contents. Because user labels are under application control, they can be erased or modified.

The MPE server is able to detect user labels but, by default, does not preserve them.

For example, if you open such a file and save it back, the user labels are removed. If you want to preserve user labels, if any, you have to add the following line to one of your server configuration files:

Set Work Labels On

This does not affect editing operations in any way.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Power Tips for Developers

• 187

Network Issues

TCP/IP

Qedit works best on a true TCP/IP connection created with a Winsock 1.1 compliant

TCP/IP stack.

Qedit should work with proxy servers. This is often used in corporate intranets to allow the people on the LAN to surf the net without exposing their actual IP addresses to the whole Internet. When using a proxy server, you will likely have to use Qedit's Firewall protocol on MPE connections. In some installations, you might have to configure the proxy server to ignore the host's IP address.

Firewalls

If you want to use Qedit to access corporate servers from home or a remote office, you might have to reconfigure your firewall software or router. With the Firewall

protocol, the connection to all UNIX and MPE hosts occurs on port 7395.

Connections to MPE hosts start off on port 1542, which is the default, and continue on other ports. If you have to use Qedit’s firewall protocol, you might have to

change your firewall with the appropriate port number. See “MPE Host

Connections” on page 211.

Most firewall configurations are done by IP address. If you use an ISP when you connect from home, you might be assigned a random IP address, which can make configuring the firewall more difficult. Most ISPs, however, use a small range of addresses for a specific user.

Client to Server Handshaking

In order to detect and report possible connection problems during a session, the client and the server programs are constantly exchanging information. Of course, if you are working on a host file, information is always flowing: your changes are transmitted to the server and the server returns lines as you scroll through the file.

Every time the client sends a transaction over the network, the server sends back a transaction to acknowledge receiving the client’s request.

If you have started a connection but are not actively using it (you might be working on a different host or have simply left your office for a moment), the client keeps

Qedit for Windows User Manual Network Issues

• 189

190

• Network Issues sending special transactions to the server to make sure the connection is still functional. These transactions are called KeepAlive. If you enable tracing on the server and look at the trace file, you would see something like this:

Sep 22, 1997 09:31:39 [187] TRead. Length=12,KeepAlive,version=1,id=0

Sep 22, 1997 09:31:39 [187] TSent. Length=12,KeepAlive,version=1,id=0

The first entry identifies the KeepAlive transaction received from the client. The second entry shows the server sending the acknowledgment back.

The client sends such a transaction every minute and expects an answer from the server almost immediately. If the client does not receive an answer from the server after 3 KeepAlive transactions (i.e., after about 3 minutes), the client assumes there is a problem and disconnects.

The server does not send any transactions of its own. It only responds to client requests. If there is a legitimate problem with the network and the client cannot communicate with the server anymore, how could the server know there is a problem?

On MPE hosts, there is also a built-in timeout value. If the server does not receive a transaction of any kind within 5 minutes, it assumes the client is no longer there and breaks the connection on the host side. This means dead sessions will eventually go away by themselves. However, if the client aborts and you were using a Qedit workfile or had a scratch file opened, you will not be able to re-open them during that 5-minute period. Qedit will report that the file is currently accessed by someone.

You simply have to wait for the timeout to expire.

On HP-UX hosts, there is also a timeout function and server processes should disappear by themselves. However, in the event that some old server processes remain on your system, you can get rid of them by logging in as root on the system console or on a terminal and entering ps -ef | grep qedit.

This command looks at all the processes currently running on your system and selects only the ones that contain the string “qedit.” You should get a listing similar to this:

root 16554 24018 2 12:05:29 ttyp4 0:00 grep qedit

joe 14043 12235 0 09:16:57 ? 0:10 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

root 12235 1 0 Oct 15 ? 0:00 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t cybil 5449 12235 0 06:44:22 ? 0:01 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t ricky 15948 12235 0 Oct 10 ? 0:01 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

The last column on the right shows the name of the programs selected. The line that reads “grep qedit” is the command you used to get this listing. Ignore it. All the other ones (running /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t) are Qedit server instances.

The line that shows a one (1) in the third column is actually the Qedit listener process. This process will be constantly running until you decide to shut it down.

You would do so if you wanted to make sure no one can connect to this host using

Qedit. For example, you might stop the main Qedit process while you are backing up the system. You also have to remove this process if you want to install a new version of Qedit for HP-UX.

The other three Qedit processes (joe, cybil and ricky) are actual Qedit connections.

The fifth column indicates the time that process was started. If you see only a time

(e.g., 09:16:57), this means the process has been running for less than 24 hours. It is the actual time it started. If the process has been running for more than 24 hours, the system shows only the date it started (e.g., Oct 10).

Based on this information and your knowledge of your system’s normal usage, you can decide which processes are valid. In this case, ricky’s process is suspect because it started before the main listener process, Oct 15. Invalid or ghost processes can be

Qedit for Windows User Manual

removed with the UNIX kill command. For example, if you want to get rid of ricky’s process, enter the command followed by the process id number showing in the second column.

kill 15948

Looking at Server Connections

From a system management point of view, it is sometimes useful to find current connections to a host. Both MPE and UNIX hosts have the information available through commands or utilities.

Users require special capabilities to run nettool.

MPE Connection List

The sockinfo command of the nettool program displays information on sockets currently used on the host. The complete program name is nettool.net.sys.

:nettool.net.sys

NETTOOL Version: B06000A1

Enter HELP HELP for an explanation of the help facility.

Enter HELP OPERATION for guidance on NETTOOL use.

Commands can be abbreviated, HELP keywords cannot.

Menu-specific commands for the ROOT:

RESOURCE CONFIG NAMEADDR PING STATUS NMDUMP

X25STAT X25CHECK IPCINT XPVAL XPPERF QVALNS

NSTEST LOOPINIT NSLOGON SOCKINFO filters

[1]>>>

At the nettool prompt, you then enter the sockinfo command. The program automatically goes to the Global Display where all currently opened sockets are listed. On a busy system, the list can be quite long. The following example has been edited and shows the format.

[1]>>>sockinfo

GLOBAL DISPLAY Gsxds=$b.86263000 12:04 pm

Pin User Program Job Pri Skts

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

122* ricky,clerk.acctg qedit.pub.robelle s3582 cq152 1

124* jinetd,manager.sys inetd.net.sys j5926 cq152 2

127* jhttpd,mgr.apache httpd.pub.apache j5905 de202 1

131* dan,pgmr.dev qedit.pub.robelle s3583 cq152 1

138* (system process) snmp.net.sys cq152 2

154* (system process) dsdad.net.sys lq149 12

163* dan,pgmr.dev vtserver.net.sys s3583 cq152 1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Totals: 28 processes, 0 locked semaphores; 40 sockets.

To identify Qedit connections, you would look for the server name currently configured in the client in the Program column. By default, the server is qedit.pub.robelle. If you know the logon information of a particular user, you would look for it in the User column. The other columns that might of interest are Pin and Job. The process identification number (PIN) is the server instance associated to a particular connection. This number should match the Host Process

ID line found in the Information page of the file Properties dialog box.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Network Issues

• 191

192

• Network Issues

You can use the Showproc command to get details on how the server has been invoked. The server name is displayed along with the encoded IP address and socket number.

:showproc 131

QPRI CPUTIME STATE JOBNUM PIN (PROGRAM) STEP

C152 0:00.708 WAIT S3583 131 (QEDIT.PUB.ROBELLE) -dxP18c915cb052a -$

UNIX Connection List

On UNIX hosts, you can find information about server instances using the ps -ef command. This command produces a list of all processes currently running on the system. To get a list of Qedit server processes, simply pipe the output from ps to grep as in: ps -ef | grep qedit

The output from this command would look something like:

root 16554 24018 2 12:05:29 ttyp4 0:00 grep qedit

joe 14043 12235 0 09:16:57 ? 0:10 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

root 12235 1 0 Oct 15 ? 0:00 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t cybil 5449 12235 0 06:44:22 ? 0:01 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t ricky 15948 12235 0 Oct 10 ? 0:01 /opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d -t

To display information on sockets, you can use the netstat command. Here is an edited example of a netstat listing:

$ netstat

Active Internet connections

Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address (state) tcp 0 0 produx.4279 produx.domain TIME_WAIT tcp 0 0 produx.domain produx.4277 TIME_WAIT tcp 0 0 produx.http 22.33.44.55.0r.1126 TIME_WAIT tcp 0 0 produx.7395 22.56.77.199.1660 ESTABLISHED

The Local Address column shows the host name and port number which sockets are using. In the example above, the host name is produx and the port number is

7395 (Qedit default). The Foreign Address column provides information on the source workstation. Typically, this is the IP address of the client PC running Qedit.

The listing can be quite lengthy. If you wish to get only information pertaining to

Qedit, you could pipe the netstat output into grep as in: netstat | grep 7395

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Reference

Menu Commands

File Menu

The File menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: New, (New) Host,

(New) Local, Open, (Open) Host, (Open) Local, (Open) Open Selection, Recent

Files, Favorites, Revert, Close, Disconnect, Save, Save As, Save All, Properties,

Print, Page Setup, Print on Host, and Exit.

New

Choosing New creates a new file. The submenu appears offering two choices: create a new Host file or a new Local file.

(New) Host

Choosing (New) Host prompts the New Host File dialog box. This is where you establish the Connection, Record Length, and Language of the file.

(New) Local

Selecting (New) Local creates a new local file automatically.

Open

Selecting Open prompts the (Open) Host and (Open) Local file submenu. If a file name is highlighted, it also prompts for the (Open) Open Selection submenu.

(Open) Host

Choosing (Open) Host prompts the Open Host dialog box.

(Open) Local

Choosing (Open) Local prompts the Open dialog box.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Reference

• 193

194

• Reference

(Open) Open Selection

If a file is already opened, Open Selection also appears in the Open submenu. This command allows you to open another file whose highlighted name appears within the open file.

Recent Files

Lists the most recently used files.

Favorites

Lists the user's favorites files and subfolders.

Revert

Prompts the Confirm Revert dialog box.

Close

Closes the current open file.

Disconnect

Closes a connection between the client and host.

Save

Saves any changes since the last save operation.

Save As

Used to rename a file or change the file name, type, directory, or path.

Save All

Saves changes to all open files on Qedit.

Properties

Prompts the file Properties dialog box. The dialog box provides tabbed pages to set general file Options, display and set COBX tags, display file-related Information, change Tabs and Guides settings.

Print

Prompts the Print dialog box in which you choose print settings.

Page Setup

Prompts the Page Setup dialog box in which you choose layout options.

Print on Host

Prompts the Print on Host dialog box in which you select the print destination. This command is not available for local files.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Exit

Quits the program, closes all files and disconnects from all hosts.

Edit Menu

The Edit menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Undo/Can’t Undo,

Redo/Can’t Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Copy Special, Clear, Select all, Find, Find again, Find again reverse, Find previous, Find next, Find selection, Find previous selection, Replace and Column.

Undo/Can’t Undo

Reverses the last action, unless the action cannot be undone.

Redo/Can’t Redo

Lets you re-apply the last undone operation, unless it cannot be redone.

Cut

Removes a highlighted selection to the Clipboard so that it can be moved. The

Clipboard can only retain one cut or copied selection at a time. See Copy.

Copy

Lets you copy a highlighted selection to the Clipboard so that it can be moved. The

Clipboard can only retain one cut or copied selection at a time. See Cut.

Paste

Retrieves the cut or copied selection from the Clipboard.

Copy Special

Prompts the Copy Special dialog box which allows control over special Copy operations to the local Clipboard.

Clear

Removes a highlighted selection and does not post it to the Clipboard. This is equivalent to pressing the

DELETE

key. If the selection is rectangular, Qedit replaces the contents of the selection with spaces.

Select all

Highlights the contents of the entire file.

Find

Prompts the Find String dialog box to search for a string, starting from the current cursor position.

Find again

Repeats a search for a string in a document, starting from the last string found.

Reference

• 195

196

• Reference

Find again reverse

Reverses the direction of the search for the same string, starting from the current cursor position.

Find previous

Searches for the previous occurrence of the string, starting from the current cursor position.

Find next

Searches for the next occurrence of the string, starting from the current cursor position.

Find selection

Searches for a selection highlighted in the file, starting from the highlighted text position.

Find previous selection

Searches for the previous occurrence of the highlighted selection, starting from the highlighted text position.

Replace

Searches for a string and replaces it.

Column

Provides access to column edit commands.

(Column) Delete

Removes text from one or more columns. Optionally, replace the text with spaces.

(Column) Insert

Inserts text in a specific column.

(Column) Shift

Shifts text in certain columns, left or right.

Text Menu

Detab

Replaces tab characters with appropriate number of spaces.

Entab

Replaces spaces with tab characters where appropriate.

Shift left

Shifts the line left to the previous tab stop.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shift right

Shifts the line right to the next tab stop.

Mark Menu

The Mark menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Save position, Go to previous position, Exchange position, and Goto line.

Save position

Marks up to ten positions in a file so that you can return to each of them.

Go to previous position

Returns to markers in Last In/First Out order.

Exchange position

Switches your current position with your last marked position. You can then return to the original position.

Goto line

Move to a line in a file.

View Menu

The View menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Ruler bar, Record numbers, Toolbar, Status bar, and Show invisibles.

Ruler bar

Displays a horizontal ruler for tabs and guidelines.

Record numbers

Displays record numbers in a file.

Toolbar

Displays the Qedit toolbar.

Status Bar

Displays the status of Qedit’s toggle keys.

Show invisibles

Displays formatting characters that are normally invisible.

Script Menu

The Script menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Compile, Run,

Load script, Save compiled script, Run as host, Host Command, Manage scripts and

Control panel. Other commands on the menu are custom commands and added by previously loaded scripts.

Reference

• 197

198

• Reference

Compile

Compiles the script stored in the active document.

Run

Compiles and runs the script stored in the active document.

Load script

Loads a script in the Qedit script environment.

Save compiled script

Compiles the script stored in the active document and saves the result in compiled format.

Run as host command

Executes the file contents or lines in the selection as host commands.

Host Command

Prompts the host command dialog box in which you can execute commands on a specific connection.

Manage scripts

Prompts the Manage scripts dialog box which allows loading and unloading of scripts.

Control panel

Prompts the Script Control dialog box which allows control over script execution, display script messages and source code for debugging purposes.

Options Menu

The Options menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Preferences,

Connections, Debug, and Server.

Preferences

Prompts the Qedit Preferences dialog box in which you choose default settings for

General, Searching and Defaults options.

Connections

Prompts the Connection List dialog box in which you Add, Remove, and view

Details of the connection.

Debug

Prompts the Debug Controls dialog box in which you set tracing features.

Server

Prompts the Configure Server Settings dialog box.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Window Menu

The Window menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Cascade, Tile

Horizontal, Tile Vertical, Arrange icons, Split Window, (Split Window) Horizontal,

(Split Window) Vertical, and a list of currently opened files.

Cascade

Arranges all open files in a stacking sequence from the top left corner of the screen.

Tile horizontal

Fills the application window with all the open documents. Document windows are placed one on top of the other.

Tile vertical

Fills the application window with all the open documents. Document windows are placed side by side.

Arrange icons

Arranges minimized document windows into a neat row, side by side.

Split Window

Displays a submenu with two commands, Horizontal and Vertical, which split the active window or pane in half in either direction.

(Split Window) Horizontal

Splits the active window horizontally in half.

(Split Window) Vertical

Splits the active window vertically in half.

Help Menu

Provides on-line help for Qedit for Windows. The Help menu on the toolbar contains the following commands: Tip of the Day, Contents, Using Help, Scripting, Robelle

Web, (Robelle Web) Robelle Web Site, (Robelle Web) What’s New, (Robelle Web)

Scripting, (Robelle Web) E-Mail Technical Support, and About Qedit.

Tip of the Day

Prompts the Tip of the Day dialog box.

Contents

Accesses the application on-line help though the Help Topics dialog box.

Using Help

Accesses information about using on-line help.

Reference

• 199

Robelle Web

Provides easy access to Robelle resources over the Internet.

(Robelle Web) Robelle Web Site

Invokes the default Web browser and connects to Robelle’s main page.

(Robelle Web) What’s New

Invokes the default Web browser and connects to the Qedit for Windows What’s

New page.

(Robelle Web) Scripting

Invokes the default Web browser and connects to the Qedit for Windows Scripting page.

(Robelle Web) E-mail Technical Support

Allows you send an e-mail message to Robelle’s technical support staff

([email protected]).

About Qedit

Prompts the About Qedit for Windows dialog box.

Key Combinations and Functions

Control Combination Keys

To Move: Use:

Up in a file in the same line and column, line by line.

CTRL

+

↑

CTRL

+

↓

Down in a file in the same line and column, line by line.

To the preceding “start of word.”

CTRL

+ ←

To the next following “start of word.”

To the first column of the first line in a file.

CTRL

+ →

CTRL

+

HOME

To the last character in the last line of a file.

One page up in a document window, less one line.

CTRL

+

END

CTRL

+

PAGE UP

One page down in a document window, less one line

CTRL

+

PAGE

DOWN

Searching Shortcuts

To Find:

A new string in a file from your current cursor position.

Use:

CTRL

+

F

200

• Reference

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The next occurrence of a string with the same options as the last search.

The next occurrence of a string in the opposite direction of the last search.

The next occurrence of a string towards the end of the file.

The next occurrence of highlighted text from the current cursor position.

The previous occurrence of the highlighted text from the position of the last selection found.

The previous occurrence of a string towards the beginning of a file from the last cursor position.

A string and replace it with a another string.

A specific line or record number in the current file.

CTRL

+

G

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

G

CTRL

+

B

CTRL

+

H

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

H

CTRL

+

U

CTRL

+

R

CTRL

+

J

Editing Shortcuts

Copy selected text to the Clipboard.

Paste text from the Clipboard to the current cursor position.

Cut selected text to the Clipboard.

Select all text in a file.

Undo last operation

Save changes made to file.

CTRL

+

C

CTRL

+

V

CTRL

+

X

CTRL

+

A

CTRL

+

Z

CTRL

+

S

Other Shortcuts

Create a new local file.

Create a new host file.

Open an existing local file.

Open an existing host file.

Open the file name highlighted in a file.

Print the current file on a local printer.

Switch between document windows.

Switch to the previous document window.

Switch between all active applications.

Display the document control menu.

Display the application control menu.

CTRL

+

N

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

N

CTRL

+

O

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

N

CTRL

+

D

CTRL

+

P

CTRL

+

TAB

CTRL

+

SHIFT

+

TAB

ALT

+

TAB

ALT

+

HYPHEN

ALT

+

SPACEBAR

Reference

• 201

Function Keys

Display on-line Help.

Move the cursor up toward the beginning of a file.

Find the previous occurrence of a string.

Find the next occurrence of a string.

Go to the previous page.

Go to the next page.

Mark the current cursor position.

Return to the last marked position.

Close the current document window.

Switch to the next document window.

Exchange the current cursor position with the last marked position.

Select text between the current cursor position and the last marked position

Close the program and all open files.

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F11

F12

CTRL

+

F4

CTRL

+

F6

CTRL

+

F11

SHIFT

+

F12

ALT

+

F4

202

• Reference

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Troubleshooting

Overview

This chapter describes the information sources to track a problem as well as an overview of some potential areas of trouble: connecting to hosts, server problems and recovering files. As users need to access multiple computers, the issue of setting and synchronizing time zones is also discussed.

What to do in case of problems?

If you are experiencing some problems with Qedit, you can call our technical support team. In order to get a better response and faster resolution, there are certain steps you can go through before calling. These steps allow you to have as much information as possible available for the technical staff.

There are basic questions you should ask yourself:

• Is the problem reproducible?

• Is it happening on one PC in particular?

• Is it happening with one server or connection in particular?

• Has it worked before? If so, when did it start?

You should also gather information on the equipment you are using:

• What type of PC are you using?

• What type of connection are you using (modem, LAN, Internet, etc.)?

• What type of server are you connecting to (MPE, HP-UX, Windows NT, etc.)?

• What versions of the operating system(s) are you using?

Qedit provides some tools to answer some of these questions. You can use the

About Qedit command of the Help menu to see part of your PC configuration.

Troubleshooting

• 203

Qedit for Windows User Manual

About Qedit dialog box

This dialog box shows not only Qedit’s own version number and build timestamp but also information related to the Qedit license, your Windows environment,

Windows socket (TCP/IP stack) used, memory usage and display resolution.

You can select Copy to send this information to the Clipboard. You will then be able to paste it back into another application such as electronic mail software. If you prefer, you can get a hard copy by selecting Print.

If you are able to connect to a host but are having difficulty editing host files, you can get more information by using the Properties command in the File menu and displaying the Information tab.

Getting a Trace

If the problem cannot be resolved easily, technical support might request you to get trace information from Qedit. This can be done by using the Debug command in the

Options menu. This command displays the Debug Controls dialog box.

204

• Troubleshooting

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Warning

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Debug Controls dialog box

The trace options on the dialog box can be divided into two categories: local trace options and server trace options. The first option simply enables the trace feature on the server. The second option forces the server to write trace records to the host console as well as the trace file on disk. In most cases, when you have to use trace, it is better to enable all the options available for the local trace:

• Messages to host

• Messages from host

• Cache management

• Sloth management

• Raw buffers from host

• Raw buffers to host

• Editor view

• Windows control messages

Trace files can become very large, very quickly especially when working with large data files. We recommend that you leave the trace option disabled until you have a need for it.

The Comm Quality % text box should always specify 100. You have to give the trace file a name. It does not have to be in any particular directory, but we

Troubleshooting

• 205

recommend you put it in the same directory as the Qedit program. We also recommend that you use a .trc extension. Enable Force flush on every write to ensure all the trace records are posted to disk immediately.

Server Trace Files

When Enable Tracing of the Server Trace Options is checked, the server writes information to three (3) server trace files. On MPE hosts, the files are created in the Qlog group in the account where the server program resides. For example, if the server is called Qedit.Pub.Robelle, the trace files will be access.qlog.robelle

error.qlog.robelle

trace.qlog.robelle

On UNIX hosts, the trace files are located in a directory called log/qedit under the directory specified in the

ROBELLE

environment variable. See the Qedit for HP-

UX User Manual for details. For example, if the server is in

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit and the

ROBELLE

environment variable is not set, the trace files will be

/usr/robelle/log/qedit/access.log

/usr/robelle/log/qedit/error.log

/usr/robelle/log/qedit/trace.log

The server trace facility can be enabled by checking the Enable trace option of the

Server Trace Options. The facility is then activated for all connections initiated by this user.

When debugging connection problems, at a minimum, the following options should be enabled:

• Messages from host

• Messages to host

• Raw buffers from host

• Raw buffers to host

Changing Debug Settings

If you wish to change the debug settings temporarily, click the Apply button. The new settings are effective from that point but are only valid for the duration of the current Qedit for Windows instance. As soon as you quit, Qedit returns to the permanent settings. If you want the new settings to be permanent, click Save.

File Information Dialog Box

Qedit for Windows keeps track of certain information about the connection and the document you are currently working on. This information can be analyzed to identify potential problems. To view the information, select the File menu, and point to Properties. When the Properties dialog box appears, click the Information tab.

206

• Troubleshooting

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

File Information page on the File Properties dialog box

The information in this dialog box is document-specific. The dialog box above shows information about Cobol4.Pub.Demo. You can look at the details by using the scroll bar.

If you want to capture the information, you can select Copy and put all these items in the Windows Clipboard.

You can print this information by clicking on Print, which will give you the standard Windows Print dialog box.

The Clipboard and the printed document will contain additional information about

Qedit for Windows (edition, version number and build timestamp) as in this example:

Qedit 32-bit Edition Version 4.5.24 Sep 19 1997 23:03:07

Select Done to close the dialog box.

The information is divided into five (5) sections: Document, Connection,

Transmission, Server Settings, and Cache Statistics. Section headings are indented from the related details for easy reading.

Document Information

The first section provides file attributes. Details for local files differ slightly from host files. Qedit displays the fully qualified file name in both cases. For local files, this means identifying the disk drive and all directories leading to the file. For native

MPE host files, the file name appears in the <file>.<group>.<account> format. For files on HP-UX or in the POSIX name space on MPE hosts, the name is displayed in the UNIX format starting from the root directory.

Next, Qedit displays the number of lines currently in the file.

Troubleshooting

• 207

208

• Troubleshooting

Then, Qedit displays the maximum line width allowed in the file. This corresponds to the Record length parameter in the File Options dialog box.

Syntax coloring is the name of the language assigned to this file according to the corresponding language template. If the file is not associated with a template, Qedit displays "Unknown".

For host files only, Qedit displays the name of the scratch file used.

• Local file

Document:

C:\Robelle\Qedit\roman8.txt

Lines 8

Maximum Width 2045

• MPE host file

Document:

TEST1.PUB.DEMO

Lines 10

Maximum Width 80

Scratch file QED77264.PUB.DEMO

• HP-UX host file

Document:

/users/demo/test1

Lines 10

Maximum Width 1000

Scratch file /usr/tmp/qscr.CAAa22757

Connection Information

The Connection information section is only applicable to host files. Qedit displays the same pieces of information whether you are connected to an MPE or HP-UX host.

Qedit displays the Connection details used when you created this connection: the connection name, the name of the host computer and the login information.

Next, it displays some information about the server. It shows the version of the Qedit server program in use followed by the type and version of the operating system on the host.

Each child process created by the server program has its own process ID. This number is used to identify all transactions logged in the server log files. All server logfile entries related to a particular connection are identified by this process ID. It appears in square brackets on each line. For example, the following entries are for the server process 187:

Sep 22, 1997 09:31:39 [187] TRead. Length=12,KeepAlive,version=1,id=0

Sep 22, 1997 09:31:39 [187] TSent. Length=12,KeepAlive,version=1,id=0

Qedit then provides some statistics about the network traffic and the amount of information transferred since the beginning of the edit session. These statistics include the number of packets sent and received by the client and the total number of bytes transferred in these packets.

Connection:

Name Vancouver - MPE

Host Name DEV

Host User demo,mgr.demo

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Host Qedit Qedit/iX (Version 4.6.01)

Host OS MPE/iX C.55.00

Host Process ID 82

Packets Sent 3

Packets Received 4

Bytes Sent 132

Bytes Received 812

Transmission Information

The transmission section is really made up of two subsections: the Transmit Queue and Connection Response Time.

The packets sent to the server are submitted using an asynchronous scheme. This means Qedit for Windows writes outbound packets in a queue and, in most cases, does not wait for an answer from the server. Depending on the network load, these packets might temporarily remain on your PC. These packets are stored in memory in an area of limited size.

In the Transmit Queue, the queue length indicates how many packets are currently waiting for transmission. This number should change every time you look at the File

Information dialog box.

The highwater mark value indicates the highest value ever attained by the queue length.

The capacity is the absolute maximum number of packets that can be queued.

Transmit Queue:

Length 0

Highwater Mark 64

Capacity 16384

The Connection Response Time section gives some statistics on the overall performance of the network. Once every minute, Qedit sends a transaction to the host to ensure that it is still processing transactions. Because these transactions require no processing on the host, just an acknowledgment, they are the ones used to produce the response time values.

The first two items indicate the amount of time Qedit for Windows had to wait before it received an acknowledgment from the server. The Last Transaction item indicates the delay for the last acknowledgment from the host. The Longest transaction value indicates the longest wait for an acknowledgment since the connection was established. The Connection Time indicates how long you have been connected to the host computer for the connection.

Connection Response Time:

Last Transaction 449 msec

Longest transaction 449 msec

Connection Time 1 minute, 32 seconds

Server Settings

Some server settings can be customized using the configuration files residing on the host. On an MPE host, there is Qeditmgr.Pub.Sys and

Qeditmgr.Pub.Robelle plus any other optional configuration file enabled in the Configure Server Settings dialog box. On HP-UX, the system configuration file is called /opt/robelle/qeditmgr and the user configuration file is

Troubleshooting

• 209

210

• Troubleshooting

.qeditmgr in the user's home directory. This section describes the settings for this particular connection.

Server settings:

Tabs

COBOL Tag

Show tags

Every 10 columns

ME970924

Yes

Fixed-length Cobol No

Cache Statistics

Qedit for Windows uses a memory cache to store lines from host files. The goal is to have enough lines readily available on the PC so that the response time is not severely affected by slow connections.

Similar to host files, local files are not fully loaded into memory. Qedit just reads the records as they are needed.

This section can have two parts: Cache Statistics and Cache Requests. The statistics show both types of files. The Cache Requests subsection only applies to host files.

The Cache Statistics subsection shows the number of bytes that are actually data from the file (i.e., text that you can see on your document window and that can be edited).

Of course, Qedit needs to manage all this information and must keep some information on the structure of the cache. The space required to store this information is shown as Overhead.

Next, Qedit shows the number of individual lines that are represented by the Data bytes. It also shows how much of the cache space is actually used by all this.

The cache is not monolithic. It is actually made of smaller blocks, each containing a certain number of lines. Qedit displays the number of blocks currently in use. Some blocks might be locked. This happens when Qedit is waiting for a response from the host that involves lines in a block.

Because the cache is a critical component of Qedit, it has to ensure that everything in it is sound. On a regular basis, Qedit goes out and checks the integrity of the cache structure.

Cache Statistics:

Data 14995 Bytes

Overhead 3640 Bytes

Lines 361

Cache Full 75%

Blocks 8

Blocks Locked 0

Integrity Calls 385

For local files, everything is done by the client program. For host files, the client has to request lines from the server. Thus, the client issues some requests and also counts the number of cache entries received in response. The last item shows the number of requests that have not been satisfied yet by the server.

Cache Requests:

Issued 14

Received 74

Outstanding 0

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Connection Problems

MPE Host Connections

In order to open a file on an MPE host, Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps.

1. Qedit for Windows needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box. If there is a Domain Name Server (DNS) configured on your PC, a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address.

Most PCs come with a program called ping. It allows the testing of connections to other machines on the network. You can use it to make sure DNS is configured correctly and that the host name is reachable from your location. If you cannot use the host name, you can also try the exact IP address, if you know it.

2. When you start a new Qedit for Windows session, there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option.

Upon opening the first file, Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host.

By default, it uses the Remote Process Management (RPM) feature of MPE/iX.

RPM comes standard in MPE/iX 5.0 or later. If you are running earlier versions of MPE/iX, you have to purchase the NS/3000 product.

If your company uses firewalls and other network security devices, the RPM protocol might not work. If some of your connections require Qedit's firewall

protocol, refer to "Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections" on page 213 or the

appropriate host-based Qedit manual for complete server installation instructions.

3. Qedit sends the login information (Jobname, User.Account, Group) and passwords, if any. RPM validates this information and returns a confirmation message. If there is an error, RPM returns a generic error message. It does not provide any hints as to the cause.

If the login information is complete, RPM initiates a new programmatic session on the HP e3000. These sessions, however, are not identical to interactive sessions initiated on terminals. RPM sessions do not count against the system’s user license, and logon UDCs are not executed.

If you are using Security/3000 from VESOFT and you want to implement the same level of security for network logons, you need to run a job called Backg at all times. Please refer to Security/3000’s documentation for more details.

Qedit for Windows works with Security/3000 as long as you are using passwords for job names, users, accounts and/or groups. Dynamic password prompting is not supported. You cannot send messages using MPE’s Tell command either.

FTP's implementation on MPE also uses RPM as a login mechanism. If you have difficulty connecting with Qedit for Windows, you should try to establish an ftp connection. If the same problem occurs with ftp, you should focus your attention on the HP3000 security settings. If ftp works, the problem lies between the Qedit client and server.

4. Qedit tries to determine the PC’s IP address. The method used is the same as the standard method on UNIX. It relies on calling routines named gethostname and

gethostbyname in order to translate the PC node name to a number.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting

• 211

If you are using a trial version, the MPE Server

Name should be

Qedit.Pubtri.Robelle.

The IP address is typically a fixed value for a given PC. However, if you are connecting via an ISP or some dial-in equipment, the IP address might change on every connection. Qedit will re-assess the IP address every time it tries to establish a new connection.

5. Next, Qedit runs an instance of MPE’s command interpreter (CI), Ci.Pub.Sys. It passes a command to the CI so that the Qedit server program gets started.

The server program name is determined by the Server command in the

Options menu. The default name is Qedit.Pub.Robelle. This is where hostbased Qedit is usually installed.

212

• Troubleshooting

Configure Server Settings dialog box

If the connection process seems to hang at the “Waiting for server” message, make sure you have configured the right MPE Server Name and check the host to make sure the program actually resides at that location.

The server program receives information via an Info= <string>. The -d argument is used to pass the IP address of the PC and the connecting port number. This information is passed as a hexadecimal value, which will look like this:

-d0x1A2B3C4D5E6F

The first eight characters represent the IP address where 2 characters are used for each part of the address. In this example, the IP address would be

26.43.60.77:

$1A = 26

$2B = 43

$3C = 60

$4D = 77

The port number is assigned by Winsock from the pool of available ports on the

PC, and changes from session to session. The port number is represented by the last four characters of the argument. In this example, it is:

$5E6F = 24175

Depending on options selected in the Debug Controls dialog box of the

Options menu, other parameters will be passed to the CI process.

6. At this point, Qedit for Windows turns itself into a daemon and waits for confirmation from the server.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug

Controls dialog box.

If you are using a trial version, the server name is

Qedit.Pubtri.Robelle thus the log files will be in

Qlogtri.Robelle.

7. On the host, the server initializes its environment. One of the first things it does is open the log files. If it cannot open them, it prints a message on the console and terminates.

These log files are used for keeping track of the server activities and, optionally, recording additional events for debugging purposes.

On MPE hosts, the log files are created in a group called Qlog which is in the same account as the server program. For example, if the MPE Server Name in the Configure Server Settings dialog box is Qedit.Pub.Robelle, the log files will be in the group Qlog.Robelle. The log files are called Error, Access and

Trace.

8. The server tries to open an outbound link on the port number specified in the -d parameter, back to the originator’s IP address.

If the outbound link cannot be established, the server writes error messages to the log files and terminates. Use NSCONTROL STATUS to ensure the RPM and RPML services are running on the host. Because the outbound port number is assigned on the PC and the number changes for every connection, you might run into problems if you are using a firewall at your site. You might have to reconfigure your firewall to allow the use of these ports. Unfortunately, there is no easy way to determine in advance what these port numbers will be.

9. If the link is established, the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client.

Firewall Protocol on MPE Connections

The firewall protocol on HP e3000 hosts borrows traits from the RPM protocol and the HP-UX server protocol. RPM is part of the MPE operating system and, as such, is mostly transparent. If you use the firewall protocol, you have to manually run the

Qedit server in a special mode. It replaces part of the RPM process and takes care of managing incoming connection requests.

In order to open a file on an HP e3000 host running with the firewall protocol, Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps.

1. You have to start the Qedit main server process on the host. For detailed installation instructions, refer to the Qedit for MPE User Manual.

Start the server program with the -d argument.

run qedit.pub.robelle;info="-d 7395"

Note that a space is required between the argument name, "-d" and the port number, "7395". The number besides the argument is the port number where incoming Qedit for Windows connection requests are sent to. The main server process is listening for requests on that port.

Typically, this is done inside a job stream that runs continuously. You can find a sample stream in Qserver.Qeditjob.Robelle on the host. If the job is not running, new connections cannot be established.

2. The server then initializes its environment. One of the first things it does is open the log files. If it cannot open them, it prints a message on the console and terminates.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting

• 213

Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug

Controls dialog box.

If you are using a trial version, the server name is

Qedit.Pubtri.Robelle thus the log files will be in

Qlogtri.Robelle

These log files are used to keep track of the server activities and, optionally, record additional events for debugging purposes.

On MPE hosts, the log files are created in a group called Qlog which is in the same account as the server program. For example, if the MPE Server Name in the Configure Server Settings dialog box is Qedit.Pub.Robelle, the log files will be in the group Qlog.Robelle. The log files are called Error, Access and

Trace.

3. When trying to establish a connection, Qedit for Windows needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box. If there is a Domain Name Server (DNS) configured on your PC, a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address.

Most PCs come with a program called ping, which can test connections to other machines on the network. You can use it to make sure the DNS is configured correctly and the host name can be reached from your location. If you cannot use the host name, you can also try the exact IP address, if you know it.

4. When you start a new Qedit for Windows session, there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option.

Upon opening the first file, Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host.

It tries to open a connection on port number 7395. The main server program should be listening on that port, whose number has been reserved for Qedit’s sole use.

You can check the configured value by using the Server command in the

Options menu. Remember that the port number must match the number used by the server process on the host.

214

• Troubleshooting

Configure Server Settings dialog box

You can use the telnet command with the host name and port number to make sure the main server is running. Just type telnet hostname 7395

If you get the following message, the server is not running at all or is using a different port number:

Trying...

telnet: Unable to connect to remote host:

Connection refused

Qedit for Windows User Manual

If you are using a trial version, the MPE Server

Name should be

Qedit.Pubtri.Robelle.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

However, if you get a dialog box similar to this, and you press the carriage return key a few times, there is a very good chance the main server is active:

Trying...

Connected to prodmpe.robelle.com.

Escape character is '^]'. <cr>

<cr>

07B<cr>

<cr>

A<cr>

Connection closed by foreign host.

5. The local node name must be configured correctly on the host. The node name must appear in the Local HP 3000 Node Name field on the Config entry screen and also in the Local Domain Name field on the NS Configuration screen. You must be able to run the NMMGR network configuration program on the HP e3000 to check (and modify) these values.

6. Qedit sends the login information (Jobname, User.Account, Group) and passwords, if any. The client socket number is also passed in the transaction.

7. The main server gathers the connection information and invokes RPM. RPM takes over from that point.

8. RPM validates this information and returns a confirmation message. If there is an error, RPM returns a generic error message. It does not provide any hints as to the cause.

If the login information is complete, RPM initiates a new programmatic session on the HP e3000. These sessions, however, are not identical to interactive sessions initiated on terminals. These sessions do not count against the system’s user license, and logon UDCs are not executed.

If you are using Security/3000 from VESOFT and you want to implement the same level of security for network logons, you need to run a job called Backg at all times. Please refer to Security/3000’s documentation for more details.

Qedit for Windows works with Security/3000 as long as you are using passwords for job names, users, accounts and/or groups. Dynamic password prompting is not supported. You cannot send messages using MPE’s Tell command either.

FTP's implementation on MPE also uses RPM as a login mechanism. If you have difficulty connecting with Qedit for Windows, you should try to establish an ftp connection. If the same problem occurs with ftp, you should focus your attention on the HP3000 security settings. If ftp works, the problem lies between the Qedit client and server.

9. Next, RPM runs an instance of MPE’s command interpreter, Ci.Pub.Sys. It passes a command to the CI so that the Qedit server program gets started.

The server program name is determined by the Server command in the

Options menu. The default name is Qedit.Pub.Robelle. This is where hostbased Qedit is usually installed.

You have to make sure the Qedit server name in the Configure Server

Settings dialog box is the same as the one used to start the main server. This ensures you are running the same version of the server.

10. If the connection is established, the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client.

Troubleshooting

• 215

Server debugging mode can be enabled in the Debug

Controls dialog box.

HP-UX Host Connections

In order to open a file on an HP 9000 host, Qedit for Windows must go through a number of steps.

1. You have to start the Qedit for HP-UX server on the host. For detailed instructions, refer to the Qedit for HP-UX User Manual.

• Log in as root.

• If you have installed Qedit in a directory other than the default /usr/robelle, you have to set the

ROBELLE

environment variable with the actual install directory.

ROBELLE=/users/apps

You also need to export the variable.

export ROBELLE

• Start the server program with the -d argument.

/opt/robelle/bin/qedit -d

2. The server then initializes its environment. One of the first things it does is open the log files. If it cannot open them, it prints a message on the console and terminates.

These log files are used to keep track of the server activities and, optionally, record additional events for debugging purposes.

By default on HP-UX hosts, the log files are created in a directory called log/qedit, which is under the main Robelle directory. For example, if the server program is in /opt/robelle/bin, the log files will be in the /opt/robelle/log/qedit directory. The log files themselves are called error.log, access.log and trace.log.

If you have set the

ROBELLE

environment variable, the log files will be created in the specified directory. You have to ensure the new location has the same structure as the original /opt/robelle.

3. Qedit for Windows needs to resolve the host name or IP address you entered in the Connection List dialog box. If there is a Domain Name Server (DNS) configured on your PC, a host name is automatically converted to its corresponding IP address.

Most PCs come with a program called ping, which can test connections to other machines on the network. You can use it to make sure the DNS is configured correctly and the host name can be reached from your location. If you cannot use the host name, you can also try the exact IP address, if you know it.

4. When you start a new Qedit for Windows session, there is no connection unless one or more connections are configured with the Login at startup option.

Upon opening the first file, Qedit for Windows must establish a link to the host.

It tries to open a connection on port number 7395. The server program should be listening on that port, whose number has been reserved for Qedit’s sole use.

You can check the configured value by using the Server command in the

Options menu. Remember that the port number must match the number used by the server process on the host.

216

• Troubleshooting

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Configure Server Settings dialog box

You can use the telnet command with the host name and port number to make sure the main server is running. Just type telnet hostname 7395

If you get the following message, the server is not running at all or is using a different port number:

Trying...

telnet: Unable to connect to remote host:

Connection refused

However, if you get a dialog box similar to this, and you press the carriage return key a few times, there is a very good chance the main server is active:

Trying...

Connected to produx.robelle.com.

Escape character is '^]'. <cr>

<cr>

07B<cr>

<cr>

A<cr>

Connection closed by foreign host.

5. The main Qedit for HP-UX server then uses fork to create another Qedit for HP-

UX child process.

6. Once a connection is made between the Qedit client and the Qedit server program, the client sends a login transaction to the host. This information is validated against the host /etc/passwd file. If there is an error, a message is sent to the client and written to the log files. The child process then terminates.

7. If the login information is correct, the server process changes its user id and group id to the ones that correspond to the user name defined in the connection.

8. Using a cd command, the server then goes to the home directory for that user as defined in the /etc/passwd file.

9. The server picks up a lot of information from the /etc/passwd file, but it does not run the default shell and does not set any of your default environment variables such as

PATH

,

TERM

, etc.

10. If the link is established, the file is opened and data is transferred between the server and the client.

Troubleshooting

• 217

Connection Progress Messages

When the user instructs Qedit to log on to a host by opening a file on an unused connection or connecting with the Login at startup option enabled, Qedit for

Windows begins a multistep operation to complete the request. Each of the steps is accompanied by a progress message in the Login dialog box.

218

• Troubleshooting

Login dialog box

The progress messages are designed to be friendly to the user, but as a result are not as explicit to a support engineer. In addition, if any step fails, Qedit for Windows issues a user-friendly message rather than a technical one. Here is the meaning of the user-friendly messages, translated into technical terms:

• Finding address for <hostname>.

Qedit for Windows has issued a DNS request to resolve the host name. This message will not appear if the user has specified an IP address.

• Connecting to <hostname>.

Qedit for Windows has issued a TCP connection request to the host. For an

MPE login, Qedit for Windows requests a connection to the RPM server; for a

UNIX login, Qedit for Windows connects directly to the Qedit for HP-UX server.

• Logging in...

(UNIX only.) The connection is up and Qedit for Windows is sending the login transaction. This message might be flashed too briefly to see.

• Awaiting welcome...

(UNIX only.) Qedit for Windows has sent the login transaction and is waiting for the server’s response. When the response arrives, the login transaction is complete (though the login attempt might have been rejected).

• Logging in and starting server...

(MPE only.) The connection to the RPM server is up and Qedit for Windows has sent the RPM request. The RPM request contains both the login parameters and the name of the program to run, hence the message covering both. Qedit for

Windows is now waiting for a response from the RPM server.

• Logged in. Waiting for server response...

Qedit for Windows User Manual

(MPE only.) The RPM server has responded that the login and process start were successful. Qedit for Windows is now waiting for the new server process to connect to it. On MPE, the server initiates a connection to the client, rather than the other way around.

• Login Failure Messages

When the login process fails due to a user error (e.g., an incorrect password), the message should be self-explanatory. However, login failures due to network problems cause Qedit to generate a user-friendly message. The message is of the form “Unable to... because...” where the first ellipsis is replaced by the action that failed and the second is replaced by a translation of the error code that

Qedit received. Because these messages indicate a low-level technical problem, they are difficult to document. You should get assistance from our technical support staff to get these resolved. Here are some examples of login failure messages:

• Unable to obtain a socket because...

• Unable to set up receive connection because...

• Unable to set up the connection because...

• Connection failed because...

• Unable to obtain resources for an MPE Login because...

• Unable to start MPE server because a problem occurred.

• Unable to complete login because...

• Unable to start communication because...

• Login failed because...

Recovering a File

Recovering Temporary Host Files

When working on host files, Qedit creates a temporary holding area called a scratch file. These scratch files, which are Qedit workfiles, write all the changes you make to disc almost immediately. These files are temporary in the sense that they will be purged when the connection is closed normally. If the connection closes abnormally, these files still exist on the host computer. These combined features provide a recovery mechanism if a connection failure occurs.

Recovering a File on MPE Hosts

On MPE hosts, scratch files are called QED##### where the number signs represent a 5-digit random number (e.g., QED24070). They are created in the logon group for the connection used at the time. To recover your latest changes,

1. Go to the Directory window for the connection you were using.

2. Look for Qedit scratch files (QED#####).

3. If there is more than one scratch file, look at the Last Modified column and find the one that is more likely to be yours (today’s date and time). There will be more than one if there are other users connecting with the same logon ID (group and account).

Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting

• 219

220

• Troubleshooting

NOTE: The Directory window you are looking at is also stored in a Qedit scratch file. Make sure you select the right one. If you select the directory scratch file, you will likely get an open error.

4. Open the file. Qedit automatically performs an internal recovery process. You should then have the text you were working on.

If the Qedit client aborted, it is possible that you will not be able to open the file immediately. That's because the server uses an internal timeout of 5 minutes before it assumes there is a problem with the connection. So, for the timeout duration, scratch files and Qedit workfiles remain open and cannot be accessed.

5. If the text is yours and in good shape, perform a Save as command. Because this is a Qedit workfile, the server simply renames it from QED##### to whatever name you assign. The new file is still a Qedit workfile. If you want to save it as a regular file, you should open a copy of the original workfile and then do a Save as command.

6. Once you are sure that you have recovered everything, you can delete the scratch file.

Recovering a File on HP-UX Hosts

On HP-UX hosts, scratch files are created in your environment temporary directory.

The temporary directory is usually defined with the

TMPDIR

environment variable.

If you do not know what it is, you might have to ask your system administrator or connect using a terminal and type:

$ echo $TMPDIR

/usr/tmp

In this example, the environment temporary directory is /usr/tmp. The scratch files are called qscr.????????? where the question marks can be mixed case letters and numbers (e.g., qscr.CAAa24070).

1. Go to the Directory dialog box for the connection you were using.

2. Go to your environment temporary directory. You can navigate by doubleclicking the appropriate entries in the directory listing or you can go directly to it by entering the directory name (e.g., /usr/tmp/) in the file name text box and selecting Open.

3. Look for Qedit scratch files (qscr.?????????).

4. On most systems, all the users share the same environment temporary directory so there will likely be more than one scratch file. Look at the Last Modified column and find the one that is more likely to be yours (today’s date and time).

NOTE: The Directory window you are looking at is also stored in a Qedit scratch file. Make sure you select the right one. If you select the directory scratch file, you will not get an error but the contents will be almost unreadable.

5. Open the file. Qedit will automatically perform an internal recovery process.

You should then have the text you were working on.

6. If the text is yours and in good shape, perform a Save as command.

7. Once you are sure you have recovered everything, you can delete the scratch file.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Local Files Operation

When you open a local file for editing, Qedit reads the entire file. This is done for two reasons:

1. To count the number of lines

2. To create an internal table of line pointers into the original file. This table requires 16 bytes per line in the file.

Qedit keeps track of both the number of bytes in the file and the number of lines in the file. Due to internal constraints, the maximum size for a local file is:

1. Four billion characters or about 4 GB (2**32).

2. With up to 2 billion lines (2**31 - 1).

The file is read in 20,480-byte chunks. The number of lines is used to move the scroll box to the appropriate location in relation the file size. If the scroll box is about ¾ of the way down the scroll bar, the displayed lines are really about ¾ of the way down the file. Other editors use the number of characters to position the scroll box, which might not be correct if you have very short or very long lines.

Changes that you make to the file are retained in memory. A global change that affected every line in a 2-GB file would not fit in memory. In this case, Qedit shows a warning to let you terminate, possibly without saving your changes. This is a function of the virtual memory emergency code in Qedit and not anything to do with local editing per se.

When you save your changes, the following takes place:

1. Qedit creates a temporary file on the same drive and in the same directory as the original file with the name QSnnnnnn.tmp, where nnnnnn is replaced with a random number.

2. The changes made are merged with the original file to create a new copy. This is similar to performing a Text and Keep command in host-based Qedit. Even if a single line was changed, the entire original file must be copied.

3. The original file is purged.

4. The temporary file is renamed as the original file.

Time Zones

Qedit for Windows User Manual

You pull up your home group for the development HP e3000 and you notice that the modify date for a file you know you changed ten minutes ago is way off—4 hours later, in fact. What has gone wrong?

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT/UTC) is the answer!

Client/server applications, including Qedit for Windows, use GMT to record times.

This is the time in Greenwich, England, ignoring Daylight Saving Time, and is considered zero (0). New York is normally at GMT-5, Los Angeles is at GMT-8.

Paris and Berlin are at GMT+1 and Athens is at GMT+2.

For a map showing the whole thing, go to this Web site: http://wwwcrasys.anu.edu.au/reference/world.timezones.html

If all network timestamps are in GMT, how does your computer tell you the actual local time when something happened?

Troubleshooting

• 221

Does each computer have to know what time zone it is in?

This is done by setting a TZ variable on the host computer. UNIX does this automatically when it boots up (although it can still be wrong!), while MPE must do it manually for each user.

Consider this recent case and try to figure out what went wrong. A file called

Quality in a home group on an MPE system in Western Canada looked like this:

:listf quality,3

...

NUM LABELS: 2 CREATED : FRI, AUG 6, 1993, 9:26 AM

MAX LABELS: 2 MODIFIED: SAT, SEP 20, 1997, 8:08 AM

DISC DEV #: 1 ACCESSED: SAT, SEP 20, 1997, 8:08 AM

But in Anguilla in the Caribbean, which is 3 hours ahead of Vancouver at this time of year, the modification time in a Qedit directory box should have been 11:08

A

.

M

.

When the modify time was checked by running Qedit and opening the group listing, it showed 4:08

P

.

M

. on the same day. The difference was four hours.

The value of the TZ variable was checked on the Vancouver machine.

:showvar TZ

TZ = PST8

PST means Pacific Standard Time (GMT-8), which can be checked in the main pages on the UNIX system.

When the time on the Vancouver system was checked, it looked correct:

:showtime

THU, SEP 25, 1997, 10:19 AM

When the clock on the Anguilla PC (Windows NT 3.51) was checked, it also showed the correct local time. Although Windows 95 doesn’t have a clock program, it does show the time at the right edge of the taskbar.

What else is there to check?

The time zone configuration on the Anguilla PC was checked. In Windows NT 3.51, the Date/Time was checked on the Control Panel program group.

222

• Troubleshooting

Windows NT 3.51 Control Panel program group

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The Date/Time showed that the Anguilla PC was set to Greenwich England, or some place in that time zone!

Windows NT 3.51 Date/Time control panel settings

The time zone had to be adjusted to Atlantic Time (Canada). The automatic adjustment had to be disabled for Daylight Saving Time, because Anguilla never goes on Daylight Saving Time.

To check the file’s modified time, Qedit was started again. The modify time now showed 12:08

P

.

M

. This was closer, but it was still one hour off. It should have been

11:08

A

.

M

. Perhaps the problem was that the TZ variable on the Vancouver host was set to PST8 instead of PDT7. How can the TZ variable be checked?

How can the variable be set for the MPE Qedit server?

Put this command in your Qeditmgr.Pub.Robelle file: setvar TZ "PST8"

UNIX options specifying Daylight Saving Time

To check the Qedit modification times on the UNIX server in Vancouver, telnet was used to access the West Coast UNIX system and touch was used to update the timestamp of the file. Then the file was listed in the UNIX shell:

/users/ralph $ ll canada

-rw-rw-rw- 1 ralph users 7301 Sep 25 10:38 canada

A 10:38

A

.

M

modification time in Vancouver is 1:38

P

.

M

.

in Anguilla. Just for thoroughness, the time zone variable and the current time on the UNIX system were also checked:

/users/ralph $ echo $TZ

PST8PDT

/users/bobgreen $ date

Thu Sep 25 10:45:42 PDT 1997

Now the time was correct and showed that it was PDT. The TZ variable was a little different from the MPE system. It seemed to be saying that the time zone is GMT-8, but the system also recognizes Pacific Daylight Time.

Troubleshooting

• 223

Directory dialog box for the HP-UX host in Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada

As you can see, the Last Modified time for the canada file was 1:38

P

.

M

.

, which is what was expected.

Checking the Time Zone on Windows 95

To set the time zone on Windows 95, select the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. When the Control Panel program group appears, click the

Date/Time icon. Go to the Time Zone tab.

224

• Troubleshooting

Windows 95 Date/Time control panel

Qedit for Windows User Manual

The Windows 95 PC above seems to have the correct time zone and is not adjusting for Daylight Saving Time. In the USA and Canada, anyone who lives outside of

Central Standard Time will need to enable this option.

Document Database Recovery

Qedit for Windows stores information about each file in a document database called

QWINDDB

.

DAT

. Under some circumstances, the document database may become corrupt. If this ever happens, Qedit for Windows will not be able to start. Starting with version 5.4.12, Qedit asks the user for a course of action.

One of the first things Qedit does when it starts up is open the document database and load its contents. If the procedure succeeds, the current document database is copied to

QWINDDB

.

BKP

. An error message like the one below is displayed if the procedure detects a problem.

Document database problem error

You should write down the exact error message. Click OK to proceed with the next step. Qedit then prompts for an action to take.

When the Delete option is selected, all file information previously stored is lost.

Document database recovery options

Whichever option you chose, Qedit makes a copy of the bad document database to

QWINDDB

.

DAT

.

BAD

. The Restore option is enabled only if there's a backup copy available. Select Delete to get rid of the current document database and start with a new one.

Select Restore to return to the last known valid database. Qedit copies qwinddb.bkp back to qwinddb.dat and tries to load it. If this fails again, an error message is displayed and the document database is erased.

In any case, you should report the problem to Robelle technical support with the exact error message and, if at all possible, send the bad document database along for further analysis.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Troubleshooting

• 225

Error Messages

From time to time, Qedit needs to let you know that something is not working quite right. As much as possible, you will only see a message box with a short message describing the problem as accurately as possible. There are two types of messages: warning and fatal. Each type is identified by an icon appearing in the message box.

Qedit always checks internal structures to make sure nothing is wrong. If it ever finds something unexpected, Qedit displays an error message and aborts. This might sound drastic but it is the only way to prevent further damage.

Fatal error

Informative or warning message

From time to time, Qedit also displays messages to show informative text or less serious errors. Typically, these messages inform the user about the success or failure of an edit operation. These messages are just warnings because there is no threat to the physical integrity of the file.

Here are some of the messages that you might encounter:

• Cannot continue editing on connection <connection name> because the host reset the connection. The host process identifier for this connection was <pid>.

Qedit detected a problem with the connection to the host. The server is not acknowledging transactions anymore. The Process Identification number (PID) can be used to search through the server log files when trying to determine the cause of the problem.

• Error deleting a local file—permission denied.

You are trying to save a local file that has been opened as Read Only by another application or in another window in Qedit.

• Login: Invalid user or password.

The user name or password entered on an HP-UX connection is incorrect.

• Login: Unable to change directory.

Qedit could not switch to the directory you specified in the Initial directory text box in the Connection List dialog box.

• System command failed. (Server error 37)

The server has tried to execute an operating system command but the command failed. You might receive this message if you have tried to open an invalid directory name from the Directory window.

• The host file has been modified by another user. (Server Error 46)

This message appears when you try to do a Save on a host file. It means the file you are editing has been modified since you opened it or the last time you saved it.

226

• Troubleshooting

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

You should try to find who has modified the file so you do not lose someone else's changes. You can also try to find what has changed. You can save your copy of the file with a different name and then compare it with the copy on the host. Host-based Qedit comes with a program called Compare which lists differences between 2 files. Look at the output and determine if the differences are valid.

If you want to force Qedit to save the file anyway, you can disable the

Compare timestamps before overwriting on server option in the

Preferences dialog box or use the Save as command and enter the original file name. Remember that changing the Preferences option will be applied to all your files after that.

• The resulting line would be too long.

The edit operation you are trying to perform would cause the current line to exceed the defined maximum length of the file. This message often appears if you try to combine two lines by deleting the end-of-line character or paste some text from the Clipboard.

• The server file is full. (Server error 38)

Unlike local files, files on MPE hosts can have a preset limit thus you cannot add new text indefinitely. One way to get around this error is to

1. Close the file.

2. Open the same file using Open a copy.

3. Open the File menu and select Save as.

4. Type the original file name in the File name text box.

5. Select Save as Qedit workfile.

6. Click Save.

• WinHelp cannot find the Help file. A newer version of help is needed.

Make sure you have the correct Help files for the version of Qedit you are using.

Typically, you get this error if you have the 16-bit Help file while using the 32bit Qedit program or vice-versa.

• Unable to complete login: the host refused the connection.

The Qedit for HP-UX server program is not running or you have configured a different port number.

• Unable to find address for <hostname>.

Qedit for Windows was unable to get the IP address for the specified host.

• Unable to open <file name> on <connection>.

The server is not able to open the file on the connection. In some cases, Qedit displays additional information on the cause of the problem. For example,

NONEXISTENT PERMANENT FILE (FSERR 52) can appear. If you are trying to open a Qedit workfile that is already being accessed, you might not get an explanation. Make sure the file exists and is accessible from a terminal using host-based Qedit.

• Unable to start MPE server because the supplied login was not valid.

This message is displayed when RPM cannot initiate a new session. RPM returns a generic error code. Qedit cannot establish the exact cause of the

Troubleshooting

• 227

problem. Anything that can prevent a session from starting will return this error.

Some possible causes include:

• the login information (user, group, account) in the connection is incorrect

• one of the passwords in the connection is invalid

• the session limit on the host is too low

• the string entered in the Hello text box does not have the right syntax

• An RPM error on the host during login (server error 75)

This message is displayed when RPM cannot initiate a new session on an MPE connection using the Firewall protocol. Check the Hello string for that connection and make sure all passwords are correctly entered.

228

• Troubleshooting

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Appendix A - Earlier Highlights

Overview

Here are some of the changes and enhancements made in earlier versions of Qedit for Windows.

There are no pre-release versions at this point.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix A - Earlier Highlights

• 229

Appendix B - File Types

File Codes and Mnemonics

The Directory dialog box can display a file type when working with an MPE host.

The file types are short mnemonics that are somewhat easier to understand than numbers. The following table shows the MPE file codes, the mnemonic associated with each code and a short description of the type. The information in the table is based on a list of known codes graciously provided by Stan Sieler of Allegro

Consultants Inc.

MPE already uses mnemonics to identify file types. These standard mnemonics appear in uppercase in the table.

MPE allows user-defined file codes. Different mnemonics have been assigned to these codes. These mnemonics appear with mixed-case or all lowercase characters.

File code Mnemonic Usage

-21074 vt

-16976 vt

-7652 tdir

-1234 emlg

-999 oddf

-995 oddb

-993 oddd

-893 oracl

-601 tmles

-516 aif

-497 lflf

-493 ptpt

-491 dbe

-451 daalf

-450 dausf

-431 atc

-430 tc

RoadRunner virtual tape file (priv)

BackPack virtual tape file

ORBiT Backup+ tape directory saved to disk

MPE V Memory log (MEMLOG.PUB.SYS)

ORBiT Backup+ disk-to-disk file

ORBiT Backup+ disk-to-disk backup

ORBiT Backup+ disk-to-disk directory

Oracle file?

TEACHME/3000

AIFKUF.PUB.SYS

ALLBASE (DBCORE) Logfile

DBCORE Chunkset

DBCORE database environment

Created by NETUTIL ??

DAUSF is the NETUsers config info

ATC file links ALLBASE DBE to TurboIMAGE root

TC file links TurboIMAGE root to ALLBASE DBE

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix B - File Types

• 231

232

• Appendix B - File Types

-401 idset

-400 iroot

-300 hpdr

-296 sg01

-103 hbbs

-102 hpdp

-101 hpdf

-100 hpdm

-73 hbull

-60 hlist

-50 hwork

-40 hfcab

-30 hpend

-20 houtt

-12 dmcf

-10 hint

-421 chgcf

-420 irecv

-412 iidx

-411 itpid

-410 itpir

-409 icdf

-408 iccf

-407 igtx

-406 idrb0

-405 iglob

-404 ilr

-403 idump

-402 irdba

8 adasc

72 uhaul

99 hroli

111 Qedit

171 ves01

172 ves02

173 ves03

176 ves04

296 sg02

341 lzcsl

430 dx430

431 dx431

432 dx432

DBCHANGE control file

DBRECOV restart file

TurboIMAGE .idx file

TurboIMAGE TPU "data" file

TurboIMAGE TPI "root" file

TurboIMAGE Jumbo chunk data file

TurboIMAGE Jumbo chunk control file

TurboIMAGE GTX file

TurboIMAGE DRB'00 file

TurboIMAGE control block file

TurboIMAGE intrinsic level recovery

TurboIMAGE i-file and j-file

TurboIMAGE remote database access

TurboIMAGE dataset

TurboIMAGE root

HPDESK: REPLY

FYIMAIL, ONESTOP

HPDESK: Bulletin Board

HPDESK: PACKAGE

HPDESK: FOLDER

HPDESK: MESSAGE

HPDESK: BULLETIN AREA

HPDESK: LIST AREA

HPDESK: WORK AREA

HPDESK: FILING CABINET

HPDESK: PENDING TRAY

HPDESK: OUT TRAY

Unison: DiscMaster compressed file

HPDESK: IN TRAY

Adager Schema file

UHAUL utility

HPDESK: Route List

Qedit workfile

VESOFT

VESOFT

VESOFT

VESOFT

FYIMAIL

Interex CSL's LS program

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

647 c647

648 c648

649 c649

650 c650

651 c651

652 c652

654 c654

655 c655

665 lzw

667 clib

700 bt700

701 bt701

702 bt702

703 bt703

704 bt704

707 quark

709 bt709

433 dx433

434 dxpc

435 dxmc

436 dxfc

437 dxct

438 dxdc

439 dxup

440 dxsub

441 dx441

442 dx442

443 dx443

444 dx444

445 dx445

446 dx446

447 dx447

448 dx448

449 dx449

634 hibsv

640 c640

641 c641

642 c642

643 c643

645 c645

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: Procedure catalog

DataExpress: message catalog

DataExpress: file definition

DataExpress: catalog transfer

DataExpress: dataview catalog

DataExpress: user profile catalog

DataExpress: dataexpress subfile

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

DataExpress: reserved

HiBack save files

Cognos: QDD compiled dictionary file

Cognos: QUICK compiled screen file

Cognos: QUIZ compiled report file

Cognos: QTP compiled run file

Cognos: 3.02 or 4.00 QKGO execution-time parameters file

Cognos: portable subfile minidictionary

Cognos: portable subfile datafile

Cognos: interim minidictionary created by QUIZ or

QTP

Cognos: QKGO execution-time parameters file

Cognos: temporary sort file for QUIZ or QTP

Cognos: compiled minidictionary file

Cognos: QUICK debugger symbol file

Cognos: compiled PDL dictionary file

Telamon: LZW program

Contributed library compacted file

Boeing: mailbox

Boeing: jobqutil data

Boeing: maildata (forward facility of mail)

Boeing: letter "SAVE"

Boeing: post text

Quest archiver squished file

Boeing: mailbox/mail

Appendix B - File Types

• 233

234

• Appendix B - File Types

802 bt802

803 bt803

804 bt804

810 bt810

811 bt811

812 bt812

813 bt813

814 bt814

815 bt815

816 bt816

817 bt817

820 bt820

821 bt821

822 bt822

823 bt823

824 bt824

711 squi1

712 bt712

719 bt719

724 bt724

729 bt729

730 bt730

747 bt747

757 squi2

777 pack

780 bt780

781 bt781

790 bt790

801 bt801

825 bt825

826 bt826

827 bt827

828 bt828

829 bt829

830 bt830

831 bt831

832 bt832

839 bt839

840 bt840

841 bt841

850 bt850

860 bt860

Boeing: Squished

Boeing: squish scratch

Boeing: squisher

Boeing: list program output

Boeing: listd output

Boeing: errors output

Boeing: scopy

Boeing: new squished file

SolutionSoft: Compression Storage Manager

Boeing: folder data

Boeing: folder output

Boeing: document output (doc)

Boeing: director parameter

Boeing: director log

Boeing: report date file

Boeing: idlejob command

Boeing: remote punch input spool

Boeing: remote punch output spool

Boeing: remote punch status

Boeing: remote punch orders

Boeing: reserved for remote punch

Boeing: reserved for remote punch

Boeing: reserved for remote punch

Boeing: reserved for remote punch

Boeing: hogs user data summary (keep)

Boeing: hogs output

Boeing: log file directory

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: conslog output

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: reserved for log file routines

Boeing: bouncer data

Boeing: bouncer userlist

Boeing: bouncer data

Boeing: bouncer outfile

Boeing: dumpdst dump

Boeing: lostdisc output

Boeing: operator boot strap info (bootdata)

Boeing: report program config

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

912 bt912

921 bt921

922 bt922

947 cooky

969 i2sf

990 bt990

991 bt991

993 wqwp

994 wqasc

995 wqdat

996 wqpar

997 wqlt1

998 wqlt2

999 bt999

1012 ocsc

1020 h1020

861 bt861

869 bt869

870 bt870

875 bt875

876 bt876

879 bt879

880 bt880

890 bt890

899 bt899

900 wqmac

901 bt901

902 bt902

911 bt911

1024 USL

1025 BASD

1026 BASP

1027 BASFP

1028 RL

1029 PROG

1030 NMPRG

1031 SL

1032 NMXL

1033 NMRL

1035 VFORM

1036 VFAST

1037 VREF

Boeing: report program binary data

Boeing: report program output

Boeing: reserved for welcome config

Boeing: spoof output

Boeing: udcutil output

Boeing: welcome output

Boeing: jobnote

Boeing: backup configuration

Boeing: backup output

WRQ Desk Direct: MACBINARY FILE

Boeing: cpu usage daily data

Boeing: cpu usage total

Boeing: response time daily data

Boeing: response time total

Boeing: numjob data

Boeing: numjob merge

Robelle: Cookie data file

Unison: INSIGHT II Specification files

Boeing: system performance data

Boeing: system performance merge

WRQ Desk Direct: WORDPERFECT

WRQ Desk Direct: ASCII DATA

WRQ Desk Direct: DATA

WRQ Desk Direct: PARADOX TABLE

WRQ Desk Direct: LOTUS RELEASE 1

WRQ Desk Direct: LOTUS RELEASE 2

Boeing: porpoise output

OCS crunched file

HPDESK: SLATE document

User subprogram library

Basic data

Basic program

Basic fast program relocatable library

Compatibility mode program

NM program

Segmented library

NM XL

Native Mode Relocatable Lib

VIEW form

VIEW fast forms

VIEW reformat

Appendix B - File Types

• 235

236

• Appendix B - File Types

1092 FTAM2

1093 FTAM3

1100 WDOC

1101 WDICT

1102 WCONF

1103 W2601

1110 PCELL

1111 PFORM

1112 PENV

1113 PCCMP

1114 RASTR

1130 OPTLF

1131 TEPES

1132 TEPEL

1133 SAMPL

1139 MPEDL

1040 XLSAV

1041 XLBIN

1042 XLDSP

1043 uapps

1050 EDITQ

1051 EDTCQ

1052 EDTCT

1054 TDPDT

1055 TDPQM

1056 TDPP

1057 TDPCP

1058 TDPQ

1059 TDPXQ

1060 RJEPN

1070 QPROC

1071 qwrk1

1072 qwrk2

1080 KSAMK

1081 slmap

1082 symbl

1083 GRAPH

1084 SD

1090 LOG

1091 FTAM1

Cross loader ascii (save)

Cross loader relocated binary

Cross loader ascii (display)

USER_APPSET_FILECODE

Edit quick

Edit keepq (cobol)

Edit text (cobol)

TDP diary

TDP proof marked qmarked

TDP proof marked non-cobol

TDP proof marked cobol

TDP workfile

TDP workfile (cobol)

RJE punch

QUERY procedure

QUERY work file.

QUERY work file.

KSAM key file deleted in b.1.2 mit deleted in b.1.2 mit

Graph specification

Self describing file

User logging log

File Transfer Access and Management 1 (ISO standard

8571)

File Transfer Access and Management 2 (ISO standard

8571)

File Transfer Access and Management 3 (ISO standard

8571)

HPWORD document

HPWORD hyphenation dictionary

HPWORD configuration

HP2601 environment

IFS/3000 character cell

IFS/3000 form

IFS/3000 environment

IFS/3000 compiled char cell

Graphics image in raster format

OPT log

TEPE script

TEPE log

APS log

MPEDCP/DRP log

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

1170 MCMND

1171 MFRTM

1172 mrsvd

1173 MEFT

1174 MCRPT

1175 MSERL

1176 VCSF

1177 TTYPE

1178 TVFC

1192 NCONF

1193 NTRAC

1194 NLOG

1195 MIDAS

1211 NDIR

1212 INODE

1213 INVRT

1140 TSR

1141 TSD

1145 DRAW

1146 FIG

1147 FONT

1148 COLOR

1149 D48

1150 h1150

1151 h1151

1152 SLATE

1153 SLATW

1156 DSTOR

1157 TCODE

1158 RCODE

1159 ICODE

1166 MDIST

1167 MTEXT

1168 MARPA

1169 MARPD

1214 EXCEP

1215 TAXON

1216 QUERF

1217 DOCDR

1226 VC

1227 DIF

1228 LANGD

HPTOOLSET root

HPTOOLSET data

HPDRAW slide drawing

HPDRAW figure reserved reserved reserved

HPDESK: HPSLATE DOCUMENT

HPDESK: HPSLATE DOCUMENT

HPSLATE compressed

HPSLATE expanded

RAPID: dictdbu store

RAPID: transact code

RAPID: report code

RAPID: inform code

HPDESK: distribution list

HPDESK: text

ARPA message

ARPA distribution list

HPDESK: abbreviated commands reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved

Term type file

Term vertical format control file

Network configuration

Network trace

Network log reserved was ANODE reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved

VISICALC

Data interchange format

Language definition

Appendix B - File Types

• 237

238

• Appendix B - File Types

1421 MAP

1422 GAL

1425 TTX

1428 RDIC

1429 RSPEC

1430 RSPCF

1431 REXEC

1432 RJOB

1433 ROUTI

1434 ROUTD

1435 PRINT

1436 RCONF

1437 RDICN

1258 PFSTA

1259 PFDYN

1265 h1265

1266 h1266

1267 h1267

1268 h1268

1269 h1269

1270 RFDCA

1271 FFDCA

1272 DIU

1273 PDOC

1274 h1274

1275 DFI

1276 SRI

1277 h1277

1401 CWPTX

1229 CHARD

1230 MGCAT

1235 atlas

1236 BMAP

1242 BDATA

1243 BFORM

1244 BSAVE

1245 BCNFG

1246 BKEY

1247 BSVXL

1248 BDTXL

1249 BBNCM

1257 pfjob

Character set definition

Formatted application message catalog reserved reserved

Basic data

Basic field order form / vplus

Basic saved program

Configuration for default basic program

Function Key Definition

Business BASIC/XL Program

Business BASIC/XL XL Data

Business BASIC/V Binary con_fcode

Pathflow static

Pathflow dynamic

HPDESK: MEMOMAKER DOCUMENT

HPDESK: GRAPHICS/100 PICTURE

HPDESK: GRAPHICS/100 CHART

HPDESK: GRAPHICS/100 DATA

HPDESK: PC FILE

Revisable form dca document

Final form dca document

Document interchange unit

HPWORD/150 document

HPDESK: ADVANCEWRITE DOC

DISOSS Filing Information

DISOSS Search Result Information

HPDESK: VOICE MESSAGE FILE reserved

HPMAP/3000 map specification reserved reserved

HPBRW: Dictionary

HPBRW: Specification

HPBRW: Specification (frozen)

HPBRW: Execution

HPBRW: Report Job

HPBRW: Intermediate Report

HPBRW: Dictionary Output

HPBRW: Print

HPBRW: Configuration

HPBRW: Dictionary

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

1438 REXNM

1441 PIF

1446 h1446

1447 h1447

1448 h1448

1449 h1449

1450 h1450

1455 h1455

1461 NMOBJ

1462 PASLB

1476 TIFF

1477 RDF

1478 SOF

1479 GPH

1480 GPD

1483 VCGPM

1484 FRMAT

1485 DUMP

1486 NWMD0

1491 X4HDR

1500 WP1

1501 WP2

1502 LO123

1514 FTCF

1515 INSP

1516 OUTSP

1517 CHKSP

1521 DSKIT

1526 MSACK

1527 MSNDN

1528 MSTRC

1560 h1560

1581 h1581

1587 ps

1601 h1601

1602 h1602

1607 gif

1616 h1616

1617 h1617

1618 h1618

1619 h1619

1620 h1620

HPBRW: Execution (NM) reserved

HPDESK: LISTKEEPER FILE

HPDESK: FORM DATA FILE

HPDESK: HPDESK CONFIG FILE

HPDESK: SEARCH SPEC (LIB)

HPDESK: ENCRYPTED FILE

HPDESK: DESK PACKAGE

Native Mode Object

PASCAL Source Library

Tag Image Format

Revisable Document Format

Serial Object Format

Chart for Charting Gallery

Data for Charting Gallery

Virtuoso Code Generator Processed Micro File

Formatter

Dump

New Wave Mail Distribution

X.400 Header

Other WP1

Other WP2

Lotus 123 spreadsheet

Form Tester Command Spec

Spooled input

Spooled output

Checkpoint

HPDESK Intrinsics Transaction

Mail Server Acknowledgment

Mail Server Non-Delivery Notification

Mail Server Trace

HPDESK: MSWORD/Macintosh Document

HPDESK: IBM DISPLAYWRITE

HPDESK: POSTSCRIPT WRITER

HPDESK: TIFF DOCUMENT

HPDESK: PCL DOCUMENT gif

HPDESK: WORDPERFECT Document

HPDESK: WORDPERFECT Document

HPDESK: MS WORD3.01/Macintosh

HPDESK: MSWORD/PC Document

HPDESK: MSWORD/WINDOWS Document

Appendix B - File Types

• 239

240

• Appendix B - File Types

1850 h1850

1851 h1851

1852 h1852

1853 h1853

1854 h1854

1855 h1855

1856 h1856

1857 h1857

1858 h1858

1859 h1859

1860 h1860

1861 h1861

1862 h1862

1863 h1863

1864 h1864

1865 h1865

1621 h1621

1622 h1622

1626 xls1

1645 h1645

1647 h1647

1701 trek

1727 h1727

1729 h1729

1731 h1731

1734 h1734

1735 h1735

1745 h1745

1746 h1746

1866 h1866

1867 h1867

1868 h1868

1869 h1869

1870 h1870

1871 h1871

1872 h1872

1873 h1873

1874 h1874

1875 h1875

1876 h1876

1877 h1877

1878 h1878

HPDESK: SAMNA WORD Document

HPDESK: AMIPRO Document

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL Spreadsheet

HPDESK: MACBINARY

HPDESK: MS-POWERPOINT

STARTREK/SUPRTREK save game

HPDESK: FREELANCE

HPDESK: DELTAGRAPH

HPDESK: EXPRESSIONIST

HPDESK: MS-MAIL MSG DATA

HPDESK: MS-WRITE Document

HPDESK: MS-VIDEO

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS BITMAP

HPDESK: PICT

HPDESK: PICT FILE/Macintosh

HPDESK: TIFF FILE/Macintosh

HPDESK: EPSF

HPDESK: EPSF FILE/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACWRITE

HPDESK: MACWRITE/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACWRITE II

HPDESK: MACWRITE II/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACPAINT

HPDESK: MACPAINT/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACDRAW

HPDESK: MACDRAW/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACDRAW II

HPDESK: MACDRAW II/Macintosh

HPDESK: MACDRAW PRO

HPDESK: MACDRAW PRO/Macintosh

HPDESK: HYPERCARD

HPDESK: HYPERCARD/Macintosh

HPDESK: RESEDIT

HPDESK: RESEDIT/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS Word Macintosh 3.x

HPDESK: MS-WORD/MAC/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh Spreadsheet

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh CHART

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh CHART

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh MACRO

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL/Macintosh MACRO

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

1892 h1892

1893 h1893

1894 h1894

1895 h1895

1896 h1896

1897 h1897

1898 h1898

1900 h1900

1901 h1901

1902 h1902

1903 h1903

1904 h1904

1905 h1905

1906 h1906

1907 h1907

1908 h1908

1879 h1879

1880 h1880

1881 h1881

1882 h1882

1883 h1883

1884 h1884

1885 h1885

1886 h1886

1887 h1887

1888 h1888

1889 h1889

1890 h1890

1891 h1891

1909 h1909

1910 h1910

1911 h1911

1912 h1912

1913 h1913

1914 h1914

1915 h1915

1916 h1916

1917 h1917

1918 h1918

1919 h1919

1920 h1920

1921 h1921

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL WORK

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL WORK/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL CHART

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL CHART/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL MACRO

HPDESK: MS-EXCEL MACRO/Macintosh

HPDESK: SUPERPAINT 2.x

HPDESK: SUPERPAINT 2.x /Macintosh

HPDESK: SUPERPAINT 3.x

HPDESK: SUPERPAINT 3.x /Macintosh

HPDESK: PAGEMAKER/Macintosh

HPDESK: PAGEMAKER File/Macintosh

HPDESK: WORDPERFECT/Macintosh Document

HPDESK: WORDPERFECT/Macintosh

HPDESK: LOTUS 1-2-3/Macintosh

HPDESK: LOTUS 1-2-3/MACINTOSH

HPDESK: PANORAMA II

HPDESK: PANORAMA II/Macintosh

HPDESK: FILEMAKER PRO

HPDESK: FILEMAKER PRO/Macintosh

HPDESK: GIF FILE/Macintosh

HPDESK: OMNIS 7 APPL

HPDESK: OMNIS 7 APPL/Macintosh

HPDESK: OMNIS 7 DATA

HPDESK: OMNIS 7 DATA/Macintosh

HPDESK: QUARK XPRESS

HPDESK: QUARK XPRESS/Macintosh

HPDESK: CANVAS

HPDESK: CANVAS/Macintosh

HPDESK: DELTAGRAPH/Macintosh

HPDESK: EXPRESSIONIST/Macintosh

HPDESK: FREEHAND

HPDESK: FREEHAND/Macintosh

HPDESK: PERSUASION

HPDESK: PERSUASION/Macintosh

HPDESK: ILLUSTRATOR EPSF

HPDESK: ILLUSTRATOR EPSF/Macintosh

HPDESK: PHOTOSHOP

HPDESK: PHOTOSHOP/Macintosh

HPDESK: MS-POWERPOINT/Macintosh

HPDESK: FrameMaker

HPDESK: FrameMaker/Macintosh

Appendix B - File Types

• 241

242

• Appendix B - File Types

2067 h2067

2068 h2068

2500 HPWR

2501 STORE

2502 STDIR

3333 hpwrd

5000 dbg66

5100 pdcda

5101 tpdsk

5102 redo

7210 oalcp

7350 ovini

7604 odxfr

7679 disc1

7680 disc2

7681 disc3

7682 Disc4

7684 Oeip

7690 Owcfg

8501 Mmch

8502 Mvglr

21074 Rrvtn

1926 h1926

1927 h1927

1928 h1928

1929 h1929

1938 h1938

1939 h1939

1940 h1940

1941 h1941

1942 h1942

1944 h1944

1945 h1945

2057 h2057

2065 h2065

2066 h2066

HPDESK: INTELLIDRAW

HPDESK: INTELLIDRAW/Macintosh

HPDESK: MINICAD+

HPDESK: MINICAD+/Macintosh

HPDESK: LOTUS 1-2-3 WIN V4

HPDESK: QUICKTIME MOVIE

HPDESK: QUICKTIME MOVIE/Macintosh

HPDESK: MICROCAL ORIGIN

HPDESK: LOTUS ORGANISER

HPDESK: ORG PLUS FOR WIN

HPDESK: HARVARD GRAPHICS

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS SOUND

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS CONFIG

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS CARD

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS HELP

HPDESK: MS-WINDOWS ICON

HP OpenDeskWriter Backup

TurboSTORE/iX + store-to-disc

TurboSTORE/iX on-disk directory of files stored

HPWORD scratch file

Encapsulation file for option 66 of DBGeneral

PDCMAN data

TAPEDISK data

REDO file

OAL Compiled Procedure

OVINIT (Omnilink security file)

ODXTRANSFER

DISC internal permanent file

DISC internal permanent file

DISC internal permanent file

DISC internal permanent file

Omnidex external index pointer file

OmniWindow configuration

Multiview & ManMan compiled help

Multiview General Ledger Report

RoadRunner virtual tape file (non-priv)

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Appendix C – Regular Expressions

What Are Regular Expressions?

Server version 4.8 or higher is required.

Regular expressions might look like wildcards used in the Pattern search option.

They are sometimes compared to wildcards but, in fact, they are much more powerful. They can also be much more complex. You have to practice in order to use them efficiently and to their full potential. For brevity, we will often refer to regular expressions simply as regexp.

Although all regexp implementations share a basic set of metacharacters and syntax rules, other tools and programs might have different extensions and variations. Be aware that the version used in Qedit might not have all the extensions you are currently familiar with. For example, Qedit does not support alternation with the vertical bar “|” (equivalent to a logical “or”). Also, this is the first implementation in

Robelle products. We will be looking at other tools and might decide to extend our own implementation in future releases.

If you are interested in learning more about regular expressions, you should get a copy of Mastering Regular Expressions written by Jeffrey E. F. Friedl and published at O'Reilly & Associates, Inc. This book covers most regular expression implementations, the differences between each one, how most regexp engines work and some tips on how to get the best performance from each type.

Metacharacters

Qedit supports the following metacharacters:

^

Start-of-line anchor

$

End-of-line anchor

.

Matches any character

?

Optional character

Matches zero or more of the preceding character

+

Matches one or more of the preceding character

[

Start a character class

]

End a character class

^

If 1st character in character class, negates class

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix C – Regular Expressions

• 243

(

Subpattern start

)

Subpattern end

Anchor Characters

In general, a regexp can find a match anywhere in the text as long as they do not span multiples lines. There are 2 exceptions to this rule. The start-of-line "^" and the end-of-line "$" anchors. They are called anchors for very good reasons.

These actually indicate that the match must occur at fixed positions within the line.

The start-of-line anchor forces the string to be at the very beginning. If you enter

^abc the line will be selected only if the string abc is the first thing on the line. Thus, abcdefghij Will be selected xyzabc Will not be selected

Similarly, the end-of-line anchor specifies that the string must appear as the last thing on the line.

abc$

In this example, the lines must end with the string abc. There must not be anything else, even spaces, after it.

abcdef Will not be selected xyzabc Will be selected

You can combine the anchors to verify that lines contain only a certain string and nothing else. Simply use

^abc$

Each line has a start and an end of line. So, if you search for “^” or “$”, Qedit finds a match on the previous or next line. The only difference is the cursor position. A successful match with a start-of-line anchor places the cursor at the beginning of the line. A match with the end-of-line anchor places the cursor after the last character on the line. Also note that, since these do not represent actual characters, the result of a search is an empty selection.

If the anchor characters are used anywhere else, they lose their metacharacter status and become ordinary characters.

Remember that COBOL tags, when displayed, are part of the text. Thus, if you are trying to search for a regexp at the end of the line, you have to code the regexp accordingly or hide the tags while doing the search.

Match Any Character

The period, or dot, is used to match any character. The character can be of any type.

As long as there is something in that position, there will be a match. For example, abc.xyz

selects any line that contains the strings abc and xyz separated by a single character.

That character can be anything e.g. 1, w, #, etc.

244

• Appendix C – Regular Expressions

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Optional Character

You can check the absence or presence of a character by suffixing it with a question mark. In a regexp, this indicates that the preceding character might not be there. If it is present, it must be there only once.

ab?c

Matches ac or abc only

Repeating Characters

There are different ways you can check for repetition of characters. If there is potential for a character to appear more than once, you can use the asterisk or plus sign quantifiers. The quantifier is applied to the character to its immediate left.

There is a very small difference between the two quantifiers. The asterisk represents

zero or more occurrences of the preceding character. That is the character is optional but, if it is there, it can repeat multiple times.

The plus sign represents one or more occurrences. This means the character must appear at least once but it can appear multiple times.

ab*c Matches ac, abc, abbc, and so on ab+c Matches abc, abbc but not ac

Character Class

When you have to check for a fixed string of characters, it is easy enough to simply type it at the actual regexp. Entering abc123 only finds exact matches. What if you want to find the string abc followed by a numeric digit? There are no specific metacharacters for digits or alphabetic characters. However, regular expressions have a concept called character class to address these issues. Actually, character class is a lot more powerful and flexible than metacharacters for specific types of text.

A character class is enclosed between square brackets. Beware that most regexp metacharacters in the list above lose their meanings inside a character class. The start-of-line anchor acquires a different definition and a new metacharacter, hyphen appears.

A character class is a list of possible values for that position in the string. The character class can be as long as needed. A character class for numeric digits would be:

[0123456789]

Note, the list does not have to be in sorted order. You could have entered the digits in reverse order or in random order and the character class would still be valid. It just makes it harder to verify that all digits are there. Similarly, a character class for lowercase letters would be:

[abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz]

It is really important to understand that a match occurs if one of the characters in the class is found. Using the abc example above, if we wanted to make sure we had this string followed by a digit, we would enter: abc[0123456789] Matches abc0, abc1, and so on to

abc9

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix C – Regular Expressions

• 245

To make it even more restrictive, we could have used: abc[13579] Matches abc followed by one odd digit

Because a character class is only a list of possible values, you can mix and match all the characters in the ASCII code table.

p[imy246!.*]e Matches pie, pre, p4e, p*e

This would find text that starts with the letter p and ends with an e with a single character between them, matching one of the letters a, m or y, one of the digits 2, 4 or 6, an exclamation mark, a period or an asterisk. Note the period and asterisk are not metacharacters anymore.

Of course, if the character class contains a lot of possible values, it can be tedious and error-prone to enter each character. The hyphen can be used as a range indicator.

It is a character-class metacharacter. Simply specify the first and last characters in the range. Numeric digits could then be coded as

[0-9]

Lowercase letters could be coded as

[a-z]

You can also combine ranges with single values as in: abc[0-9a-z!.*]

The hyphen is interpreted as a range indicator only if it is between two other characters. If it is the first or last character in the class, it is used as a literal.

Negated Character Class

The caret "^" takes on a different meaning inside a character class. It used as a literal anywhere in the class except if it is listed first. When entered immediately after the left square bracket, it negates the whole class. This means a match is found if the text

does not contain any of the characters in the class.

p[246^]e Matches p2e, p^e and so on p[^246]e Matches pae, p3e, and others

In the last example, the caret negates the 2, 4 and 6. The regexp is true if the text starts with the letter p and ends with the letter e and there is a single character between them that is not 2, 4 and 6.

Repeating Character Class

Because a character class is interpreted as a single character, you can use the optional metacharacter, question mark, and quantifier metacharacters, asterisk and plus sign, to further qualify a character class. For example, if we wanted to allow one or more numeric digits after the abc string, we could use the following regexp: abc[0-9]+

Escape Character

Other characters used in a regular expression might also have special meanings. The most important one is probably the escape character. In Qedit, the backslash is the escape character. A metacharacter loses its special meaning if preceded by a backslash. In the example,

246

• Appendix C – Regular Expressions

Qedit for Windows User Manual

abc[123] square brackets indicate a character class. This regexp would match abc1, abc2 or

abc3. If we escape the square brackets as in abc&\[123&\] the square brackets are then used as literals. This means they are now part of the string. The only matching value is then abc[123].

If you want to search for a backslash, simply enter two in a row e.g. \\. The only exception to this rule is the start-of-line anchor “^”. Because “\^” is also an escaped sequence, there is only one way to search for the literal “^”. You have to use the hexadecimal value of the character. You would use the following string in your regular expression:

\x05e

Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions

Additionally, the escape character can be combined with other characters to represent other non-printing characters. Qedit recognizes the following escaped characters. These should not be confused with escape sequences used to control the display on HP-type terminals. These are not metacharacters either.

\b

Backspace

\e

ASCII escape character (ESC)

\f

Formfeed

\n

\r

\s

Newline (linefeed)

Carriage return

Space

\t

Horizontal tab

\DDD

1-3 octal digits representing a character's ASCII value

\xDDD 1-3 hex digits representing a character's ASCII value

\^C

Control code e.g. Control-G (^G) is the bell character

For example, you would use:

\t

All lines with a tab character

\e&d@ Terminal escape sequence ESC&d@

Backreferences in Regular Expressions

We have seen basic expressions where almost everything evolves around single characters of text. Even character class lists are really used to match a single position.

You can use parentheses to divide a long regular expression into smaller portions.

Each portion then becomes a regexp of their own. This does not affect the way a string search is done. However, each subpattern can then be used in a replacement operation.

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix C – Regular Expressions

• 247

Subpatterns are numbered from 0 to 9. Subpattern 0 is reserved and represents the complete matched string. Note that subpattern 0 is implicit and is always available, even if the expression does not contain any parentheses. Explicit subpatterns are numbered from 1 to 9 starting from the left of the expression.

Subpatterns can be referenced in a replacement regexp using the escape character, backslash, followed by the number. When applying the replacement string, backreferences are substituted with the actual matching text. Backreferences can be used as many times as needed. Each reference would end up with the original text.

Let's say we have a file that contains a series of phone numbers. In North America

(and possibly other parts of the world), phone numbers contain a 3-digit area code followed by a 3-digit exchange number and, finally, a 4-digit individual number.

Unfortunately, in our case, the phone numbers are just series of 10 numeric digits without separators. For example,

1234567890

1112224444

9087374456

We would like a fast and easy way to format them so the numbers are easier to read.

To find all these strings, we can use the following regexp:

([0-9][0-9][0-9])([0-9][0-9][0-9])([0-9][0-9][0-9][0-9])

We use the [0-9] character class to specify that we are expecting numeric digits only. There are 3 subpatterns in the regexp. Each subpattern is enclosed in a set of parentheses. The first subpattern repeats the numeric character class 3 times. It represents the digits that are part of the area code. This is subpattern \1.

The second subpattern also has the character class repeated 3 times. These represents the exchange number. This is subpattern \2.

The third and last subpattern uses the character class repeated 4 times. These represents the individual number. This is subpattern \3.

Subpattern \0 represents all 10 digits.

To reformat, we can now combine backreferences with other characters to format the numbers anyway we like. Let's say we want to put the area code in parentheses, insert a space after it and insert a dash "-" between the exchange number and the individual number. We would use the following substitution string:

(\1) \2-\3

The list above would then look like:

(123) 456-7890

(111) 222-4444

(908) 737-4456

You can use subexpressions to reorder the text in lines. For example, if we wanted to reverse the telephone numbers showing the last four digits first, then the first three digits of the telephone number, followed by the area code, we could use the following substituion string:

Last: \3 Middle: \2 Area: \1 Complete: \0

Which would then produce the following (assuming that we started with the same data in this example and used the same regexp):

248

• Appendix C – Regular Expressions

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Last: 7890 Middle: 456 Area: 123 Complete: 1234567890

Last: 4444 Middle: 222 Area: 111 Complete: 1112224444

Last: 4456 Middle: 737 Area: 908 Complete: 9087374456

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix C – Regular Expressions

• 249

Appendix D - Language

Templates

Overview

In order to take advantage of the syntax coloring feature of Qedit, the syntax of a language must be defined in a file known as template. Language templates are regular text files containing information formatted according XML rules. For that reason, template files must have a .xml extension.

Template Location

Robelle-supplied language templates are stored in the system\language subdirectory below the Qedit base directory e.g. \robelle\qedit. These files should not be modified as they might be overwritten when a new version is installed.

If you wish to create new templates or modify one of Robelle's templates, you should create them in \user\language. Typically, the user subdirectory contains files that have been customized and should be shared by all Qedit users.

The system and user directories are always scanned.

You can create your own language templates and store them the location of your choice. You simply have to specify the location on the General page of the

Preferences dialog box.

When Qedit starts up, it scans all the templates found at the above locations and loads the definitions into internal structures. These structures do not change after that point. To use a new or updated language template, you have to exit out of Qedit and start it up again.

Here are the language templates supplied by Robelle:

• allbase.xml (Allbase SQL)

• c.xml (C and C++)

• cobol.xml (Cobol, Cobfree)

• cobx.xml (CobolX)

• fortran77.xml

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix D - Language Templates

• 251

• html.xml

• java.xml

• job.xml (MPE commands)

• MySQL.xml (MySQL SQL)

• oracle.xml (Oracle SQL)

• pascalix.xml

• powerhouse.xml

• qsl.xml

• spl.xml

• xml.xml

Which Language?

See the host-based Qedit User

Manual for details

Qedit uses different methods to determine the language of a file. For local files and

HP-UX files, syntax coloring uses the file extension to determine its language.

When you open an MPE host file, the MPE server looks at physical characteristics of the file and its filecode. If it can, the server assigns a language based on that information. If the file is in the POSIX namespace, the server also looks at the file extension.

The server communicates the language information to the client. When you open a file for the first time, the client uses the server information and stores it in the document database. The client relies and uses the document database from that point.

You can change the language in the client at any time. The new information is saved in the document database. This means that opening a file in host-based Qedit might get a different language than opening it in Qedit for Windows. It also means that the client always uses the language that you defined last time you accessed the file.

Language Template Format

Template files use XML syntax. Here are some general rules used in the templates:

• Description of the language is done using <starttag>...</endtag> blocks.

• Blocks can be nested. In other words, a block can contain other

<starttag>...<endtag> blocks.

• Tags can contain optional attributes.

• Attributes are delimited by one or more spaces.

• Attribute values must be enclosed in double-quotes.

• To avoid confusion and minimize parsing errors, enter delimiter characters with their ASCII codes using &#xdigits; syntax where digits are hexadecimal.

• Comments in the language template file itself are identified by <!-- at the beginning and --> at the end.

252

• Appendix D - Language Templates

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

• Unless specified otherwise, tags, attributes and values are not case-sensitive.

Language Block

The Language block is required. It's the main block which contains all other blocks describing the language. The Language tag has the following attributes:

• Name: name of the language. If two language templates have the same Name, the last template encountered is used for coloring. The name is optional and there is no default value.

• Case: indicates whether the language tokens are case-sensitive or not. If the language is case-sensitive, enter the word significant. Anything else means not case-sensitive. The attribute is optional and the default is not casesensitive.

• QeditLanguageCode: list of numeric codes where each code is a number corresponding to a Qedit Language. There can be as many codes as needed.

This is useful for language codes that basically identify the same language such as C and C++ or Cobol, Cobolx and Cobfree. Language codes are optional and there are no default values.

The same language code should not be used in more than one template. If this happens, Qedit uses the first one it encounters starting from the end of the list.

For example, if the HTML template has the same language code as XML, the definition from XML is used. Valid codes are:

Language

Code

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

7

8

5

6

2

4

0

1

Description

HP's Systems Programming Language (SPL)

Fortran

Cobol

Cobol with comments

Job stream

RPG

Free-format text up to 256 bytes

Pascal

Free-format text up to 8,172 bytes

C language

C++ language

Powerhouse

Pascal with long lines

Free-format Cobol

HTML

XML

Java

Qedit Scripting Language (QSL)

• StartColumn: column number where text starts on each line. This attribute is optional and must be greater than 0. The default is 1.

Appendix D - Language Templates

• 253

• Horizon: maximum number of lines to scan to find the start of a class e.g.

multi-line comments. It is optional and must be greater than 0. The default is

100.

For example, the following tag identifies the SPL language which is not casesensitive, lines start in column 1 and the language code is 0.

<language name="SPL" case="notsignificant" startcolumn="1" qeditlanguagecode="0">

language specifications

</language>

For each language, there are multiple blocks describing individual elements of the language, making up the language specifications. All these blocks must be define between the <language> and </language> tags.

File Extensions

The Extension blocks describe file extensions used to identify the language of a file. Extension blocks are optional. Each block contains one extension string.

Extensions can be as long as needed and can be any character string. Extensions are not case-sensitive. In other words, ".c" is the same as ".C".

Extensions are applicable to local, HP-UX and Posix files. They are sort of dynamic.

If you add an extension to a language template, simply restart Qedit for Windows to implement it immediately.

Extension support for HP-UX and Posix files is done a little differently. The server always assign a language code to a file. The language code is checked against the language templates. If there's a match, Qedit uses that language. If there's no match and the language code is Text or Data, which are generic types, Qedit looks at the file extension. If there's a match, that's the language. If the language code and extension do not match a template, the file simply does not have a language and no syntax coloring is done.

Here are file extensions identifying C or C++ files:

<extension>h</extension>

<extension>c</extenstion>

<extension>cpp</extension>

String Delimiters

The Quote blocks define characters that delimit literals within the language. Quote blocks are optional. Each Quote block contains a StringDelimiter block and optional Escape blocks.

The Quote tag attributes are:

• Type: indicates if a string started with this delimiter can span multiple lines. If strings can be continued on separate lines, use Continuable. Anything else means the string ends with the current line. It is optional and the default is not continuable.

• ReopenContinuation: indicates whether an opening quote character is required on the continuation lines. If required, enter true. Anything else means the delimiter is not required on continuation lines. It is optional and the default is not required.

254

• Appendix D - Language Templates

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

There must be one and only one StringDelimiter block. Each block defines a delimiter. A delimiter must be a single character. The StringDelimiter tag has the following attribute:

• Double: indicates that two consecutive delimiters mean the delimiter is escaped i.e. it is used as is. Enter escape if that's the case. Anything else means consecutive delimiters have no special meaning. It is optional and the default is not escaped.

• The Escape block defines an escape character. If the delimiter is preceded by an escape character, the delimiter is used at face value and not as a closing delimiter. Escape blocks are optional but, if specified, there can be up to 10 escape entries and each one can not have more than 7 characters.

This exemple defines the double-quote (ASCII hex 22) as a delimiter. A string defined with it can span multiple lines. To escape a double-quote i.e. not interpret it as the start or end of a string, it can be preceded by a backslash or two question marks.

<quote type="continuable">

<stringdelimiter>&#x22</stringdelimiter>

<escape>\</escape>

<escape>??</escape>

</quote>

Continuation Schemes

The Continuation block describes how to identify continuation lines i.e. language statements that span multiple lines. This block is optional but, if specified, there must be only one. Each block can contain Termination or Positional blocks.

There can be a mix of Termination and Positional blocks and each continuation identifier must have only 1 character.

A Termination blocks indicates that the continuation character should be the last character on the line i.e. the line is going to be continued. A continuation character is required for a Termination block.

A Positional block indicates that the continuation character has to be at a specific location on the line. This block has only one attribute:

• Position: is the column number where continuation character should be. The position is required and must greater than 0.

The continuation character is optional for this type of continuation. If specified, a continuation line is assumed only if this particular character is used at the defined position. If no continuation character is specified then any character found at that position is presumed to be a continuation.

For exemple, this continuation block defines the backslash as an end-of-line continuation character. It also defines the hyphen in column 6 as a continuation.

<continuation>

<termination>\</termination>

<positional position="6">-</positional>

</continuation>

Comment Schemes

The Comments blocks defines characters or strings used to identify comment text within the file. A Comments block is optional but, if specified, there must be only

Appendix D - Language Templates

• 255

one. The block can contain Endline, Inline and LineDesignator blocks. There can be as many of these blocks as needed. Comment identifiers in these blocks can not have more than 15 characters each.

Endline blocks define identifiers that makes the rest of the current line a comment.

There can be as many Endline blocks as needed.

Inline blocks define identifiers marking the start and end of a comment. The beginning-of-comment identifier is defined with a BeginComment block. There must be only one of these per Inline block.

The end-of-comment identifier is defined with a EndComment block. There must be only one of these per Inline block. In a file, anything between the start-ofcomment and end-of-comment identifiers is considered a comment and can span multiple lines. There can be as many Inline blocks as needed.

An Inline block can have a Type attribute. If the value is Keyword, it means the

BeginComment and EndComment must appear as words to be recognized. For example, if the BeginComment string is comment, "comment" starts a multiline comment but "commentary" and "comments" do not.

A LineDesignator block indicates that the comment character has to be in a fixed position within a line. This block has one attribute:

Position: column number where the comment character must appear. It is required and must be greater than 0.

The comment identifier is optional. If specified, a comment is assumed only if this particular identifier is used at the defined location. If no identifier is specified then any character found at that position is presumed to be a comment.

In this example, two slashes identifies end-of-line comments. In other words, whenever two slashes are encountered, whatever text follows them is considered a comment. A slash-asterisk sequence starts a comment section. An asterisk-slash sequence ends it. A dollar-sign in column 1 indicates that the current line is a comment.

<comments>

<endline>//</endline>

<inline>

<begincomment>/*</begincomment> {/* starts comments}

<endcomment>*/</endcomment> {*/ ends comments }

</inline>

<linedesignator position="1">$</linedesignator>

</comments>

Token Character Set

The TokenCharset block defines all the characters that can be used in user-defined words such as variable names. This block is optional. If specified, it should contain a list of valid characters. The list is similar to a character class in a regular expression.

Character ranges can be specified by entering the first and last character of the range separated by a dash e.g. "a-z" means all lowercase letters between "a" and "z". The character list can be enclosed in square brackets, "[" and "]". If so, the brackets are discarded.

In this example, user-defined words can have upper and lowercase letters, digits 0 through 9 and the underscore character.

256

• Appendix D - Language Templates

Qedit for Windows User Manual

<tokencharset>[A-Za-z0-9_]*</tokencharset>

Keywords

The Keyword blocks are used to specify all reserved words for the corresponding language. Each block defines one keyword. There can be as many as needed and each one can be as long as needed.

In this short example, we define four keywords: While, Break, Move and Perform.

<keyword>while</keyword>

<keyword>break</keyword>

<keyword>move</keyword>

<keyword>perform</keyword>

Qedit for Windows User Manual Appendix D - Language Templates

• 257

Glossary of Terms

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Access keys

Underlined character in menu and command names. Combined with the

ALT

key, they allow quick access to functions without using the mouse or the cursor keys.

They are sometimes called mnemonics.

Active

The active document window displays the file in which the changes are going to be applied.

Caret

Character indicating the location for the next operation. Its functionality is equivalent to the insertion point. A caret is usually represented by a character resembling a lowercase V, upside down.

CI

See Command interpreter

Command interpreter

(CI) On MPE hosts, the program that is automatically initiated in a session or job.

The CI accepts, interprets and executes the operating system commands on your behalf. It is equivalent to a shell on a UNIX host.

Current working directory

(CWD) Term used for UNIX host and POSIX namespace on MPE to identify the directory in which most file operations are occurring. Qedit looks for files to open or creates new files in the CWD unless the file name is qualified.

CWD

See Current Working Directory

Glossary of Terms

• 259

260

• Glossary of Terms

DNS

See Domain Name server

Domain Name Server

(DNS) Software used to cross-reference IP addresses to host names.

End-of-line character

Operating systems have different ways of identifying the end of a line in a file. Some use a

LINE FEED

or

NEWLINE

character, a

CARRIAGE RETURN

or a combination of a

CARRIAGE RETURN

/

LINE FEED

.

Firewall

Security device (hardware or software) controlling access to a network. Usually controls which IP addresses are allowed to access specific port numbers and services.

Folder

Sometimes called a directory. Item used as a container for related folders or documents.

HFS

See Hierarchical File System.

Hierarchical File System

(HFS) Sometimes called POSIX namespace on MPE. File system in which files and directories are arranged in hierarchical fashion. There is a root directory from which all other components branch out.

Insertion point

Exact location within the file in which the edit operation is going to take place.

Usually indicated by a blinking cursor. If you select some text, the insertion point is the highlighted text itself.

Internet Service Provider

(ISP) Companies offering Internet access to individuals or organizations. They usually offer services such as electronic mail, World Wide Web hosting, etc.

IP address

Internet Protocol address. Unique identifier required for all computer systems connected to a network. The address is made up of a series of 4 numbers separated by a period. Each number can have a value between 1 and 255. e.g., 128.11.200.77

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Qedit for Windows User Manual

NOTE: Do not enter leading zeros in any part of an IP address. A leading zero indicates that the value is specified in octal notation. In the example above, if you had entered 128.011.200.077, the IP address would have been interpreted as

128.9.200.63.

ISP

See Internet Service Provider

Mnemonic

Short series of characters used to represent an attribute, a concept or provide fast access to a function. They are called mnemonics as they are typically easy to remember. See also Access Keys

Most recently used

(MRU) List that contains information entered most recently in a specific area. The file name list box of the Open Host File dialog box and the Search for list box of the Find String dialog box are examples of MRU lists.

MRU

See Most Recently Used

Native Language Support

(NLS) Subsystem that allows proper handling (conversion, formatting and collation sequence) of national characters. Refer to documentation from HP for details.

NLS

See Native Language Support

Pane

When using a split view, sections of the file on either side of a split bar.

PID

See Process IDentification number

POSIX

Hierarchical File System on HP e3000 running MPE/iX 4.5 or later. Files and directories created under the HFS follow the same rules as other machines running

UNIX.

Glossary of Terms

• 261

262

• Glossary of Terms

Process Identification number

(PID) Server processes usually have a unique ID number assigned by the operating system. There is one server process per connection. The PID can be used to scan the log files and find out what was done during that editing session.

Qedit Scripting Language

(QSL) Scripting language offering access to Qedit for Windows functions and objects. It can be used to customize the Qedit client environment, perform common editing tasks, define new commands to perform custom functions or automate repetitive tasks for hands-off operations. Refer to the QSL User Manual for details.

QSL

See Qedit Scripting Language

Record length

Maximum number of characters that can fit on a line within the file. Often related to the Language of the file.

Remote Process Management

(RPM) Server process running under MPE/iX allowing the creation of sessions and processes from remote computers.

RPM

See Remote Process Management

Scroll bar

Area on the right hand side and at the bottom of a window that allows you to move around in a file to display different sections. A scroll bar includes a scroll arrow at both ends and a scroll box.

Shell

On UNIX hosts, this is a program that accepts, interprets and executes commands that you normally enter in a session or script. It is equivalent to the command interpreter on MPE.

Split bar

Yellow line displayed between two panes when using a split view. The split bar can be moved to change the size of a pane.

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Split box

Red area that appears at the top of a vertical scroll bar and on the left of an horizontal scroll bar. The split box can be used to split a document window into two or more panes. This allows you to look at different sections of the same file.

UDC

See User Defined Commands

User Defined Command

(UDC) MPE on HP e3000 computers allows you to create your own set of commands. These new commands can execute one or more other commands (MPE, command files or other UDCs).

XML

Stands for eXtensible Markup Language. Very similar to the popular HTML

(HyperText Markup Language)

Qedit for Windows User Manual Glossary of Terms

• 263

Index

Symbols

! (exclamation point) search pattern 143

# (number sign) search pattern 143

$ (dollar sign) metacharacter 251

& (ampersand) search pattern 143

( (left parenthesis) metacharacter 252

) (right parenthesis) metacharacter 252

* (asterisk) metacharacter 251

. (dot) metacharacter 251

? (question mark) metacharacter 251

? (question mark) search pattern 143

@ (at-sign) search pattern 143

[ (left square bracket) metacharacter 251

] (right square bracket) metacharacter 251

^ (circumflex) character class negation 252

^ (circumflex) metacharacter 251

^ (circumflex) search pattern 143

~ (tilde) search pattern 143

+ (plus sign) metacharacter 251

Dollar-Oldpass

$Oldpass host command 172

A

About Qedit dialog 207

Access log file 217, 218, 220

Access mode 34

Acrobat Reader 11

Active connections 28

Add scripts 177

Adobe Acrobat 11

Allbase syntax coloring 123

Anchor characters 252

Attributes document 75

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Auto-indent 68, 118 default 125

B

Backreferences, regexp 256

Backspace key 91, 100

Binary data 82

Braces matching 122

Brackets matching 122 busy workfile 194, 224

BYE, MPE command 173

C

Cache 97, 214

Cancel button 33, 34

Caret 14, 148

Carriage-return terminator 68

Caseless search 142

Character class 253

Character set 56

Characters display nonprinting 93 displaying invisible 121 international 51, 94 nonprinting 82, 91, 92 r_ansi font 93 special 51, 91, 92, 189

Checked commands 25

Clipboard 96 local 98 tab characters 104

Close forced 165

COB74XL command 183

COB85XL command 183

COBOL 64, 113 tag 133, 134, 214 automatic 137 manual edit 133, 137

COBOL compile, MPE 172

COBOL copylib 190

Color adding scheme 128 changing scheme 128 connection default 56 defaults hierarchy 129

Local default 87

MPE default 87 removing scheme 129 schemes 125

UNIX default 87

Index

• 265

Column delete 101 find in 145 insert 102 shift 102

Command line interface 75

Compile MPE source 183

Configuration server 19, 159, 227

Connection 2, 53, 54, 161, 193 copying 58 creating 54 disconnect 53, 61, 164 information 212 maintaining 60

MPE host 56, 215 removing 61 renaming 61

Temporary 54

UNIX host 210–23, 220 using 29, 59, 80

Connection List dialog 55, 58, 60, 61, 215

Connection template 21, 56

Controling scripts 178

Convert text to workfile 154 workfile to text 155

Copy Special dialog 98

Copylib 190

CR terminator 68

Cursor 35 keys 31

Customizing client 13 connection 61 opening a file 87 save and close 165 search 148 server 19

D

Debug permanent settings 210 temporary settings 210

Debug Controls dialog 208

Delete column 101

Detab 104

Dialog

About Qedit 207

Connection List 55, 58, 60, 61, 215

Copy Special 98

Debug Controls 208

Directory 1, 29, 81

Expiry message 21

266

• Index

File Options 212

Go To Line 145

Host command 168

Login 222

Manage scripts 177

New Host File 29, 59, 63

Open 46, 48, 64, 77

Open Host File 29, 80

Paste progress 97

Preferences 13, 162, 232

Replace 147

Save As 163

Script control 178

Tip of the Day 22

Directory 62, 221, 224 changing 73 creating 64 default HP-UX 58, 80, 220 dialog 29

Font 15, 112 layout 71

MPE vs POSIX 74 print 74 saving from 74 select files 74 sorting 72 wildcards 72

Directory dialog 1, 81

Disable host command 171

Disconnect 53, 61, 164

DNS 215, 218, 220–22, 220–22

Document attributes 75 font 111 information 211

Document database 75 recovery 229

Document type 33

DOS files 68

Drag-and-drop open 50, 51

E

Embedded file 189

Embedded files 76 end-of-line characters 121

End-of-line characters 43

Entab 104

Environment

MPE 171, 173

Error log file 217, 218, 220 messages 231

Escape character, regexp 255

Escaped sequence, regexp 255

Qedit for Windows User Manual

European currency 56

Exchange position 141

Executing host command 167

Expiring version 21

Expiry message dialog 21

F

Favorites 83 add 83 add to folder 85 new folder 84 remove 86

File 152, 223 autosave 166 closing 40, 164, 165 colors 66 converting 154 copying 151 creating 28, 31, 63, 64 defaults 87

DOS terminator 68 drag-and-drop open 50, 51 embedded 76, 189 filters 78 font 66 fully-qualified name 189 host 63, 79, 152, 164, 193 host printing 158

Information 210 line termination 68 local 28, 31, 64, 77, 163, 164, 225 local printing 155

Macintosh terminator 68

Most recently used 80

Most Recently Used 77

MRU 80 multiple local 79 names 32 opening 28, 77, 152

Options 65 quick open 95 recovery 223, 224 registering QSL 50 registering type 49 rename 153 saving 28, 161, 163 support 11 timestamp 166 types 33, 237

Unix terminator 68 unnumbered 81

File as host command 170

File extension syntax coloring 123

Qedit for Windows User Manual

File labels, MPE 191

File Options dialog 212

File types 66, 73, 237

Filename 189

Filters 78

Find 141–44, 141–44 first 144 in columns 145 in selection 145 last 144 options 144 part of file 145 selected text 144

Find String dialog 142

Firewall 1, 3, 193, 217 protocol 56, 217

Fold lines 81

Folder

Favorites 85

Font 111 default 124 nonprinting characters 93 print 157 r_ansi 93 window size 40

Force close 165

FORTRAN command 183 ftp 215, 219

Function keys 204, 206

G

Go To Line dialog 145

Goto previous position 141

Group 57, 80, 215, 219, 223

Guide line 113, 118

H

Hardware and Software Requirements 1

HELLO, MPE command 173

Help 4

Highlights 4

Host printer 159

Host command 167

$Oldpass 172

BYE 173 clear log 169

COBOL compile 172 copy log 169 dialog 168 disable 171

Index

• 267

duplicate output 173 environment 172

HELLO 173 interrupt 169 logon UDC 172

MPE 171 nonprinting characters 168

QEDSERVMODE 172 server configuration 172 settings 172

UDC 172

Host file 24, 193 closing 165 creating 63

MPE 212 opening 79, 152 wildcards 81

Host line numbers 156

Host name 46, 54–61, 54–61, 213, 215, 218, 220–22,

220–22

Host printing 158

HP 9000 1, 3, 53, 57, 217, 220

HTML Editor 79

I

Include files 180

Indent 68, 118 default 125

Information connection 212 document 211 transmission 213

Insert column 102

Insert mode 90

Insertion point 31, 141, 148 prevent sliding 148 undefined area 148

Install 7

HP-UX server 220

Network 8

Server 9

Typical 7

Workstation 8

Intelligent mouse 140

International characters 51, 94

Internet Explorer 79

Internet resources 4

Invisible characters 121 default 125

IP address 55, 193, 215–20, 222, 232

ISO8859 56

268

• Index

K

Keepalive transaction 194

Keyboard 90, 96, 141, 204 non-english 94

L

Language 64, 66 location 12

Language code syntax coloring 123 length exceeded 82

LF terminator 68

Line length 64, 66 maximum 137

Line number 67, 145–46 host 131 line number, out of 83

Line termination 68 default 137

LineFeed terminator 68

List $include 180

List all lines 180

Listfile 73

Load scripts 177

Local clipboard 98

Local file 154 closing 164 creating 31, 64 opening 77 operation 225 saving 163

Local trace 208

Log file server 212, 217, 218, 220, 231, 270

Login dialog 222

Logon UDC 20, 172

Long file name 49, 52

M

Macintosh files 68

Manage Scripts dialog 177

Manuals 11

Mark a position 141

Maximum length 81

Menu 45 application control 23

Edit 52, 65, 98, 100, 108, 146, 154

File 33, 54, 59, 61, 63, 64, 80, 108, 152, 155, 164,

188, 210, 232

Mark 145, 146

Options 13, 54, 58, 60, 61, 216, 218, 219, 221

Qedit for Windows User Manual

shortcut 46

View 26, 30, 49, 50

Window 87, 185 window control 32, 40

Menu bar 24, 45

Messages 31

Metacharacter 251

Most recent files 77

Mouse click double 37, 40, 41, 42, 52, 66, 224 triple 41, 43

Mouse operations 41

Mouse wheel 140

Moving the cursor 90, 96, 141

MPE 1, 3, 11, 20, 24, 32, 53–61, 80, 91, 210–23, 211–

13, 215–17, 222–23, 227–28, 232 compiling 183 environment 171, 173 notation 70 version 4.0 70

MPE file labels 191

MRU 77 search request 142

Multi-line host commands 170

MySQL syntax coloring 123

N

Native Language Support 56

Network 53 install 7, 8

Network requirements 2

New features 4

New Host File dialog 29, 59, 63

Newline missing 81

NLS 56

Nonprinting characters 82, 91, 92 host command 168

Notation

MPE 70

POSIX 70

Unix 69

O

Open application window 51 desktop icon 50 drag-and-drop 50, 51 from command line 75 host file 59, 79, 215 maximum length 81 selection 95 taskbar button 51

Qedit for Windows User Manual

unnumbered 81

Open a copy 81

Open dialog 46, 48, 64, 77

Open Host File dialog 29, 80

Oracle syntax coloring 123

Overwrite mode 90, 91

P

Page setup 155

Page size 157

Parentheses matching 122

Password 56 dynamic 215, 219 prompting 59

Paste Progress dialog 97

PASXL command 183

Pattern matching 143

PID 212

PIN 212 ping 215, 218, 220

Port 11, 216

MPE 1, 193

UNIX 1, 193, 218, 221

Port number 19

Position

Exchange 141

Go to 141

Save 141

POSIX 70, 211 notation 70

POSIX prefix 74

Preferences dialog 13, 162, 232

Print host 158 host line numbers 156 line numbers 156 lines per page 157 manuals 11 margins 157 page headings 156 page setup 155 wrap lines 156

Printer host 159

Process ID 212

Proxy server 193

Punctuation matching 122 enabling 122 unmatch alert 122

Index

• 269

Q

qedconn.dat 11, 12 qederr.log 12

Qedit worfile 188

Qedit workfile 28, 33, 188

Qeditmgr

MPE 20, 213, 227

UNIX 20, 214

Qedservmode 20, 21

QEDSERVMODE host command 172

QSL file extension 50 registering 50 qsldoc.pdf 11 qstart.pdf 11 qwin.ini 11, 12 qwin.pdf 11 qwinddb.bkp 12 qwinddb.dat 11, 12 qwinerr.log 11 qwintips.txt 11

R

Read only 78, 82–88, 231

Record length 64, 66

Record Length exceeded 82

Record number 131, 146

Recovery

HP-UX files 224

MPE file 223

Rectangular selection 44 copying 105 cutting 105 deleting 106 extending 96, 106 inserting 105 pasting 105

Redo 30, 108

Registering file types 49

Regular expression 143, 251 anchor 252 backreferences 256 character class 253 escape character 255 escaped sequences 255 metacharacter 251

Remove scripts 177

Rename text file 153 workfile 162

Rename workfile 162

270

• Index

Replace 147 pattern matching 147

Replace dialog 147

Requirements hardware 1 network 2

Software 1

Revert 108

Right-click 46, 47

Roman8-1999 56

Roman9 56

RPM 1, 215–17, 222, 233

Ruler 113, 124

S

Save all files 28, 164 as regular file 162 as workfile 154 automatic 166 position 141

Save As dialog 163

Script control 178

Script Control dialog 178

Script directories 176

Script-based features 175

Scripting language 175

Scroll 140 bar 41, 95 box 225 mouse wheel 140

Scroll lock key 90

Security/3000 57, 215, 219

Select All text 98, 153, 154

Selecting line 43 rectangle 44 word 42, 66

Selection as host command 170

Seleq 73

SendTo 49

Serial number 8–9

Server configuration 19, 159, 227 name 216, 219 trace 11 warning 82

Server configuration host command 172

Server install 9

Server name 19

Server port number 19

Server settings 213

Server trace 208

Qedit for Windows User Manual

Shift column 102

Shift text 103

Shift with tab 103

Shortcut 205 editing 205 menu 46, 189 searching 204

Shortcut keys 204

Smart search 64, 66

Sort columns 179 text 179

Spaces for tabs 67 trailing 68, 132

Special characters 51, 91, 92, 189

Split box 41 collapsing 37 command 37 views 35, 124

SQL syntax coloring 123

Square brackets matching 122

Status bar 30, 33, 40, 89 indicators 35

Support files 11

Switching applications 39

Syntax coloring 122

Allbase 123 ambiguity 123 extension 123 language code 123

MySQL 123

Oracle 123 precedence 124

SQL 123

T

Tab character 67, 92 compress 104 expand 104 shift with 103 stop 114, 115, 214

Tag 133, 134, 214

TCP/IP 2, 53, 161, 193 telnet 218, 221, 227

Temporary connection 54

Terminal emulator 64

Terminator

CR 68

LF 68

Qedit for Windows User Manual

line 68

Terminator, default line 137

Text 91 adding 91 copying 98 deleting 100 finding 142 moving 99 pasting 98 replacing 146 selecting 43, 94 shift 103 workspace 33

Tile horizontal 40, 186 vertical 40, 186

Time zone 226

Timeout 194

Tip of the day 22

Tip of the Day dialog 22

Title bar 24, 32, 39

Toggle keys 31

Toolbar 26, 45 buttons 27 moving 26 rectangular 27

Trace server 11

Trace log file 217, 218, 220

TRANCOMP command 183

Transmission information 213

Trial 216–17, 216–17

Troubleshooting 207

TXT file extension 50

TZ 226, 227, 228

U

UDC, logon 20

Undo 30, 108 transaction 107

Undo all 108

UNIX 1, 55, 57 host 53 notation 69

Unix files 68

Unload scripts 177

Unnumbered file 81

Upgrade 12

User Defined Command, logon 20

User labels, MPE 191

Index

• 271

V

VESOFT 21, 215, 219

W

warning folded lines 82 line number 83 server 82

Web site 4

Whole words 64, 66

Wildcards directory 72

Open Host File 81

Win32S subsystem 1

Window application 23 attributes 23 close 40, 164 control menu 32 document 31 maximize 40 minimize 40 restore 40 size 39 terminal 3, 188

Windows character set 56

Word search 143

Workfile 28, 33, 188, 232 rename 162

Save As 162

272

• Index

Qedit for Windows User Manual